PDS Reference Data Manager

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Version 2011 (V12) June 2011 DPDS3-PB-200034H

Copyright Copyright © 1984-2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc, all rights reserved. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

Contents Preface PDS ............................................................................................................................................... 11 What's New in Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) ........................................................................... 12 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 13 Project Organization ............................................................................................................................. 13 Reference Data Overview ..................................................................................................................... 14 Piping Job Specification Introduction ............................................................................................. 15 Graphic Commodity Data Introduction ........................................................................................... 16 Material Description Data Introduction ........................................................................................... 16 Standard Note Library Introduction ................................................................................................ 17 Label Description Library Introduction ............................................................................................ 17 Piping Assembly Library Introduction ............................................................................................. 17 Reference Database Introduction ......................................................................................................... 17 Delivered Reference Data ..................................................................................................................... 18 Reference Data Setup .......................................................................................................................... 18 PDS Environment ...................................................................................................................................... 21 PD Shell ................................................................................................................................................ 21 PD_Shell Form Conventions .......................................................................................................... 24 Common Tools on the PD_Shell Forms ......................................................................................... 24 Batch Processes ............................................................................................................................. 29 Help ....................................................................................................................................................... 29 Reference Data Manager........................................................................................................................... 31 Data Security......................................................................................................................................... 32 Reference Data Archival ....................................................................................................................... 34 Reference Data Location .......................................................................................................................... 35 Default Project Control Data ................................................................................................................. 35 Reference Database Management Data .............................................................................................. 36 Piping Job Specification ........................................................................................................................... 41 Material Reference Database Structure ............................................................................................... 41 Neutral File Input ................................................................................................................................... 42 Piping Materials Class Data (201) .................................................................................................. 45 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) ................................................................................... 48 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) ...................................................................................... 56 Instrument Component Specification Data (204) ........................................................................... 58 Tap Properties Data (205) .............................................................................................................. 61 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) ............................................................... 64 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) .............................................................................. 66 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) .................................................................................. 69 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232).......................................................................................... 71 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) ..................................................................... 73 Spec Writer ........................................................................................................................................... 74

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

3

Contents Features ......................................................................................................................................... 75 RDB Options File ............................................................................................................................ 76 Piping Materials Class Data Command.......................................................................................... 84 Piping Commodity Data Command ................................................................................................ 87 Piping Specialty Data Command .................................................................................................... 96 Instrument Data Command ............................................................................................................ 99 Tap Properties Data Command .................................................................................................... 102 Commodity Implied Data Command ............................................................................................ 104 Table Checker .............................................................................................................................. 107 Piping Job Specification Manager....................................................................................................... 107 Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset Options .............................................................. 110 Delete Option ................................................................................................................................ 112 Report Option ............................................................................................................................... 112 Piping Job Spec Report Manager ....................................................................................................... 114 Using the Report Commands ....................................................................................................... 114 Report Format Form ..................................................................................................................... 116 Report Discrimination Data Form ................................................................................................. 119 Report Form ................................................................................................................................. 125 Report Management Defaults Form ............................................................................................. 133 Piping Job Specification Tables ............................................................................................................ 135 PJS Tables and Functions .................................................................................................................. 135 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table ......................................................................... 136 Nominal Piping Diameter Table .................................................................................................... 137 Thickness Data Tables ................................................................................................................. 140 Materials Data Table .................................................................................................................... 142 Branch Insertion Tables................................................................................................................ 145 Gasket Separation Table .............................................................................................................. 149 Fluid Code Table .......................................................................................................................... 151 Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations ....................................................................... 152 RDB Tables ......................................................................................................................................... 155 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) ............................................................................................ 156 Bend Deflection Table (G04) ........................................................................................................ 158 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) ...................................................................... 159 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) ............................................................................................. 160 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) ............................................................................................... 161 Weld Type Table .......................................................................................................................... 164 Bolt Commodity Code Table ........................................................................................................ 166 Weld Clearance Table .................................................................................................................. 167 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table ................................................................................................ 168 Gasket Diameter Table................................................................................................................. 169 Field Fit Length Table ................................................................................................................... 170 Component Mirror Table............................................................................................................... 170 Operator Mirror Table ................................................................................................................... 171 Default End Preparation Table ..................................................................................................... 172 MTO Tables and Functions .......................................................................................................... 172 Piping Job Specification Tables Command ........................................................................................ 173 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 174 Compress Library ......................................................................................................................... 174 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 174 Create/Interactive Spec Tables .................................................................................................... 175 Create/Batch Spec Tables ........................................................................................................... 175 Revise Spec Tables ...................................................................................................................... 176

4

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Contents Delete Spec Tables ...................................................................................................................... 177 Report on Spec Tables ................................................................................................................. 178 List Spec Tables ........................................................................................................................... 180 Extract Spec Tables ..................................................................................................................... 180 Graphic Commodity Data ....................................................................................................................... 183 Graphic Commodity Library ................................................................................................................ 183 Symbol Processors ....................................................................................................................... 186 Sub-Symbol Processor ................................................................................................................. 187 Physical Data Definitions .............................................................................................................. 187 Parametric Shape Definitions ....................................................................................................... 192 Physical Data Tables .......................................................................................................................... 194 Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library ............................................................................. 195 Example of Physical Data Look-Up .............................................................................................. 195 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data .................................................................................................... 196 Connect Point Data ...................................................................................................................... 196 Bends and Branches .................................................................................................................... 198 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges ........................................................................................................ 198 Pipe, Tubing, and Hose ................................................................................................................ 199 Graphic Commodity Library Manager ................................................................................................. 199 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 200 Compress ..................................................................................................................................... 200 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 200 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data ............................................................................... 201 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data ....................................................................................... 201 Revise Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................................. 202 Delete Graphic Commodity Data .................................................................................................. 204 Report Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................................. 205 List Graphic Commodity Data ...................................................................................................... 205 Extract Graphic Commodity Data ................................................................................................. 206 Graphic Commodity Modules List ................................................................................................ 207 Physical Data Library Manager ........................................................................................................... 208 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 209 Compress ..................................................................................................................................... 210 Unapproved to Approved ............................................................................................................. 210 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data ............................................................................... 210 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data ...................................................................................... 211 Revise Physical Commodity Data ................................................................................................ 212 Delete Physical Commodity Data ................................................................................................. 213 Report Physical Commodity Data ................................................................................................ 214 List Physical Commodity Data ...................................................................................................... 216 Extract Physical Commodity Data ................................................................................................ 216 Table Formats and Naming Conventions ............................................................................................. 219 Table Conventions .............................................................................................................................. 219 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ 227 Table Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 228 Tables Required for Piping Components ..................................................................................... 228 Tables Required for Instrument Components .............................................................................. 231 Generic Tables .................................................................................................................................... 232 Variables for Generic Tables ........................................................................................................ 232 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) ........................................................................................... 236

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

5

Contents Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) ........................................................ 237 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) ........................................ 239 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) ............................................................................................. 241 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) ......................................................................................... 243 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) ............................................... 244 Piping Component Tables ................................................................................................................... 245 Variables for Specific Tables ........................................................................................................ 247 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) ................................................................ 251 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) ...................................................... 252 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A, P25A, P26A, P27A, P28A, P29A) ................................................................................................................................. 253 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) ................................................................................................... 255 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) .................................................... 256 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) ........................... 257 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59) ....................... 258 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) .................................................... 260 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B) ........................... 261 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) ............................................................................................................... 263 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components .................................................................. 264 Instrument Component Tables ............................................................................................................ 264 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) .................................................................................................... 264 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) .............................................................................................. 266 Material Description Data ....................................................................................................................... 269 Material Data in the Material Reference Database ............................................................................. 272 Short Material Description Library....................................................................................................... 273 Long Material Description Library ....................................................................................................... 279 Specialty Material Description Library ................................................................................................ 281 Material Description Library Manager ................................................................................................. 282 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 284 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 285 Load/Revise Interactive ................................................................................................................ 285 Load/Revise Batch ....................................................................................................................... 286 Replace Interactive ....................................................................................................................... 286 Replace Batch .............................................................................................................................. 287 Report Option ............................................................................................................................... 288 Table Checker .......................................................................................................................................... 291 Table Checker Form ........................................................................................................................... 293 Using the Report Commands ....................................................................................................... 294 Report Format Form ..................................................................................................................... 295 Discrimination Data Form ............................................................................................................. 298 Report Form ................................................................................................................................. 303 Report Management Defaults Form ............................................................................................. 311 Sample Table Checker Output............................................................................................................ 312 Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager ............................................................................................ 323 Support Tutorial Definition Manager ................................................................................................... 323 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 324

6

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Contents Compress ..................................................................................................................................... 324 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 324 Create Data .................................................................................................................................. 324 Revise Data .................................................................................................................................. 325 Delete Data ................................................................................................................................... 326 Report Data .................................................................................................................................. 327 List Data ....................................................................................................................................... 328 Extract Data .................................................................................................................................. 329 Library List .................................................................................................................................... 330 Standard Note Library ............................................................................................................................. 331 Standard Note Library Manager.......................................................................................................... 334 Create Library ..................................................................................................................................... 335 Compress ............................................................................................................................................ 335 Unapproved ==> Approved ................................................................................................................. 335 Create Standard Note Type ................................................................................................................ 336 Revise Standard Note Type ................................................................................................................ 336 Report Standard Note Library Contents ............................................................................................. 338 List Standard Note Data ...................................................................................................................... 339 Delete Standard Note Data ................................................................................................................. 339 Extract Standard Note Type ................................................................................................................ 340 Load Database .................................................................................................................................... 341 Standard Note Types List ................................................................................................................... 342 Label Description Library ....................................................................................................................... 343 Label Types ......................................................................................................................................... 343 Displayable Attribute Labels ......................................................................................................... 344 Alphanumeric Labels .................................................................................................................... 344 Displayable Attribute Message ..................................................................................................... 344 Commodity Code Attribute Message ............................................................................................ 345 Isometric Drawing Labels ............................................................................................................. 345 Report Labels ............................................................................................................................... 345 Clash Management Labels ........................................................................................................... 345 Label Description Library Manager ..................................................................................................... 347 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 347 Compress Library ......................................................................................................................... 348 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 348 Create Label Data ........................................................................................................................ 348 Revise Label Data ........................................................................................................................ 358 Delete Label Data ......................................................................................................................... 361 Report Label Data ........................................................................................................................ 361 Label Library Merger ........................................................................................................................... 366 Label Library Merger Interface ..................................................................................................... 367 Label Library Merge Workflow ...................................................................................................... 370 Piping Assembly Library ........................................................................................................................ 373 Piping Assembly Language ................................................................................................................ 373 Placing Taps in Assemblies ......................................................................................................... 383 Sample Piping Assembly Files ..................................................................................................... 384 Piping Assembly Library Manager ...................................................................................................... 386 Create Library ............................................................................................................................... 388

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

7

Contents Compress ..................................................................................................................................... 388 Unapproved ==> Approved .......................................................................................................... 388 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data ..................................................................................... 388 Create/Batch Assembly Data ....................................................................................................... 389 Revise Piping Assembly Data ...................................................................................................... 389 Delete Piping Assembly Data ....................................................................................................... 391 Report Assembly Data.................................................................................................................. 392 List Assembly Data ....................................................................................................................... 393 Extract Assembly Data ................................................................................................................. 394 Reference Database Revision Manager ................................................................................................ 395 Reference Data Conflict Report .......................................................................................................... 397 Table Change Report .......................................................................................................................... 401 Reference Data Impact Report ........................................................................................................... 407 Proposed RDB Changes Report ......................................................................................................... 410 MicroStation V7 Checker ........................................................................................................................ 415 Verify RDB Library................................................................................................................................... 417 Appendix: Reference Data Manager Error Messages .......................................................................... 421 Appendix: Codelists ................................................................................................................................ 423 CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40).......................................................................... 425 CL35, Approval Status (10) ................................................................................................................. 427 CL36, Structural Approval Status (15) ................................................................................................ 427 CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10)...................................................................................................... 427 CL50, Hold Status (10) ....................................................................................................................... 427 CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99) ...................................................................................... 428 CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999) .......................................................................................... 428 CL130, Construction Status (15)......................................................................................................... 432 CL145, Materials Grade (4500) .......................................................................................................... 432 CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999) ........................................................................... 462 CL160, Responsibility (25) .................................................................................................................. 470 CL180, Fabrication Category (99)....................................................................................................... 470 CL190, Coating Requirements (99) .................................................................................................... 471 CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10) ............................................................................................ 471 CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60) ......................................................................................................... 472 CL220, Insulation Purpose (40) .......................................................................................................... 472 CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99) .................................................................................................. 473 CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999) ................................................................................ 473 CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override .............................................................................................. 477 CL340, Safety Classification (99)........................................................................................................ 478 CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15) ........................................................................................ 478 CL365, Reporting Requirements (25) ................................................................................................. 479 CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10) ........................................................................................... 479 CL380, Piping Component Type (2500) ............................................................................................. 479 CL390, Action (40) .............................................................................................................................. 486 CL400, Option (999) ........................................................................................................................... 487 CL420, Piping Component Type/Source (25) ..................................................................................... 494 CL425, Piping/Tubing Type (25) ......................................................................................................... 494 CL430, Instrument Component Type/Source (25) .............................................................................. 494

8

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Contents CL499, Piping Notes (999) .................................................................................................................. 495 CL530, Accessory/Item Type (125) .................................................................................................... 497 CL550, Operator Actuator Type (200) ................................................................................................ 497 CL570, Design Standard (200) ........................................................................................................... 498 CL572, Wall Thickness Equation ........................................................................................................ 499 CL575, Geometry Standard (31999)................................................................................................... 499 CL576, Table Suffix/End Standard - Green (999) ............................................................................... 513 CL577, Table Suffix/End Standard - Red (999) .................................................................................. 517 CL578, Weight Code (399) ................................................................................................................. 522 CL990, Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms ............................................................................... 523 CL999, Standard Note Title (2000) ..................................................................................................... 524 CL1010, Area Units (25) ..................................................................................................................... 526 CL1028, Mass Units (40) .................................................................................................................... 527 CL1056, Temperature Units (15) ........................................................................................................ 527 CL1064, Pressure Units (40) .............................................................................................................. 527 CL1074, Density Units (35) ................................................................................................................. 528 CL1100, Weld Type (100) ................................................................................................................... 529 CL1162, Force Units (40) .................................................................................................................... 529 CL1201, Drawing Scale (540) ............................................................................................................. 530 CL1202, Drawing Size (199) ............................................................................................................... 530 CL1203, Interference Manager Approval Status (99) ......................................................................... 530 CL1204, Interference Clash Type (10) ............................................................................................... 531 CL1205, Interference Manager Action (10) ........................................................................................ 533 CL1207, Interference Manager Approval Method(10) ........................................................................ 533 CL1208, Clash Checking Option......................................................................................................... 533 CL1209, Clash Checking Volume Filter Option .................................................................................. 534 CL1310, Report Source (99) ............................................................................................................... 534 CL1312, Report Type (999) ................................................................................................................ 534 CL1410, Design Review Type (10) ..................................................................................................... 534 CL1605, Model Status ........................................................................................................................ 535 CL1610, Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40) ................................................................................. 535 CL1620, Drawing View Directions (7) ................................................................................................. 535 CL1630, Drawing View Composition Status (4) .................................................................................. 535 CL1710, Document Source (99) ......................................................................................................... 535 CL1720, Document Type (999) ........................................................................................................... 536 CL1900, Isometric Drawing Type ........................................................................................................ 539 CL2000, PD_Draw Document Type (999) .......................................................................................... 539 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 541

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

9

Preface PDS This document provides command reference information and procedural instructions for the Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) task.

List of PDS Documentation                             

DPDS3-PB-200003 - DesignReview Integrator (PD_Review) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200004 - Drawing Manager (PD_Draw) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200005 - EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200006 - Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200010 - PDS 3D Theory User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200013 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume I : Piping DPDS3-PB-200015 - PDS Equipment Modeling (PD_EQP) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200017 - PDS ISOGEN Reference Guide, Vol. 1 DPDS3-PB-200022 - PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200023 - PDS Project Setup Technical Reference DPDS3-PB-200025 - PDS Stress Analysis Interface (PD_Stress) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200026 - Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200028 - Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200030 - Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200033 - Project Engineer HVAC (PE-HVAC) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200034 - Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) Reference Guide DPDS3-PB-200035 - Report Manager (PD_Report) User's Guide DPDS3-PB-200041 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 2 : Equipment DPDS3-PB-200042 - PDS EDEN Interface Reference Guide Volume 3 : Pipe Supports DPDS3-PE-200016 - PDS Express Project Creation Quick Start Guide DPDS3-PE-200052 - PDS Ortho Draw User's Guide DPDS3-PE-200029 - Piping Model Builder (PD_Model) Reference Guide DPDS3-PE-200031 - Project Engineer HVAC Getting Started Guide DPDS3-PE-200032 - Project Engineer HVAC Overview DPDS3-PE-200045 - PDS Label Library Merger Utility DPDS3-PE-200047 - PDS Reference Data Auditing Tool DPDS3-PE-200048 - Pipe Supports Explorer Utility DPDS3-PE-200050 - Batch Services Quick Start Guide DPDS3-PE-200051 - Batch Services User's Guide

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

11

Preface PDS

What's New in Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) The following changes have been made to Reference Data Manager (PD_Data): Version 2011 (V12)  You can now check for MicroStation V8 design files in Reference Data Manager form. For more information see MicroStation V7 Checker (on page 415). (P3 PB:120457)  Additional symbol processors are added. (CR PB:8044)  Added branch table to incorperate ASME code to be in sync with SP3D. (CR PB:99694)

12

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 1

Introduction Welcome to the Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) module of the Plant Design System of software. Intergraph's plant design software can be used to design any type of plant — from petrochemical plants, offshore platforms, chemical and pharmaceutical plants, consumer products (food, beverages, cosmetics, soap, paper, and so forth), to power plants, waste water treatment plants, and cogeneration facilities. Specifically, the Plant Design System (PDS) integrates many discipline-specific software modules; these modules automate the many phases of a plant design project. Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is one of these modules. In PDS, placement of piping components is driven by the specification. The PDS reference data provides the selection criteria for the piping commodity items that are found in the piping job specification and the piping commodity libraries that are delivered with the product. This data is contained in the reference database (RDB) and can be used by other projects. The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) is specifically designed to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data ensures consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It is used to control and standardize the PDS 3D modules to reflect company practices and standards.

Project Organization Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the following organization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily. A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. The project is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project contains all the information required to work in a PDS task. The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of Piping projects. Each Piping project consists of a project control database, project design database, piping and equipment models, reference models (structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway), a set of drawings, and a collection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared by more than one project. A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use any of the other 3D PDS modules. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on setting up a project.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

13

Introduction

Reference Data Overview The Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) enables you to define and modify the reference data for the PDS 3D modules. This reference data is used to ensure consistency in the definition of piping specifications and commodity libraries. It enables you to control and standardize the PDS 3D tasks. You can also modify the reference data to reflect company practices and standards. The Reference Data for PDS 3D is composed of the following basic components:

Spec/Material Database         

Piping Materials Class Data (201) (on page 45) Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) (on page 48) Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) (on page 56) Instrument Component Specification Data (204) (on page 58) Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61) Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) (on page 64) Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) (on page 66) Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) (on page 69) Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) (on page 71)

Practice Specific Reference Data     

Physical Data Tables (on page 194) Piping Job Specification Tables (on page 135) Short Material Description Library (on page 273) Long Material Description Library (on page 279) Specialty Material Description Library (on page 281)

Practice Independent Reference Data  Graphic Commodity Data (on page 183)  Standard Note Library (on page 331)  Label Description Library (on page 343)  Piping Assembly Library (on page 373) The Reference Data Manager supports both approved and unapproved reference data for a project. The Project Control Database contains complete file management data for both an approved and unapproved version of each type of reference data such as the Piping Job Specification or the Graphic Commodity Library. This allows revisions to take place in unapproved files while other processes read the approved files. Once the information in the unapproved files has been verified, it can be posted to the approved reference data files.

14

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Introduction The following figure illustrates the various pieces of reference data required to place a 6" gate valve in a piping model and report on the placed component. It depicts how the various parts that make up PDS work together. Whenever possible, this placement example will be used throughout the rest of this document. For example, the discussion of the physical dimension tables will use the tables called to place the gate valve as examples.

See Also Project Organization (on page 13) Reference Database Introduction (on page 17) Delivered Reference Data (on page 18) Reference Data Setup (on page 18)

Piping Job Specification Introduction The Piping Job Specification (PJS) provides selection criteria for piping commodity items, piping specialty items, and instruments. The information for the Piping Job Specification is contained in the following files:  Specification/Material Reference Database - database containing the definitions for piping materials classes, commodity items, specialty items, and tap properties tables.  Spec Table Library - library containing the specification tables referenced in the PJS. The information in the Specification/Material Reference database and Spec Table Library tables is also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can extract and modify.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

15

Introduction The Piping Job Specification Manager enables you to create or revise the specification data in the Material Reference Database. You can use the interactive (forms-driven) specification writer or define/revise the data using ASCII neutral files. The Piping Job Spec Tables command enables you to create, revise, and delete tables in the Spec Table Library.

Graphic Commodity Data Introduction The graphic commodity data is used to define commodity items, specialty items, and instruments. The Graphic Commodity Library contains the parametric symbol definitions required to place piping and instrument components in a 3D model. When you place a component the system uses the Piping Job Specification to select the appropriate component from the parametric symbol definition library which then accesses the component dimensional data. The graphic commodity data is contained in the following object libraries:  Graphic Commodity Library - contains the parametric definitions for the commodity items.  Physical Dimension Libraries - contains dimension data for the commodity items. (A different Physical Dimension Library is required for each type of practice such as U.S., DIN, or British Standard).  Spec Table Library - contains the specification tables referenced in the PJS. The parametric descriptions and dimension tables are also delivered in the form of text libraries which you can extract and modify using the Graphic Commodity Library Manager and Physical Data Library Manager.

Material Description Data Introduction The Material Description Data is accessed for:  Material Take-off (MTO) reporting from the Design Database  Other miscellaneous reporting  Interfaces to the material control system  Stress analysis  Isometric drawing extraction. The Material Description Data consists of the commodity item data which is not stored in the Design Database, which is not required for the creation of graphic symbologies, and which is not part of the geometric data. This data is contained in the following files:  Material Data in the Specification/Material Database - database tables containing definitions for commodity items, criteria for implied material, and weld data.  Short Material Description Library - contains the short material descriptions for commodity items and taps.  Long Material Description Library - contains the long material descriptions for commodity items.  Specialty Material Description Library - contains the material descriptions for specialty items. The material descriptions are also delivered in the form of neutral files which you can modify and post to the libraries. The Material Description Library Manager enables you to create, revise, and delete data in the Material Description Libraries. You can use the Piping Job Specification Manager to load the material data tables in the Specification/Material Database.

16

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Introduction

Standard Note Library Introduction The text for code-listed attributes and standard notes is stored in the Standard Note Library. All attributes identified as code-listed are actually stored as integer values. The code list text associated with the integer is stored in the Standard Note Library. Information in the Standard Note Library is identified by note number and note type. Output from the library consists of free-format text which forms the standard note.

Label Description Library Introduction The Label Description Library contains the definitions for the following label types used in PDS 3D:  Orthographic drawing view specific labels  Orthographic drawing view identification labels  Orthographic drawing - user input  Displayable attribute messages  Commodity code attribute messages  Isometric drawing labels  Report labels  Clash management labels These labels are intelligent graphics with links to the material database. The Label Description Library Manager enables you to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label).

Piping Assembly Library Introduction The Piping Assembly Library contains the piping assembly definitions which define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. A Piping Assembly object library and text library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies are included in the product delivery.

Reference Database Introduction A database is a collection of formatted data which conforms to a set of pre-defined rules. The Specification/Material Reference Database is composed of a set of tables (entities) which represent categories of data. A table is a defined set of attributes which describe an item, such as the Piping Commodity Data table. An attribute is a single type of information to be stored about an item, such as nominal diameter or end preparation. Each attribute has a column number in the database table and a name which describes the piece of information to be stored. The actual information stored in the database is referred to as the attribute value. This value is a fixed data type; it can be either numeric, alphanumeric, or code-listed.  numeric data types can be either real (decimal) or integer. These attributes are used for quantitative values such as pressure or temperature.  alphanumeric data types (also called character) are used for textual information such as component names or descriptions.  code-listed data types are special integer values which help standardize and speed up data entry. A code list is a set of acceptable values for a particular attribute which can be referred to

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

17

Introduction by an index number. A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value is defined using one of the selections from a particular code list set.

Delivered Reference Data The following reference data is delivered in the reference database products for the corresponding practices (such as RDUSRDB or RDDINRDB). File Description

Library Object

Library Text

Physical Dimension Table Library us_pcdim.l

us_pcdim.l.t

Piping Job Specification Table Library

us_pjstb.l.t

us_pjstb.l

Short Material Description Library us_shbom.l

-

Long Material Description Library

-

us_lgbom.l

Specialty Material Description us_spbom.l Library For the DIN RDB substitute din_ for us_ in the listed library file names. The following reference data, which is not unique to any specific practice, is delivered in the PD Shell product in the \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib directory. File Description

Library Object

Library Text

Graphic Commodity Library

pip_gcom.l

pip_gcom.l.t

Piping Assembly Library

assembly.l

assembly.l.t

Label Description Library

labels.l

-

Standard Note Library

std_note.l

std_note.l.t

Reference Data Setup A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administrator before you can use the Reference Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on:  Loading PDS 3D products.  Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.  Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.  Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS. In addition to the information specified in the Project Administrator Reference Guide, you should complete the following steps before using the Reference Data Manager.  Load the appropriate Reference Data product (such as RDUSRDB for U.S. Practice or RDDINRDB for DIN Practice).  Edit the pds.cmd file to identify the text editor to be used when revising reference data through the Reference Data Manager forms. You can specify any text editor that has been loaded on the workstation. The default setting for Windows systems is Notepad. $ENV {'PD_EDITOR'} = '';

18

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Introduction 



Edit the pds.cmd file to define PDS_COMMIT_INTERVAL to control the commit interval for use in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This has the same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance. Identify the location of the Reference Data files as described in Reference Data Location (on page 35).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

19

SECTION 2

PDS Environment The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. All the supported applications use a common interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. This ensures consistency across applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product. The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. The modules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while working in the product. The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface to Intergraph's Network Licensing System.

See Also PD Shell (on page 21) Help (on page 29)

PD Shell The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with the PDS 3D Modules. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by clicking Start > All Programs > PD_Shell > PD_Shell. This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed to run the product, and it identifies the location of the product files. These files can be located on the workstation or a server on the network. See pds.cmd for more information on this file. The script also activates the Plant Design System Environment form.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

21

PDS Environment To make colors easier to read on flat screens and projectors, a zip file with modified color for PDS forms is delivered as alternatecolorfb.zip.

This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions. Schematics Environment — Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used to create and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams, process flow diagrams, and instrumentation database records. Equipment Modeling — Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module, which provides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipment model graphics and database information. FrameWorks Environment — Provides access to the FrameWorks module, which provides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models, create and revise structural drawings, and propagate structural models. Piping Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create piping and in-line instrumentation in the model; revise existing model graphics and database information; and verify the integrity of the data in the model. Electrical Raceway Environment — Provides access to the Electrical Raceway module, which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and revise raceway models and access raceway utilities. Piping Design Data Manager — Provides access to a set of options that are used to verify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with a model. Piping Model Builder — Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphics environment. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model of the piping network. Pipe Support Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used to create pipe supports in the model, and revise existing pipe support model graphics and database information.

22

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

PDS Environment Pipe Stress Analysis — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information from piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products. Interference Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to check for interferences among project models and to control approved interferences. Isometric Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract isometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometric drawings. Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulate drawings and drawing views; provide access to the interactive graphics environment for drawings; and provide access to a plot manager and vector hiddenline manager. DesignReview Integrator — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract information to form label files for use in SmartPlant Review and to review data from a SmartPlant Review session. Report Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise report format files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports. Project Administrator — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create a project, create and revise project files, define project seed data, and control the project. Reference Data Manager — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to control the reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data, Graphic Commodity Data, Alphanumeric Commodity Data, Standard Note Library, Label Description Library, and Piping Assembly Library. User ID — Used for access control. This field also sets the Review User ID for use in the Interference Manager module. If access control has been defined, you must key in a valid user ID as defined by your system manager to gain access to the projects. Refer to Access Control Manager, page 467, for more information on using access control. If access control has not been defined, no entry is required for this field. Password — Key in the password for the specified user ID. Project List Field — Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you to select the active project. The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only, 3D-only, and 2D & 3D). An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatible with the active project. For example, if the active project is a 2D-only project, you cannot access the Interference Manager module. If access control has been defined, only those projects for which you have some level of access are displayed. Message Area — Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the active process. Error messages are displayed in red.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

23

PDS Environment

PD_Shell Form Conventions The following conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons, lists, and prompts that make up the environments. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the non-Microstation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstation's display system. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets. In general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget. You move through the PD_Shell forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the form. Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen gadget and press . For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button. You use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields, toggle buttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on. The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments: Enter - When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the or key for the data to be entered into the system. You can also press or to move through a set of key-in fields. Delete - If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the key to erase character(s) to the left of the cursor.

Common Tools on the PD_Shell Forms There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. The following describes these tools.

Standard Commands The PD_Shell forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of the form windows. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type of operation. The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until you delete the Help window. The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that is associated with the active form. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design System Environment form. The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch. The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form. Control returns to the immediately preceding form in the hierarchy. The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or option, the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control

24

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

PDS Environment returns to the preceding form. The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify. Scrolling List Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a list only if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, select the arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on which arrow you select. The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. These arrows scroll lists line by line. There is a button that slides between these two arrows to indicate your position on the list. To page through the list, select the space above or below the sliding button. The list pages up or down accordingly. You can also select the slider and, while pressing , slide the button up or down the bar. The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The size and position of the button on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position within the list. All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically by the design area number or model number in ascending order. In some forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and then selecting the Accept button. Key-in Fields Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are box-shaped and dark gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. A bar cursor appears in the active key-in field. Key in your input, and press . To change a field, re-select the field and key in the new information. Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item that is being defined. If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form that lists the code list values for the selected field.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

25

PDS Environment MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of all design files. Therefore, the system automatically converts any input for the file specification and path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading into the Project Control Database. Display-List Boxes A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you select data from a list instead of keying in information. For example, there is a display list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. At the end of the field, there is a small box with horizontal dashes. When you select this display list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid input values displays. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field. Shift Left and Shift Right buttons At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked with arrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons. Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the text display to the front of the field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field. Toggle A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices, one of which is always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the two choices. Roll-Through List A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long. Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. The option displayed is active. Standard Window Icons When using this software, you can press along the edge of a form or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field, or other gadget, to display a box of icons. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window. The following list defines the available window icons.

26

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

PDS Environment Collapse/Restore Repaint Pop-to-bottom Modify/Resize Pop-to-top Restore Size

Path Location Fields Some key-in fields are used to specify paths for various files and folders, such as project folders, model files, reference data files, drawing files, and isometric drawing files. Prior to PDS 8.0, these path fields required the user to enter a full path, including the drive name, such as d:\project1\piping\models. Beginning with PDS 8.0, path fields accept share names as input. For example, if you have the project1 folder set up as a share, you could enter \project1\piping\models or project1\piping\models as the path for piping models. This new functionality allows administrators to set different permissions for shares used by different sets of users. For more information on setting up shares and permissions, see the PDS Project Setup Technical Reference.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

27

SECTION 3

Batch Processes When you install the PDS 3D applications, the system creates the necessary batch queues for that application. Refer to Loading Products in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for a listing of the batch queues. PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment while the system processes a request. Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission at a specified time.

Help On-line Help is a special feature of your application software. Help provides instant access to information from the application reference documents, such as command descriptions and explanations, prompt sequences, and much more. There are several avenues you can take to find information about a command or subject. For instance, Help provides  A table of contents that lists subjects by topic and subtopic (in a hierarchy).  An alphabetized index of every command or subject that has been documented for the software.  A glossary to help you become familiar with product-specific terms.  The ability to move up, down, back, and forth through Help by using cross-references and links to primary and secondary commands.  The ability to quickly search through Help for information on a specific subject or command.

When you first select Help, the Help Table of Contents is displayed in a pop-up window. Select a topic from this list or select a command from the menu to display an article in the pop-up window. Whenever possible, PDS Help is context sensitive. For example, if you select the help icon for a given form, Help that is specific to that form is displayed. The Help window has buttons that you can use to manipulate either Help or the window itself as follows: Scroll Bar - Moves up or down in an article that is displayed in the Help window.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

29

PDS Environment Help Command Buttons - Enable you to move around in the Help file. Cancel or File > Exit - Exits Help and closes the Help window. 1. Select the Help button from the command window or form.

If you select Help while using a command, help on the active command is displayed. If no command is active, the table of contents is displayed.

2. Use the command buttons or scroll bar to move around in Help. —OR— Exit Help.

30

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 4

Reference Data Manager The Reference Data Manager provides access to the various functions associated with the PDS 3D Reference Database. Select the Reference Data Manager option from the PD Shell form.

Select the option to be performed. Spec Writer — Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Material Reference Database using a forms interface. See Spec Writer (on page 74). Piping Job Specification Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Material Reference Database using neutral files. See Piping Job Specification (on page 41) and Piping Job Specification Manager (on page 107). Piping Job Specification Tables — Used to create, modify, and delete information in the Piping Job Spec Table Library. See Piping Job Specification Tables (on page 135) and Piping Job Specification Tables Command (on page 173). Piping Job Spec Report Manager — Used to define and generate reports of data in the Material Reference Database. See Piping Job Spec Report Manager (on page 114). Graphic Commodity Library Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete graphic commodity library data (Eden modules). See Graphic Commodity Library (on page 183) and Graphic Commodity Library Manager (on page 199). Physical Data Library Manager — Used to create, modify, and delete physical data (dimension tables) in object and text libraries. See Physical Data Tables (on page 194) and Physical Data Library Manager (on page 208).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

31

Reference Data Manager Material Description Library Manager — Used to create and modify alphanumeric commodity data. See Material Description Data (on page 269) and Material Description Library Manager (on page 282). Support Tutorial Definition Manager — Used to create, revise, and delete data in the Tutorial Definition Library. See Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager (on page 323). Standard Note Library Manager — Used to create, revise, and report the code lists and standard notes associated with the PDS 3D modules. See Standard Note Library (on page 331) and Standard Note Library Manager (on page 334). Label Description Library Manager — Used to define the graphic parameters for a label (such as level, line weight, and color code) and to define the format of the label (what information comprises the label). See Label Description Library (on page 343) and Label Description Library Manager (on page 347). Piping Assembly Library Manager — Used to create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in the Piping Assembly Library. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. See Piping Assembly Library (on page 373) and Piping Assembly Library Manager (on page 386). Table Checker — Used to verify that all the commodity spec tables, entries, and Eden modules for a piping materials class exist in the graphic data libraries for the project. See Table Checker Form (on page 293). Reference Database Revision Manager — Used to create a set of reports for coordinating revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. See Reference Database Revision Manager (on page 395). Reference Database Management Data — Used to define the file names for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item. See Reference Database Management Data (on page 36). Default Project Control Data — Used to define the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, program files, and report files). See Default Project Control Data (on page 35). MicroStation V7 Checker — Used to find any MicroStation V8 design files in a project. This utility generates an ASCII - based log file, which provides a report on files contained in the project. You can then remove any MicroStation V8 files from the project. See MicroStation V7 Checker (on page 415).

Data Security The Reference Data Manager provides data security features for the following reference data libraries in the event of accidents such as, electrical power surges and network failures. These features also protect the libraries in the event that a library is being shared by multiple projects, and different users in different projects mistakenly attempt to revise one of the libraries simultaneously.  Graphic Commodity Library  Physical Data Library  Piping Job Specification Table Library  Short Material Description Library  Long Material Description Library  Specialty Material Description Library  Standard Note Library

32

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Data Manager  Label Description Library  Piping Assembly Library When you enter the Reference Data Manager to create, revise, or delete data in any of the these libraries, the system creates a temporary file for that library. This temporary file is named .c and will be created in the same directory location as the object library. Once you successfully exit the applicable library manager, the system deletes the temporary file. If a PDS user is unable to exit the Reference Data Manager for any reason (such as a power failure), the system displays a dialog box when the next user enters the Reference Data Manager to revise that library. You must decide which of the following situations applies and respond accordingly.





If you are certain that the warning results from a previous unusual exit, make one of the following decisions.  If a corrupted library (including the corresponding source library and revision library) has been restored from a backup, select the accept option.  If you are concerned with the integrity of the library for any reason, select the exit option. Then restore the library, the corresponding source library, and the corresponding revision library to their previous state (before the last revisions). If you are aware that a different user may be revising that library within a different project, select the exit option.

This feature requires that PDS users have write access to the directory in which the libraries reside. The Reference Data Manager will display an error message, if the user does not have privileges for write access to the applicable directory and the user will not be able to revise that library. When a PDS user exits a data creation or revision session, the Reference Data Manager verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within the library. The system displays an error if the Reference Data Manager determines that an error exists in the binary tree structure. In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

33

Reference Data Manager

Reference Data Archival PDS includes a Project Archival Manager to provide archival and retrieval facilities for projects, including reference data. For more information about the Project Archival Manager, see Project Archival Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide. For specific information about archiving reference data, see Reference Data in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.

34

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 5

Reference Data Location This section describes the options used to define the location of the Reference Data files on the network.  Reference Database Management Data (on page 36) — Defines the location for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.  Default Project Control Data (on page 35) — Defines the default location for the source files used to load the RDB files (such as neutral files, language files, and report files).

Default Project Control Data This option defines the default location for common reference files used by the project (such as neutral files, report files, and library files). You can also change these file locations during the operation of the applicable managers

Operating Sequence 1. Select Default Project Control Data from the Reference Data Manager form to define the default location for the RDB source files. 2. Select the field to be defined and key in the location of the source files and the associated node name.  Piping Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Eden source files.  Dimension/Spec Table Path / Node — The default location of the Dimension Table and Spec Table source files.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

35

Reference Data Location Piping Spec Path / Node — The default location for the neutral files to be used to load the Specification/Material Reference Database and Material Description Libraries.  Assembly Path / Node — The default location for the Piping Assembly Language source files.  Standard Note Library Path / Node — The default location for the Standard Note (code list) source files.  Equipment Eden Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment Eden source files.  TDF Table Path / Node — The default location for the Equipment table definition files.  Model Builder Path / Node — The default location for the model builder language source files. 3. Accept any changes to the Project Control Data. 

Reference Database Management Data This option activates the Reference Database Management Data form used to define the file names for Reference Database Files, graphic commodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. You can define both approved or unapproved RDB data for each item.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Reference Database Management Data from the Reference Data Manager form.

2. Select RDB File Type Select the RDB file from the list of files. You can use the scroll arrows to scroll through the listed files.

The system identifies the file for the selected field in the fields at the bottom of the form. There are no default settings for these files; you must define the applicable file locations before you can continue.

36

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Data Location Material/Specification Reference Database — This field identifies the Material Reference Database for the project. Refer to the Project Setup Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this database.  Piping Job Specification Tables (on page 135) Library — This field identifies the location of the Piping Job Spec Table library.  Short Material Description Library (on page 273) — This field identifies the library which contains the short bill-of-material description for all piping commodity items and the BOM description addenda for taps.  Long Material Description Library (on page 279) — This field identifies the library which contains the long BOM description for all piping commodity items. The long BOM description is only used for requisitions.  Specialty Material Description Library (on page 281) — This field identifies the library which contains the BOM description for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports. This library tends to be customer-specific.  Standard Note Library (on page 331) — This field identifies the location of the standard note library.  Label Description Library (on page 343) — This field identifies the location for the label description library.  Piping Assembly Library (on page 373) — This field identifies the location for the Piping Assembly library. This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies.  Graphic Commodity Library (on page 183) — This field identifies the library which contains the Eden modules used to place components in the model.  Physical Data Tables (on page 194) Library — These fields identify the library files which contain the physical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards.  Commodity Synonym Library — This field identifies the user-defined library which contains the map for translating the default piping commodity names used in the P&ID Task to names specified by the user in the Piping Job Specification.  Orthographic Drawing Borders — This field identifies the drawing border files to be used when creating drawings. A set of border files are delivered to the directory win32app\ingr\pddraw\border. You must specify which style of borders is to be used. Key in any changes to the selected RDB files. Refer to Delivered Reference Data (on page 18) for a listing of the delivered reference data files. If you specify an unapproved file, the system will use the unapproved file for all Reference Data Manager operations (such as revising entries in a library.) Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting the choice of data for a model file or drawing. You can select Approved --> Not Approved to copy the approved definition of the selected RDB file to the Not Approved fields. Select confirm to update the information. Refer to the individual managers for information on posting the unapproved information to the approved files. You can select Default All Library Locations to define a default location for all approved and all unapproved library files. You can select Copy All Standard Libraries to copy the delivered library files to a specified location. Select Accept following each change to the reference data to accept the specified file location. — THEN — Select Cancel to exit the form. 

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

37

Reference Data Location Default All Library Locations This option assigns a default network address, pathname, and file specification to the various Reference Database libraries for both the approved and unapproved libraries. You can override any of these default specifications by selecting the appropriate library and keying in the file information. Specify Default Nodename Key in a default network address and pathname to be used for all approved Reference Database libraries and a network address and pathname to be used for all unapproved libraries. The file specifications for all libraries are determined automatically on the basis of the industry practice and the following naming convention. When copying the Not Approved library to the Approved library, the copy will not occur if the approved library is the most recent or has the same date as the unapproved library. Library

File name

Graphic Commodity Library

pipe_gcom.l

Label Description Library

labels.l

Standard Note Library

std_note.l

Piping Assembly Library

assembly.l

Piping Spec Table Library

pjs_tbl.l

Short Material Description Library

short_bom.l

Long Material Description Library

long_bom.l

Specialty Description Library

spclty_bom.l

Physical Data Library

_pcdim.l

The text to be used for the is determined in the following manner.

38

Practice

Prefix

U.S. Practice

us

European - DIN

din

European - British Standard

bs

European - Practice A

eua

European - Practice B

eub

International - JIS

jis

International - Australian

aus

International - Practice A

ina

International - Practice B

inb

Company Practice

cmp

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Data Location Copy All Standard Libraries This option copies the delivered Reference Database libraries from the applicable product directories to the disk locations specified in the Reference Database Management data of the Project Control database. This option provides a new user with a simple method to create a Reference Database using RDB products delivered by Intergraph. This is not intended for use in a production environment. The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the PD Shell product. Graphic Commodity Library

Standard Note Library

Label Description Library Piping Assembly Library The following Reference Database libraries are copied from the applicable Reference Database product (such as rdusrdb or rddinrdb). Physical Data Library

Long Material Description Library

Piping Spec Table Library

Specialty Description Library

Short Material Description Library The system also copies the applicable Table Revision Management Libraries for the Piping Spec Table Library and Physical Data Libraries. The text to be used for the standard is determined in the following manner. Practice

Prefix

U.S. Practice

us

European - DIN

din

European - British Standard

bs

International - JIS

jis

International - Australian aus The list of available products is determined from the list of exported variables as specified in the pds.cmd shell script. Therefore, this command presently searches for the following exported variables: Product

Practice

RD_USRDB

U.S. Practice

RD_DINRDB

DIN

RD_BSRDB

British Standards

RD_JISRDB

JIS

RD_AUSRDB Australian The file specification recorded in the Project Control Database, and not that of the library in the delivered product, will be used for the destination library. If the RDB product resides on a remote server (or workstation), you must manually mount the directory that includes the RDB product and change the exported variable in the pds.cmd shell script accordingly. The system will display an error message for any of the following conditions.  Any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project are in use (locked). None of the libraries are copied.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

39

Reference Data Location  

40

The network address for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project is undefined. None of the libraries are copied. The network address and path name for any of the active Reference Database libraries for the project cannot be mounted. None of the subsequent libraries are copied.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 6

Piping Job Specification The Piping Job Specification (PJS) defines the characteristics, properties, design standards, and company practices associated with piping commodity items, piping engineered items, and instruments. When you select an item for placement in the model, the system uses the active parameters (such as piping materials class and nominal diameter) to search the Piping Job Specification for the selected item. Then the system reads the PJS for the parameters required to define the item.

See Also Material Reference Database Structure (on page 41) Spec Writer (on page 74) Piping Job Specification Manager (on page 107) Piping Job Spec Report Manager (on page 114)

Material Reference Database Structure The Material Reference Database contains a set of tables which define the Piping Job Specification data. The numbers in parentheses indicate the database table number.  Piping Materials Class Data (201) (on page 45)  Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) (on page 48)  Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) (on page 56)  Instrument Component Specification Data (204) (on page 58)  Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61)  Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) (on page 64)  Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) (on page 66)  Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) (on page 69)  Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) (on page 71)  Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) (on page 73) The Piping Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class Data. The Reference Database Revision Management Data table is totally system-defined. It stores the revision dates for the other database tables in the Material Reference Database. The revision dates are updated automatically when you use the Piping Job Spec Manager to load, revise, or delete data in these database tables.

Attribute Types The following conventions are used to designate the field type for database attributes. character(n)

alphanumeric field n characters in length

integer

long (double word) integer

short

short integer

double

real (floating point) value

standard note nnnn Standard Note Type for code-listed attribute

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

41

Piping Job Specification Code-Listed Attributes A code-listed attribute is an attribute whose value must be defined using one of the selections from a particular code list in the Standard Note Library. In the following database description, attributes which are code-listed are identified by a standard note number at the end of the line following the field type description. For example, the line 6. fluid_code , character(6) , SN 125 indicates that fluid_code is defined in terms of code list numbers belonging to Standard Note 125, Fluid Code/Connector Type. A possible entry for this attribute would be 197 for chlorine gas (GCL). Refer to Appendix: Codelists (see "Table Checker" on page 291) for a listing of the code list sets associated with PDS 3D.

Connect Point Data The Piping Commodity, Piping Specialty, and Instrument database tables classify connect point dependent data about a component in terms of green and red connect points. The following conventions are used to coordinate the two sets of data:  If data is only shown under the green connect point, it applies to all ends of the component.  If a component has ends with different nominal diameters (regardless of other end properties), the larger nominal diameter is designated as the green connect point.  If a component has ends with the same nominal diameter but other end properties which differ, the following rules apply:  If the ends have different termination types (regardless of the values for schedule/thickness), the end(s) whose end preparations have the lowest codelist number are designated as the green connect point.  If the termination types are the same but the values for rating, schedule, or thickness differ, the "stronger" ends(s) are designated as the green connect point.

NPD Units Nominal piping diameter is defined as a special coded number (NPD units) with the following formula.  For metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters).  For English units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for English units.

Neutral File Input A neutral file is an ASCII text file used to load information into the Material Reference Database. The neutral file must conform to the following rules:  There must be an entry for each user-defined parameter in the Material Reference Database. For certain attributes, you can use a dash (-) to indicate that a default value be used. The SEQUENCE statement can be used to define the order of entries in the neutral file.



42

The system_unique_no attribute is never user-defined. Therefore, it should not be included in the neutral file data or in the list of attributes defined by the SEQUENCE statement. Each entry (attribute) can begin at any point along the input. You can set the spacing between each entry by specifying SINGLE_SPACING or DOUBLE_SPACING as the first item in the file. If you do not define the spacing, double spacing is used.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification   





For single line comments, place an exclamation point (!) at the beginning of the line. All comments are disregarded by the system. You can place blank lines anywhere in the file for readability. These lines do not affect the information being copied. You can use any of the three PDS conventions to enter fractional Nominal Piping Diameters. The entries 2-1/2 2.5 2 1/2 are all equivalent ways of entering the same figure. If you use the SINGLE_SPACING option, 2 1/2 can be used only if enclosed by single quotes ('2 1/2'). You can use both metric and English units. The default system of units must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. Entries are automatically interpreted as English. To declare the system of units, add the appropriate units marker to the entry: mm for metric " for English The Tap Properties Table must include the Table Name along with other data by using the TABLE statement.

SEQUENCE Statement The SEQUENCE statement is an optional statement which can be used to define the order of the parameters in the neutral file. If the SEQUENCE statement is used, it must be placed before any entries. The SEQUENCE statement can only be used once per file. If the SEQUENCE statement is omitted, it is assumed that the parameters appear in the order defined by PDS. Format SEQUENCE= P1 P2 P3 P4 ... Pn where: SEQUENCE=

keyword which can be entered in either upper or lower case letters.

P1,P2,...Pn

parameters 1 through n. The values of P1...Pn are the parameter numbers assigned by PDS, and their position tells the system the order in which to enter them. At least two spaces must separate the keyword and each parameter.

Examples SEQUENCE=

5

3

4

1

2

The first parameter read corresponds to PDS parameter #5, the second to PDS parameter #3, the third to PDS parameter #4, the fourth to PDS parameter #1, and the fifth to PDS parameter #2. You can use the convention *Pn to indicate an attribute that is not defined in the neutral file. All of the *Pn attributes should be placed at the end of the SEQUENCE statement following the list of included attributes. For example, SEQUENCE= 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 *4 *5 *21 *22

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

43

Piping Job Specification ORDER Statement Neutral files translated from VAX PDS data may contain an ORDER statement rather than a SEQUENCE statement. This statement performs the same function as the SEQUENCE statement except that it lists the order of the attributes as they were defined in the VAX Piping Job Specification Database.

TABLE Statement The TABLE statement defines a table name to be associated with a particular set of data. The active table name remains unchanged until another TABLE statement is encountered. The TABLE statement can be used more than once in a neutral file. Format TABLE= table_name where TABLE=

keyword which can be entered in upper or lower case letters.

table_name the name of the table associated with the following data. There must be at least one/two spaces (depending on the default spacing selected) between the keyword and the table_name. For example, the Tap Properties Table below defines two tables (C001, and C002) by using the Table keyword to segregate the data for each table being defined. Double_Spacing Order= 2 3 5 4 6 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW Rev=2 Date=12-May-1995 Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX Table= C002 ! Description= SWE CL6000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL6000 421 NREQD E$50421072 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX : : 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX

44

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Piping Materials Class Data (201) The piping materials class data is independent of nominal piping diameter and commodity item. A piping materials class defines a classification of components based on design data and service limits. Much of the design data is stored in tables so that common information can be accessed by more than one piping materials class. The Piping Materials Class Data table contains 23 attributes. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. piping_mater_class, character(16) This attribute identifies the service number, spec class, spec name, or spec number. 3. revision_no, character(2) This attribute identifies the revision number for the data in the piping materials class. It is user-defined and is not updated automatically when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised.  The revision number of the unapproved Material Reference Database is incremented only, when you specify a new revision number in the neutral file.  The revision number of the approved Material Reference Database is updated to that of the unapproved Material Reference Database, when the unapproved data is posted to the approved Material Reference Database. 4. version_no, character(2) This attribute represents the version number, as determined by the system, for the data in this piping materials class (including the Commodity Item data). The version number starts with A and is incremented (B,C,D,...) when you revise the piping materials class. This attribute is under the complete control of the system. The Piping Job Spec Manager increments this attribute when the piping commodity data for that piping materials class is revised or reloaded. When that piping materials class is posted from the unapproved to the approved Material Reference Database, the version number for that piping materials class is reset to A in the unapproved Material Reference Database. 5. revision_date, character(10) This user-defined attribute can be used to define a date for the latest revision to the data in a piping materials class. 6. fluid_code, character(6), SN 125 This attribute can be used to define the type of fluid for which the piping materials class is intended. You can specify:  a single fluid code value (such as 521 for process) from code list set 125.  the name of a fluid code table to define a set of fluid code values. Refer to Fluid Code Table (on page 151) for more information. To use the specified fluid code(s), you must also set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form. 7. mater_of_construct, character(6) This attribute defines the materials of construction class for the piping materials class. This code has a detailed definition outside the scope of PDS that represents the decision of the Project Metallurgist regarding the piping system. It is required for reporting and making

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

45

Piping Job Specification matches and comparisons with values for this parameter from the Piping Design Database. This parameter includes the material code. 8. corrosion_allow, double This attribute defines the corrosion/erosion allowance that applies to the piping materials class. It is required for reporting and to calculate the wall thickness of piping components whose thickness is not specifically included in the piping materials class. 9. mat_description, short, SN 148 This code-listed attribute is a generic description of the materials used for this piping materials class (such as carbon steel). This attribute is only used for reporting. 10. service_lim_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the table used to determine maximum pressure as a function of temperature. This table includes the pressure and temperature sets that form the boundary for which the commodity items, engineered items, and instruments included in this piping materials class are suitable (unless you define a lower maximum temperature limit for a specific commodity item). You must insure that all commodity items within the piping materials class are acceptable within the boundary of this table. Refer to Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table (on page 136) for more information on this table. 11. diameter_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the nominal piping diameter table used to verify valid nominal piping diameters in this piping materials class. Refer to Nominal Piping Diameters Table (see "Nominal Piping Diameter Table" on page 137) for more information. 12. thickness_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the thickness data table used in piping wall thickness calculations for this piping materials class. Refer to Thickness Data Tables (on page 140) for more information. 13. materials_table, character(6) This parameter defines the materials data table used to determine the material properties required for piping wall thickness calculations in the piping materials class. Refer to Materials Data Table (on page 142) for more information. 14. thickness_equation, character(6) This attribute identifies the default piping wall thickness equation to be used for this piping materials class. If a schedule/thickness parameter for an item specifies the default calculation, then this equation is used to perform the piping wall thickness calculation. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations (on page 152) for more information. 15. branch_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the branch insertion table used to determine the name of the branch commodity item to be used for tee and lateral branches. The item name is determined as a function of branch geometry, run size, and branch size. The output of the branch table is the item name of a commodity item (AABBCC code). Refer to Branch Insertion Tables (on page 145) for more information. 16. tap_data_table, character(6) This attribute defines the name of the tap properties table which includes those parameters required to define a tap on a specific commodity item. Refer to Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61) for more information. 17. vent_drain_macro, character(6)

46

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification This attribute is not currently used by the PDS software. Several vent and drain definitions are contained in the delivered Piping Assembly Library. 18. gasket_separation, character(8) This attribute is used to determine the actual gap that is assumed between seating surfaces of two mating bolted ends. It can coincide with, but is not necessarily the compressed gasket thickness. You can override this value during a design session by changing the type of gasket that applies to the joint. (You cannot override this value by defining a specific gasket gap override value.) This attribute exists as alphanumeric data.  A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a gasket separation value in the physical subunits specified for the model.  All other values are assumed to identify a table name for gasket separation data as a function of nominal piping diameter in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. Refer to Gasket Separation Table (on page 149) for more information. Refer to the description of gaskets in the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more details. 19. standard_note_no_a, short , SN 499 20. standard_note_no_b, short

, SN 499

These code-listed attributes provide the index numbers to CL499 for notes that apply to this piping materials class. The input to the Standard Note Library is the note number. The output is the free- format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 1 through 199 are allocated for defining the PJS. 21. revision_mngt_date, integer This system-defined attribute identifies the date of the latest revision for the data in this piping materials class. 22. bend_deflect_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the Bend Deflection Table to be used for this piping materials class. This attribute is useful for defining specs for underground piping. If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Bend Deflection Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore, you need not define a Bend Deflection Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database. Likewise, you need not revise any existing neutral files to include this column. Note that the Bend Deflection Table name in the Piping Materials Class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The maximum length of the default Bend Deflection Table name, as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 20 characters. Refer to Bend Deflection Table (G04) (on page 158) for more information. 23. pipe_length_table, character(6) This attribute identifies the Pipe Length Threshold Table to be used for this piping materials class. This attribute is useful in defining specs for underground piping. If this column is undefined (blank), the system will use the default Pipe Length Threshold Table specified in the Type 63 data through the Project Data Manager. Therefore, you need not define a Pipe Length Threshold Table for each piping materials class in the Material Reference Database. Note that the Pipe Length Threshold Table name in the piping materials class data is limited to 6 characters to be consistent with the other tables referenced in this data. The maximum

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

47

Piping Job Specification length of the default Pipe Length Threshold Table name, as specified with the Project Data Manager can be as many as 13 characters. Refer to Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) (on page 160) for more information.

Neutral File Format The following is a sample neutral file for the Piping Material Class database table. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by Piping Materials Class. The Sequence= keyword in a piping materials class data neutral file does not require *21 for the revision management date. Any previously created piping materials class data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change.

Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\classes.pmc. A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory. bend_tbl.pmc

gasket.pmc

pharm.pmc

equiv_npd.pmc

gskt_tbl.pmc

piplen_tbl.pmc

fluid_code.pmc

metric_npd.pmc

thickness.pmc

fpipe.pmc

Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) The Piping Commodity Specification Data defines all the components, pipes, bolts, and gaskets associated with a particular Piping Materials Class. It defines the standard components found in a manufacturers catalog (commonly referred to as off-the-shelf components). Because the Piping

48

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Commodity Specification Data is linked to the Piping Materials Class, a separate set of commodity items must be defined for each Piping Materials Class. Information for connect point data is defined in terms of two types of connect points known as green and red connect points. Refer to Connect Point Data (on page 196) for more information on green and red connect points. The Piping Commodity Specification Data table contains 28 attributes: 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. piping_mater_class, character(16), index 1 This attribute identifies the Piping Materials Class for the piping commodity. 3. commodity_name, character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name. This can be:  a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names.  a Piping Job Specification access name. If you do not use the AABBCC code, you must define a Commodity Synonym Library for proper communication with the P&ID Task. The PDS commodity item names are also used with the delivered Place Component forms. If you use a different code, you should create a forms customization file as defined in the Piping Designer. 4. option_code, short, SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary commodity item, a secondary commodity item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. This parameter is used as a commodity override in Piping Design. You can select the unique options (as defined in CL400) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary commodity item). Option 2 is reserved as the secondary commodity item. Option codes 4001 to 4010 are used to specify manual input of bend data for pipe bends. Option codes 4500 to 4999 are reserved for company practice (user-defined). Option codes 5000 to 5999 are used to refer to implied components. 5. maximum_temp, double This attribute is used if the commodity item is temperature dependent. It represents the maximum temperature for which this commodity item is acceptable. When a commodity item is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification, the system verifies that the normal operating temperature, the alternate operating temperature, the normal design temperature, and the alternate design temperature are less than this maximum allowable temperature. If this maximum is exceeded by any of these temperatures, the system automatically searches for another occurrence of the same commodity item.  For gaskets, to help determine the gap thickness at bolted joints, the maximum temperature value is used as an input to the Gasket Gap Table. Proper entry of temperature values in the PJS assists the definition of gap thicknesses when gaskets with different gap thicknesses are used in the same piping materials class.  If you specify the default value (-9999), no test is performed. Any reports created from the Piping Job Specification depict this default value as alphanumeric blanks. The order in which entries of the same piping commodities with different maximum temperature values are made in the PJS (PDtable_202) is not considered by the system; however, these entries must have the same option code in order to be considered by the commodity selection in the Place Component command. When you do define the piping commodity, a maximum temperature value must be defined for each entry or an error

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

49

Piping Job Specification message is displayed. To define the highest maximum temperature for the same piping commodity, set the maximum temperature equal to or greater than the maximum temperature of the spec limits table for the applicable piping materials class instead of using an undefined value ('-'). 6. gcp_from_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) 7. gcp_to_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point (first size) in NPD units. The to value must equal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212. The applicable NPD value specified at placement is used to search for the suitable component in the Piping Job Specification. The default system of units (" for inches, or mm for millimeters) must be declared once in the beginning and each time the default system is changed. If no units are given, the value is automatically interpreted as inches. 8. gcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation for the green connect point. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values: 2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations You can define end compatibilities by using the End Preparation Compatibility Table. (Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide.) 9. gcp_rating, character(8) This attribute identifies the pressure rating for the green connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. Ratings can be expressed in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria:  CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating  xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API.  OTxxxx refers to the rating of a connect point that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends that meets the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but has pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating. For bolts and gaskets, you must use a numeric pressure rating (do not use the characters CL, #, or OT). If any character entries are encountered, the system will be unable to locate the proper information. Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such rating values consist of alphanumeric characters, the system strips all alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables. If the rating in the PJS is expressed in terms of alphabetic characters only, the system uses the characters in accessing the data tables. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS.

50

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 

GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.  OTHER can be used to identify a non standard rating value.  NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the attribute rating as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. 10. gcp_sch_thk, character(8) This attribute identifies the schedule thickness value for the green connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations (on page 152) for more information on this attribute.) In order of preference, schedule, and thickness are expressed in terms of:  A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS, and S-XXS. If a schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example, S-SDR13.5), it is defined in terms of its wall thickness.  A specific schedule such as S-40, S-40S, and S-80.  NREQD is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:  The thickness value is not required in purchasing the component.  Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.  Either stress analysis is not applicable, or, if applicable, the component is to be considered infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.  A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter. To insure compatibility between the PJS, data tables, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed in the form: .xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals.  An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. Refer to Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations (on page 152) for a more detailed description of the naming conventions for these calculations.  MATCH indicates the need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1. 11. gcp_table_suffix, short, SN 576 This code-listed attribute is used to further reference the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data. This attribute is also referred to as the table suffix.  For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the green connect point.  For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 12. rcp_from_nom_diam, short 13. rcp_to_nom_diam, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point (second size). The to value must equal or exceed the from value. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in Tables 211 and 212.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

51

Piping Job Specification For a full size component, you should set these parameters to - (hyphen). In cases such as a concentric reducer or weldolet, this value must be less than the corresponding green value. 14. rcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 See gcp_end_prep. 15. rcp_rating, character(8) See gcp_rating. 16. rcp_sch_thk, character(8) See gcp_sch_thk. 17. rcp_table_suffix, short, SN 577 This attribute is used to further reference the dimensional data for a specific component.  For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the red connect point.  For DIN standards, it represents the built-in length selection flag (or reihe number) for valves and wall thickness selection flag for pipes and fittings. A parametric definition is used when connection graphics are required in the model and orthographic drawings. 18. commodity_code, character(16) The commodity code is a user-assigned code that together with the NPD and schedule/thickness uniquely defines the component. It defines the customer's commodity code (or part number). This attribute is the index into the Material Data Tables and the Material Description Library. The commodity code can be defined in one of three ways:  Commodity codes with neither an * or a + prefix, indicate a commodity item that has no associated implied components.  Commodity codes prefixed by an *, indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one associated implied component (such as a lap joint flange and stub end). For more information on defining * implied items, refer to the PD_Report User's Guide. It is not recommended that specification implied (*) items be generated by size change components (that is, reducers, reducing flanges, and so forth) as the NPD assigned by the system for the implied component can be either the larger or smaller (green or red) NPD of the implying item based on how the system traces the line.  Commodity codes prefixed by a +, indicate a commodity item (primary component) which has one or more associated implied components as defined in Table 212. The default length for a commodity code is 16 characters, but you can modify this length if needed. This value is specified in two files: design.ddl and reference.ddl. To customize the character length, modify the design.ddl file as follows:  In table 34 (Piping Component Data), modify the value in column 8.  In table 50 (Piping/Tubing Data), modify the value in column 12. Modify the reference.ddl file as follows:  In table 202 (Piping Commodity Specification Data), modify the value in column 18.  In table 211 (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data), modify the values in column 2 and column 7.  In table 212 (Piping Commodity Implies Material Data), modify the values in column 2 and column 7. When you modify these values, set the character limit to be one more than the number of characters you actually want in the commodity code. This is necessary for

52

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification you to add a * or + prefix if needed. For example, to create a 20-character commodity code, set the specified values to 21. You must make these modifications before the project is created. For valves, the commodity code also defines the name of the dry weight table (required for stress analysis). For large diameter valves (25"+), it is used to build the name of the operator dimension table. 19. model_code, character(6) This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec valves. Each model code is classified by:  Item name  option  size ranges  end preparations  ratings The model code includes the definition of the graphic representation of the component in the piping model. Depending upon the circumstances:  One or more model codes can be assigned to a single Item Name (for example, GAT, GATR, and GATF are all used for 6Q1C01).  The same model code can be assigned to different Item Names. For gaskets, this attribute can be used to prioritize gasket entries in the Piping Materials Class. The priority is set with a numeric value (integer or decimal) greater than zero. Non-numeric values are ignored by MTO and not considered to be a priority selection. The smaller the value the higher the priority. A value of 999999 is interpreted as an undefined priority. 20. PDS_sort_code, character(6) This field can be used to specify the length (in subunits) for Purchased length pipe, or to specify the gasket diameter for gaskets. The gasket diameter table is used if the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to _GKT. The system uses the NPD to determine the gasket inside and outside diameters.  If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is set to "_GKT", the gasket outside and inside diameters are generated using the table gasket_commodity_code_GKT.TBL.  If the pds_sort_code for the gasket spec entry is not "_GKT", the gasket outside diameter is equivalent to the NPD of the rated component and the gasket inside diameter is undefined. 21. modifier, double This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, miters, and valves. It has various uses depending on the type of commodity item as defined below.  For pipe bends, it defines the bend radius of the pipe in terms of the numeric factor by which the nominal diameter of the pipe is to be multiplied to obtain the bend radius. You can provide additional bend data for pipe bends in the Commodity Options section of the Place Component command. If you specify a commodity option code with a value between 4001 and 4010 in the Reference Database, you can specify the bend radius and lengths of the straight pipes in the dialog box that displays. You can also specify the bend radius as a length in sub-units or a function of the nominal piping diameter. The Piping Eden module that supports this option uses the length of the straight section located at connect point 1 as Dimension_1 and the length of the straight section located

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

53

Piping Job Specification at connect point 2 as Dimension_2. You can also specify that these two lengths are the same. The default data displayed in the dialog box contains the following values:  The pipe bend radius is computed from the default modifier value in the Piping Commodity Data for the selected pipe bend, active nominal piping diameter, model system of units, and NPD system of units.  The length of the straight section at end 1 is zero by default.  The length of the straight section at end 2 is zero by default. When this option is used for placement of a pipe bend, the lengths of the straight section are loaded into the Piping Design Database as dimension_a for end 1 and dimension_b for end 2. This data is saved for reconstruction.  For pipe, it defines the joint quality factor (E) times 100 to be used during branch reinforcement calculations in those cases where the wall thickness is not calculated.  For orifice flanges and drip ring tees, it defines the number of taps to be provided. A value of 1 defines a single tap. A value of 2 defines 2 taps, 180 degrees apart. A value of negative 2 (-2) defines 2 taps, 90 degrees apart.  For nippolets and nipples, it defines the length of the component.  For reinforcing pads and welds, it defines whether data about the component is to be derived from tables in the system (0) or from the user by prompting (1).  For gaskets, it defines the gasket thickness to be used in procuring the gasket. This is the actual gasket thickness for MTO reports - not the compressed gasket thickness (gasket separation), which is derived from the Piping Materials Class data.  For bolts, it defines whether the bolt is a stud bolt (0 or positive), or machine bolt (negative). The absolute value of this modifier, which ranges from 0 to 5, determines the applicable bolt extension.  For valves, it represents the code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type) which defines the symbol description and the source of the physical data for the valve operator. If this value is a negative number (such as -3), the operator is not displayed when placing the component. 22. geometric_standard, short, SN 575 This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. This parameter represents the vendor or industry standard, and the material if either affects the dimensions of the commodity item. Code list numbers 2-6999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to US piping practices. Numbers 7000-27999 are reserved for geometry standards that apply to European piping practices. Numbers 28000-31999 are reserved for specific company practices. 23. weight_code, short, SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 24. fabrication_cat, short, SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 25. materials_grade, short, SN 145

54

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the component. This data is used in wall thickness calculations. It can also be used to access physical data in the Physical Data Library. 26. standard_note_no_a, short, SN 499 27. standard_note_no_b, short, SN 499 These code-listed attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in standard note type 499 that apply to this commodity item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free-format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 200 through 599 are allocated for piping commodity items. 28. input_form_type, short, SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format The following is a partial listing of the sample neutral file for the Piping Commodity Specification Data. Entries in this table should be sorted alphanumerically by commodity_name. The Sequence= keyword in a piping commodity data neutral file does not require the *2 for the piping materials class name. Any previously created piping commodity data neutral files will not require any revision as a result of this change.

Sample Files A set of neutral file for US practice are delivered in the files \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\*.pcd (one for each piping materials class specified in the classes.pmc file). A set of sample files depicting various options are delivered in the \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data directory. bend_tbl.pcd

gasket.pcd

pharmf.pcd

equiv_npd.pcd

gskt_tbl.pcd

pharmk.pcd

fluid_code.pcd

metric_npd.pcd

piplen_tbl.pcd

fpipe.pcd

pharm.pcd

thickness.pcd

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

55

Piping Job Specification

Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) This database table contains data for a specific specialty item. It is used to define those specialty items which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The specialty items are defined for the entire project, they are not partitioned by Piping Materials Class. The Piping Specialty Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. You can also place specialty items interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing specialty items. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. piping_comp_no, character(20) This attribute uniquely identifies the specialty component number. It is sometimes referred to as Item Number. 3. model_code, character(6) This attribute identifies the piping specialty name. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name or a PDS commodity item name. 4. option_code, short, SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can select the unique options (as defined in standard note 400) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, the primary item is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in the Piping Designer. 5. gcp_from_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) 6. gcp_to_nom_diam, short

(NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point. 7. gcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 These attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. This value is an intelligent code list. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values: 2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations 8. gcp_rating, character(8) These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating under Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 9. gcp_sch_thk, character(8) These attributes identify the schedule or thickness value for the green/red connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats.) 10. gcp_table_suffix, short, SN 576

56

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification These code-listed attributes identify the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data.  For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.  For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 11. rcp_from_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) 12. rcp_to_nom_diam

, short

(NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these values are set to zero. 13. rcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 See gcp_end_prep. 14. rcp_rating, character(8) See gcp_rating. 15. rcp_sch_thk, character(8) See gcp_sch_thk. 16. rcp_table_suffix , short, SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix. 17. physical_data_id , character(8) This parameter can be used to identify the name of the physical dimension table in the Physical Data Library to be used for this engineered item. 18. PDS_sort_code, character(6) This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index to a geometric data table for piping specialties. This is an optional input. 19. modifier, double This attribute is used for pipe bends, elbows, and miters. It represents the bend radius in terms of the nominal piping diameter. 20. geometric_standard , short, SN 575 This attribute provides a reference to the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard, such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN, or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. 21. weight_code, short, SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the component. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the component. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 22. fabrication_cat, short, SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 23. materials_grade, short, SN 145 This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the component. It can be used to access physical data in the Graphic Commodity Library. 24. standard_note_no_a, short, SN 499

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

57

Piping Job Specification 25. standard_note_no_b, short, SN 499 These attributes provide index numbers to standard notes in 499 that apply to this specialty item. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free-format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 600 through 799 are allocated for piping specialties. 26. input_form_type, short, SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

Neutral File Format

Sample Files A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\specialty.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical specialty items is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharms.data.

Instrument Component Specification Data (204) This table contains the data for a specific instrument item. It is used to define the instruments which are used frequently by a particular company or installation. The instruments are defined for the entire project; they are not partitioned by PMC. The following data exists in the Instrument table. The Instrument Component Specification Data table contains 26 attributes. You can also place instruments interactively in the model by defining the necessary parameters at the time of placement. No entries in the PJS database are required for these interactive definitions. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing instruments. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. instrument_comp_no, character(20) This attribute identifies the tag number for the instrument item. You can modify the character length for this attribute. 3. model_code, character(6) This attribute identifies the specific item name for generic bends, spec flanges, or spec valves. This can be a Piping Job Specification access name or a PDS commodity item name. Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for more information on item names.

58

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 4. option_code, short, SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. You can select the unique options (defined in a standard note) from a form. If no option is specified at placement, the default option 1 is used. Option 2 is reserved as the secondary item. This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. 5. gcp_from_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) 6. gcp_to_nom_diam

, short (NPD Units)

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the green connect point. 7. gcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 These code-listed attributes identify the end preparation for the green/red connect point. The system determines the termination type based on the range of values: 2 - 199 bolted terminations 300 - 399 male terminations 400 - 599 female terminations 8. gcp_rating, character(8) These attributes identify the pressure rating for the green/red connect point. This parameter exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for more information on standard formats.) 9. gcp_sch_thk, character(8) These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for more information on standard formats.) 10. gcp_table_suffix, short, SN 576 These code-listed attributes reference the source of the generic dimensional data, such as flange data or piping outside diameter data.  For AMS standards, it represents the table suffix for the connect point.  For DIN standards, it represents the piping outside diameter selection flag (reihe number) for pipes and fittings. 11. rcp_from_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) 12. rcp_to_nom_diam, short (NPD Units) These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (low bound to high bound) for the red connect point. For a full size component, these parameters are set to zero. 13. rcp_end_prep, short, SN 330 See gcp_end_prep. 14. rcp_rating, character(8) See gcp_rating. 15. rcp_sch_thk, character(8) See gcp_sch_thk. 16. rcp_table_suffix, short, SN 577 See gcp_table_suffix. 17. physical_data_id , character(8)

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

59

Piping Job Specification This parameter can be used to reference the set of physical data from the Physical Data Library to be used for this instrument item. 18. PDS_sort_code, character(6) This attribute can be used to define an arbitrary index in the geometric data table for instruments. This is an optional input. 19. modifier, double This parameter, if applicable, is used to determine the type of valve operator for instrument valves. It specifies the identification of the symbol description and the source of the physical data for a valve operator. 20. geometric_standard, short, SN 575 This code-listed attribute identifies the source of the data (which is usually an industry standard such as ANSI, ISO, or DIN; or a company standard) from which the specific geometry of the commodity item can be deduced. 21. weight_code, short, SN 578 This code-listed attribute defines the weight code for the instrument. It determines the table to be used in finding the dry weight of the instrument. It is required for those cases where material causes the dry weight data but not the dimensional data to differ for a specific geometric industry standard. 22. fabrication_cat, short, SN 180 This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 23. materials_grade, short, SN 145 This code-listed attribute identifies the material code, specification, grade-temper, and joint efficiency for the instrument. It can be used to access physical data in the Piping Graphic Commodity Library. 24. standard_note_no_a, short, SN 499 25. standard_note_no_b, short, SN 499 These code-listed attributes provide the index number to standard notes in NL499 that apply to this instrument. The input to the Standard Note File is the note number. The output is the free-format text which forms the standard note. In the delivered data, note numbers 800 through 999 are allocated for instruments. 26. input_form_type, short, SN 990 This code-listed attribute defines the type of input form to be used to define data with the Spec Writer command.

60

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Neutral File Format

Sample Files A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\instrment.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical instruments is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharmi.data.

Tap Properties Data (205) This table contains the tap properties data that is a function of the tap properties table name and the nominal piping diameter. These tables define the piping taps which can be added to any of the components included in a piping materials class. The system uses the information in these tables and the nominal diameter to provide values for rating, end preparation, schedule/thickness, and tap code. Tap tables do not allow a NPD range; there must be an individual entry for each tap diameter. The NPD entry in the tap table should be either imperial units or metric units depending on the NPD requirements of the project. For imperial units, enter the specified NPD, such as 0.375. The software will provide a default unit of inches when the value is loaded into the project. For metric NPD units, enter the units after the value on the first NPD entry. For example: ! Diam Opt Rating Prp SC/Th Tap Code 10mm 1 591 NREQD E$37591XXX 20 691 591 NREQD E$37581XXX The Tap Properties Data table contains 8 attributes. The following kinds of taps may be defined in this table:  No-hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of a pipe support trunnion. For example, a no-hole tap may be placed on an elbow or tee to allow the subsequent placement of a pipe

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

61

Piping Job Specification trunnion for a pipe support; the diameter of this no-hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed.  Hole taps that permit the subsequent placement of piping, piping components, and instrument components. For example, a hole tap may be placed on a cap to allow the subsequent placement of a reducing component such as a flatolet; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the component part on which placed. A hole tap can also be placed on a blind flange to allow the placement of plain piping; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the plain piping.  Hole taps that permit the venting or draining of a piping and/or instrument component. For example, a hole tap can be placed on an elbow downstream of a relief valve; the diameter of this hole tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired drain hole.  Component taps that represent a tap connection, rather than a hole. For example, a socketwelded component tap may be placed on a gate valve to represent a socketwelded connection furnished by the valve manufacturer. The diameter of this component tap must be defined to have the same nominal diameter as the desired connection. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. tap_table_name, character(6) This attribute identifies the name of the Tap Properties Data Table. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: C  next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap NPD, and the tap option, must be unique. 3. nominal_piping_dia , short This attribute defines the value for the nominal tap diameter. 4. option_code, short, SN 400 This code-listed attribute identifies the option code which determines the search criteria. This parameter enables you to request that the system retrieve the primary item, a secondary item, or another special option from the Piping Job Specification. If no option is specified at placement, this attribute defaults to option 1 (primary item). This parameter is used as a component override in Piping Design. 5. end_preparation, short, SN 330 This code-listed attribute identifies the end preparation. The system recognizes a certain range of values as being flanged termination types, another range as being butt welded termination types, and so forth. 6. rating, character(8) This attribute exists as alphanumeric data. The system interprets the first set of sequential numeric characters as being the pressure rating value. (Refer to the description of pressure rating for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 7. sched_thick, character(8) This attribute identifies the generic or specific schedule, a thickness value, or a calculation. (Refer to the description of schedule and thickness for Piping Commodity Data for more information on standard formats.) 8. tap_material_code, character(10) This optional attribute can be used to access the Material Description Library for the tap's material description addendum. It must be a unique reference to the Material Description

62

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Library, including material descriptions for commodity items. In reporting or isometric extraction, this text can be appended to either the short or long descriptions of the component to which the tap applies. This attribute is also referred to as the Tap Code. Refer to the listing of the tap descriptions in the Short Material Description Library (on page 273) for more information on the tap commodity code.

Neutral File Format 6 8 Double_Spacing Sequence= 3 4 6 5 7 ! By=GJH Ckd By=RJW

8 Rev=2

Date=12-May-1988

Table= C001 ! Description= SWE CL3000 default taps ! Diam Opt Rating Prp Sc/Th Tap Code 0.375 691 591 NREQD E$37591XXX > 0.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$50421064 0.5 691 591 NREQD E$50591XXX > 0.75 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E$75421064 0.75 691 591 NREQD E$75591XXX > 1 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E001421064 1 691 591 NREQD E001591XXX > 1.25 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$2421064 1.25 691 591 NREQD E1$2591XXX > 1.5 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E1$5421064 1.5 691 591 NREQD E1$5591XXX > 2 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E002421064 2 691 591 NREQD E002591XXX 2.5 691 591 NREQD E2$5591XXX > 3 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E003421064 3 691 591 NREQD E003591XXX 3.5 691 591 NREQD E3$5591XXX > 4 1 CL3000 421 NREQD E004421064 4 691 591 NREQD E004591XXX 5 691 591 NREQD E005591XXX 6 691 591 NREQD E006591XXX 8 691 591 NREQD E008591XXX 10 691 591 NREQD E010591XXX 12 691 591 NREQD E012591XXX 14 691 591 NREQD E014591XXX 16 691 591 NREQD E016591XXX 18 691 591 NREQD E018591XXX 20 691 591 NREQD E020591XXX 24 691 591 NREQD E024591XXX 26 691 591 NREQD E026591XXX 28 691 591 NREQD E028591XXX 30 691 591 NREQD E030591XXX 32 691 591 NREQD E032591XXX 34 691 591 NREQD E034591XXX 36 691 591 NREQD E036591XXX 42 691 591 NREQD E042591XXX 48 691 591 NREQD E048591XXX

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

63

Piping Job Specification

Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\taps.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical tap properties is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_tap.data.

Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) The Size-Dependent Data table contains the data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on the commodity code, nominal piping diameter, and schedule/thickness. This table is used for miscellaneous batch reporting, such as construction cost reports and requisition orders, and interfaces to material control, stress analysis, and isometric drawing extraction. There are multiple occurrences for a specific commodity code and a specific pair of green and red nominal piping diameters in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table because schedule/thickness is not included in the commodity code. When reducing branch components are to be entered, items of equal size must be placed before items of unequal size. The Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data table contains 10 attributes. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. sys_commodity_code, character(16) This parameter identifies the customer's commodity code (or part number). You can modify the character length for this attribute. 3. gcp_nom_diam, short 4. rcp_nom_diam, short These coded attributes identify the nominal piping diameter for the green/red connect point in NPD Units. 5. gcp_sch_thk, character(8) 6. rcp_sch_thk, character(8) These attributes identify the schedule thickness value for the green/red connect point. This parameter exist as alphanumeric data.  A generic schedule such as S-STD, S-XS, and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length, it is defined in terms of its wall thickness.  A specific schedule such as S-40, S-60, and S-80.  NREQD is used if the thickness value is not required in purchasing the component, empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values, and stress analysis is not applicable.  A value with all numeric characters is interpreted as a wall thickness value in the same physical units as nominal piping diameter.  An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form Cyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. 7. commodity_code, character(16), index 1

64

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification This attribute identifies the customer's commodity code or vendor's part number. It is not required for the customer's commodity code if the customer's commodity code is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter or thickness. 8. weld_weight, double This parameter represents the total weld required at all welded ends of the commodity item. 9. unit_price, double This attribute identifies the unit price (materials cost) for the commodity item. 10. manhours, double This attribute identifies the unit manhours associated with the commodity item.

Neutral File Format

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pcd_size.data.

Data Retrieval The data retrieval from the Size-Dependent Data table involves data for a commodity item that is dependent upon nominal piping diameter and schedule/thickness. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO report creation process.

inputs (search criteria) pointer to the commodity item dependent data NPD green - first size NPD red - second size schedule/thickness - green connect point schedule/thickness - red connect point

outputs customer's commodity code or vendor's part number weld data price data (materials cost) - unit price labor data - unit manhours

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

65

Piping Job Specification

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) The Implied Material Data table contains the implied material data for a specific commodity item that is dependent on both the Piping Commodity Library code and nominal piping diameter range. This data is used strictly for generating implied material for MTO reporting and material control. It is reserved for spec implied material, such as caps or stubs, for a specific commodity item. It is also used for reporting the implied components of a commodity item (for example, cap screws). The Piping Commodity Implies Material Data table contains 10 attributes. The entries in this tables should not be confused with mating implied items (such as welds, bolts, nuts, or gaskets) which are generated automatically by the system. Refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) User's Guide for more information on implied items. A unique commodity code must be defined for each commodity definition. For example, if a commodity code is defined for gate valves from 2" to 14", but you want a different description for an 11" gate valve, you must assign a new commodity code to the 11" valve. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. sys_commodity_code, character(16) This parameter identifies the customer's commodity code (or part number), if it is not dependent upon nominal piping diameter. You can modify the character length for this attribute. 3. gcp_from_nom_diam, short 4. gcp_to_nom_diam, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the green connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification. NPD is defined as a special coded number with the following formula.  for Metric units, the coded number equals the size (in millimeters)  for English Units, the coded number equals the size (in inches) times 32 plus 5000. coded number = 32*diameter + 5000 (in) This allows nominal piping diameter to range from 1 mm to 5000 mm in 1 mm increments for metric units, and to range from 1/32" to at least 200" in 1/32" increments for the English System of Units. 5. rcp_from_nom_diam, short 6. rcp_to_nom_diam

, short

These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters for the red connect point in NPD units. These values are not necessarily the same as the range in the Piping Job Specification. For a full size component, these parameters should be set to '-'. 7. commodity_code , character(16) , index 1 This attribute identifies the Piping Commodity code of the implied material. It is used to generate an MTO line item as a result of a piping commodity item in the Piping Design model. The implied material is generated by accessing the Piping Commodity Library - not by accessing the Piping Design database. 8. quantity, double This attribute identifies the quantity of the implied material. 9. fabrication_cat, short

66

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification This code-listed attribute identifies the shop/field fabrication and purchase status of a component. It defines how the component was supplied and how the component was fabricated (for example, Shop Supplied, Field Fabricated). 10. standard_note_no , short This code-listed attribute provides index numbers to standard notes in CL499 that apply to this implied material.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

67

Piping Job Specification Neutral File Format

68

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Sample Files A sample neutral file for US practice is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data\implied.data. A sample file containing various bio-pharmaceutical gasket data is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\pharm_212.data.

Data Retrieval Data retrieval from the Implied Material Data table involves implied material data for a commodity item that is dependent on nominal piping diameter range. This form of data retrieval is used during the MTO Report Creation process and Material Control.

inputs (search criteria) pointer to the commodity item dependent data

outputs Commodity code of the implied material Quantity of the implied material Fabrication category of the implied material Standard note for the implied material

Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) The Component Insulation Exclusion Data is used to completely or partially exclude the insulation of components on insulated lines with respect to interference checking. For each piping component, piping specialty, or instrument component (excluding pipes) on an insulated line, the Piping Envelope Builder will search the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be completely excluded from that component's interference envelope.  green nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)  red nominal piping diameter of the component (range search)  heat tracing requirements (range search)  insulation purpose (range search)  normal operating temperature (range search) For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component's commodity name in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data.  If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component's interference envelope.  If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component's model code using the same data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of model code, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component's interference envelope.  Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the component's interference envelope. For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component's model code in the Component Insulation Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the component's interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the component's interference envelope.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

69

Piping Job Specification The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment that is associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. The Component Insulation Exclusion Data table contains 13 attributes. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. commodity_name, character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code. 3. model_code, character(6) For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19). For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 4. gcp_npd_from, short 5. gcp_npd_to, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. 6. rcp_npd_from, short 7. rcp_npd_to, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. For full size components, use a dash (-) for these attributes. 8. heat_tracing_from, short, SN 200 9. heat_tracing_to, short, SN 200 These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 10. insul_purpose_from, short, SN 220 11. insul_purpose_to, short, SN 220 These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 12. nor_oper_temp_from , double 13. nor_oper_temp_to , double These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the component or instrument. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that normal

70

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design temperature are not considered.

Neutral File Format !

DEFINE COMPONENT INSULATION Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 I15AS 4 12 3 3 6Q2C76 4 12 3 3 REDE 4 12 2 10 3 3

EXCLUSION DATA 5 5 5

5 5 5

150 150 150

200 200 200

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\component.data.

Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data provides for partial exclusion of flange insulation thickness from the generation of interference envelopes. This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table, the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data in this table for each bolted end of each piping component or instrument component on an insulated line that are determined to be insulated. The system only searches for components that passed the component insulation exclusion test, as described in Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) (on page 69). The Piping Envelope Builder searches for matching data on the basis of the following data to determine whether or not insulation should be excluded from the flange outside diameter of that bolted end of the component.  nominal piping diameter of the bolted end (range search)  heat tracing requirements (range search)  insulation purpose (range search)  normal operating temperature (range search) If matching criteria is found in the exclusion table for these conditions, the applicable insulation thickness will not be added to the flange outside diameter of the bolted end of that component's interference envelope. Otherwise, the insulation thickness will be included in the component's interference envelope. The piping segment data (heat tracing requirements, insulation purpose, and normal operating temperature) are determined on the basis of the piping segment associated with the first connect point of the applicable component. The Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes that are to consider the partial exclusion of insulation from the flange outside diameter of a bolted end must be revised to accommodate this option. If you do not change any or all of the Piping Eden modules for the interference envelopes, this table will have no impact and the interference envelopes will include complete insulation, when applicable. For example, the required modification to the interference parametric for the weldneck flange (FWN) is as follows: !FLANGE - Interference Module Interference_Parametric_Shape_Definition 'F1A' Call Define_Connect_Point_Geometry ( LINEAR )

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

71

Piping Job Specification

!Original ! !Modified

Call Call RETURN END

Thickness_1 = Thickness_2 = Line Facing_OD_1 = Line Facing_OD_1 = Facing_OD_2 = Draw_Cylinder Draw_Cylinder

Thickness_1 + CP_Offset_1 Thickness_2 + CP_Offset_2 Facing_OD_1 + Insulation * 2 Facing_OD_1 + Insulation_1 Facing_OD_2 + Insulation * ( Thickness_1, Facing_OD_1 ( Thickness_2, Facing_OD_2

* 2 2 ) )

The Flange Insulation Exclusion Data table has 9 attributes. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. bolted_npd_from, short 3. bolted_npd_to, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument in NPD units. 4. heat_tracing_from, short, SN 200 5. heat_tracing_to, short, SN 200 These code-listed attributes identify the range of heat tracing values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from code list set 200, Heat Tracing Requirements. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that heat tracing requirements are not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 6. insul_purpose_from, short, SN 220 7. insul_purpose_to, short, SN 220 These code-listed attributes identify the range of insulation purpose values (lower bound to higher bound) using values from Standard Note type 220, Insulation Purpose. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that insulation purpose is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. 8. nor_oper_temp_from, double 9. nor_oper_temp_to, double These attributes identify the range of temperature values (lower bound to higher bound) for the bolted end of the component or instrument. A dash (-) can be used for the from value to indicate that temperature is not to be considered as part of the discrimination process. The system of units for the temperature range is the same as the system of units for the maximum temperature in the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table. Note that normal design temperature, alternate operating temperature, and alternate design temperature are not considered.

Neutral File Format !

72

DEFINE FLANGE INSULATION EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 4 4 4

12 12 12

3 3 3

3 3 3

5 5 5

5 5 5

150 150 150

200 200 200

Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data can be used to completely or partially exclude construction tolerance from the generation of interference envelopes. This feature only applies to Piping vs. Piping construction tolerances.

This is an optional data table; if no data is defined for this table, the Piping Envelope builder will continue to function as it has in previous releases of PDS. For each piping or instrument component, excluding pipes, the Piping Envelope Builder searches Table 233 on the basis of the following data to determine whether the Piping versus Piping construction tolerance should be excluded from that component's interference envelope.  green NPD of the component (range search)  red NPD of the component (range search) For piping commodities, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component's commodity name in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data.  If the piping commodity is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component's interference envelope.  If the commodity name is not specified in the exclusion table for those conditions, the Piping Envelope Builder will search for the component's model code using the same data. If a match for those conditions is found on the basis of the model code, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component's interference envelope.  Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the component's interference envelope. For piping specialties and instrument components, the Piping Envelope Builder searches for the component's model code in the Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data Table using the preceding data. If the component is defined in the exclusion table for those conditions, the applicable construction tolerance will not be added to the component's interference envelope. Otherwise, the construction tolerance will be included in the component's interference envelope. The Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data table has 7 attributes. 1. system_unique_no, integer 2. commodity_name, character(6) This attribute identifies the commodity item name of a piping component as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 3). If this attribute is blank, the system will search for a match by model code. 3. model_code, character(6) For piping commodities, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 19).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

73

Piping Job Specification For piping specialties, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Piping Specialty Specification Data (Table 203 attribute 3). For instruments, this attribute identifies the model code as defined in the Instrument Component Specification Data (Table 204 attribute 3). 4. gcp_npd_from, short 5. gcp_npd_to, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the green connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. 6. rcp_npd_from, short 7. rcp_npd_to, short These coded attributes identify the range of nominal piping diameters (lower bound to higher bound) for the red connect point of the component or instrument in NPD units. For full size components, use a dash (-) for these attributes.

Neutral File Format !

PIPING CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE EXCLUSION DATA Single_Spacing Sequence= 2 3 4 5 6 7 I15AS 4 12 6Q2C76 4 12 REDE 4 12 2 10

A sample neutral file is delivered in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data\constol.data.

Spec Writer This command provides a forms interface for interactively creating, revising, and managing the following specification data. This interface provides more simplicity and flexibility to a beginner or a casual user than defining specs with their respective neutral files:  Piping Materials Class Data (201) (on page 45)  Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) (on page 48)  Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) (on page 56)  Instrument Component Specification Data (204) (on page 58)  Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61)

74

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 

Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) (on page 66)

See Also Features (on page 75) RDB Options File (on page 76)

Features The Spec Writer provides the following general features:  User-specified options for customizing the input of data (RDB_options).  A direct interface to the unapproved Specification Material Reference Database.  On-line validation for the existence of a material description, once the commodity code (or component number) has been defined.  Optional on-line Table Checker validation using pre-defined Table Checker reports.  Automated selections from the Standard Note Library for code-listed data. The approved Standard Note Library must have been defined to include the correct data for use in the Material Reference Database.  Selectable list of acceptable model codes for a specified commodity name.  Context-sensitive user interface. The form options will vary depending on the item being defined. For example, the creation (and revision) of specification data for bolts and gaskets will display only those inputs relevant for bolts or gaskets.  Context-sensitive on-line help that is linked to the Piping Component Data Reference Guide and the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

75

Piping Job Specification

RDB Options File The RDB Options File allows you to customize the data input operations for the Interactive Spec Writer. You should define an RDB options list, named RDB_options in the project directory. A default RDB options list is included in the PD_Data sample/data/ directory. ! RDB_options ! ! general items = three main toggles ! SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = OFF ! ! PDtable_201 items ! SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, L NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, D BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, B TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = DATABASE GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, T MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = LIST, M FLUID_CODE = VALUE MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = LIST !BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = LIST, BENDEF !PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = LIST, PIPLEN STANDARD_NOTE = LIST PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION ! ! PDtable_202 items ! MODEL_CODE = LIST VALVE_OPERATOR = LIST ! ! COMMODITY_NAMEMODEL_CODES ! ! Pipe/Tube PIPING = PIPE, TUBE ! ! Valves (6Q1C) ! 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB 6Q1C03 = GATCON 6Q1C04 = GATBL ! ! Generic 3-way 6Q1C05 = BAL3P, GLO3W, PLU3W, SLI3W, 3WRV1 ! 6Q1C06 = BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP 6Q1C08 = BAL3P 6Q1C11 = GLOSP, GLO, GLOF, GLOR

76

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 6Q1C12 = GLOASP, GLOA 6Q1C13 = GLO3W 6Q1C14 = GLOY, GLOYF, GLOYR 6Q1C16 = PLUSP, PLU, PLUVP, PLUFB, PLUF, PLUR 6Q1C18 = PLU3W 6Q1C19 = PLU4W 6Q1C22 = NEE 6Q1C26 = BFYLP, BFYHP 6Q1C30 = DIA, DIASP, DIAPL, DIAGL 6Q1C32 = KNF 6Q1C33 = SLI 6Q1C34 = SLI3W 6Q1C37 = CKALSP, CKAL, CKST, BDA, HOSA 6Q1C38 = CKLSP, CKSSP, CKL, CKLF, CKLR, CKS, CKSF, CKSR, CKSY, CKLRY 6Q1C39 = CKWF, CKWFSP 6Q1C40 = CKALSP, CKAL 6Q1C41 = CKST 6Q1C42 = CKAST 6Q1C43 = CKYST 6Q1C50 = CKBP 6Q1C51 = CKAR 6Q1C53 = BDA 6Q1C54 = BDY 6Q1C56 = PIN 6Q1C57 = FLO 6Q1C58 = FOOT 6Q1C62 = TKDR 6Q1C69 = DEL 6Q1C72 = HOS 6Q1C73 = HOSA ! ! Generic Vent/Drain Valve 6Q1C76 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! ! Generic Instrument Root Valve 6Q1C80 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR, BALF, BALR, BALSP, BALLP, BALVP ! 6Q1C81 = 3WRV1 6Q1C82 = 4WRV1 ! ! On-line Fittings (6P2C) and In-line Fittings (6Q2C) ! 6Q2C01 = FWN, FLWN, FSO, FL, FPL, FSSSO, FSSL, FSSPL, FLSSO, FLSL, FFIL, FS, FSW, FTHD, FCP 6Q2C03 = FRWN, FRSO, FRPL, FRS, FRSW, FRTHD 6Q2C04 = FEWN 6Q2C06 = FOWNA, FOWNAW, FOWNB, FOWNBW, FOSOA, FOSOAW, FOSOB, FOSOBW, FOSWA, FOSWAW, FOSWB, FOSWBW, FOTHDA 6Q2C08 = FBLD 6Q2C10 = BLSPO 6Q2C11 = BLSPC 6Q2C12 = BDISC 6Q2C13 = BLPAD 6Q2C14 = T1SPA, T2SPA1

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

77

Piping Job Specification 6Q2C15 = BLSPA, OPSPA ! ! Generic End 6Q2C16 = FBLD, HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21, PLUG, CAPBV, CAPOT ! 6Q2C17 = HDHEMI, HDELIP, HD21 6Q2C19 = PLUG 6Q2C21 = CAPBV, CAPOT ! ! Generic Conentric Diameter Change 6Q2C23 = REDC, SWGC, CPLR, INSR1, INSR2 ! ! Generic Eccentric Diameter Change 6Q2C24 = REDE, SWGE ! 6Q2C25 = CPL 6Q2C26 = CPLH 6Q2C27 = REDC 6Q2C28 = REDE 6Q2C32 = CPLR 6Q2C35 = SWGC 6Q2C36 = SWGE 6Q2C39 = UN 6Q2C40 = UNO 6Q2C41 = UND 6Q2C43 = HC 6Q2C44 = BUSH 6Q2C46 = INSR1, INSR2 6Q2C47 = PIPB, PIPB2 6Q2C49 = E5 6Q2C51 = E11 6Q2C53 = E22 ! ! Generic RCP OP_5 = Handwheel, inclined OP_9 = Wrench, short OP_11 = Wrench, long OP_17 = Lever OP_19 = T-handle, short OP_21 = T-handle, long OP_25 = Handwheel, special OP_27 = Wrench, special OP_29 = Gear, top mounted handwheel OP_31 = Gear, top mounted inclined handwheel OP_33 = Gear, side mounted handwheel OP_35 = Gear, side mounted inclined handwheel OP_39 = Lever, quick-action OP_40 = Post indicator ! ! Actuators ! OP_411 = Diaphragm, type 1 OP_412 = Diaphragm, type 2 OP_413 = Diaphragm, type 3 OP_431 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 1 OP_432 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 2 OP_433 = Press-balanced diaphragm type 3 OP_451 = Regulator type 1 OP_452 = Regulator type 2 OP_453 = Regulator type 3 OP_491 = Single acting cylinder type 1 OP_492 = Single acting cylinder type 2 OP_493 = Single acting cylinder type 3 OP_511 = Doulble acting cylinder type 1 OP_512 = Doulble acting cylinder type 2 OP_513 = Doulble acting cylinder type 3 OP_531 = Pilot operated cylinder type 1 OP_532 = Pilot operated cylinder type 2

80

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification OP_533 = Pilot operated cylinder type 3 OP_534 = Pilot operated cylinder type 4 OP_571 = Motor type 1 OP_572 = Motor type 2 OP_573 = Motor type 3 OP_574 = Motor type 4 OP_611 = Digital type 1 OP_651 = Electro-hydraulic type 1 OP_652 = Electro-hydraulic type 2 OP_811 = Weight type 1 OP_851 = Manual type 1 OP_852 = Manual type 2 OP_853 = Manual type 3 OP_854 = Manual type 4 OP_891 = Spring type 1 END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST You can use the following keywords to customize the settings in the RDB options file.

General Items For piping commodities, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Short Material Description Library and/or the Long Material Description Library. For piping specialties and instruments, you can verify that a material description has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library.  SHORT_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the short material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF. 

LONG_COMMODITY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the long material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.



SPECIALTY_MATERIAL_DESCRIPTION = ON or OFF — If set to ON, the specialty material description is displayed when you specify the commodity code. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default setting is OFF.

PDtable_201 items 





SERVICE_LIMITS_TABLE = LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use L for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. NOMINAL_PIPING_DIAMETER_TABLE = LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to use as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use D for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. BRANCH_TABLE = LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

81

Piping Job Specification be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use B for the delivered tables.) The list is filtered to only include the unique tables, where the branch angle is 90 degrees. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name.





You should not assign the same Branch Table to be used in two different piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem. TAP_PROPERTIES_TABLE = KEYIN or DATABASE — If set to DATABASE, a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. GASKET_SEPARATION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Gasket Separation Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use G for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name.











82

When listing the Gasket Separation Tables, the list of tables is restricted to unique names, excluding the underbar (_) and the pressure rating value that follows. In other words, the list of Gasket Separation Tables will not include the pressure rating (G001 instead of G001_1500). THICKNESS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use T for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DATA_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. (Use M for the delivered tables.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. FLUID_CODE = VALUE — Specify a default fluid code value to be used for the piping materials class. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is that you do not intend to define this data, unless you specify the name of a Fluid Code Table. FLUID_CODE_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix (such as FC) to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. MATERIALS_DESCRIPTION = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the value.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 





BEND_DEFLECTION_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. PIPE_LENGTH_TABLE = KEYIN or LIST, — If set to LIST, a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library) is displayed. You must specify a prefix to be used as a substring search to determine the list of tables. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the table name. STANDARD_NOTE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library) is displayed. If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file, the default mode is to key in the value of the standard note.

PDtable_202 items 







MODEL_CODE = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of acceptable model codes (determined by the commodity name) is displayed. (See keyword COMMODITY_NAME MODEL_CODES for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of acceptable model codes is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. VALVE_OPERATOR = KEYIN or LIST — If set to LIST, a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file) is displayed. (See keyword VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST for more information.) If this keyword is not specified in the RDB options file or the list of valve operator types is not defined, the default mode is to key in the value. PROMPT_FOR_TAP_ORIENTATION — This keyword is used if you require that all (or some) orifice flanges have two taps oriented 90 degrees apart. By default orifice taps are oriented 180 degrees apart on the outside diameter of the flange. If this keyword is not included in the RDB options list, the relative tap orientation for two taps will always be 180 degrees. COMMODITY_NAME MODEL_CODES — This keyword precedes the list of associations between commodity names and their acceptable model codes. This list must be defined to use the LIST option for MODEL_CODE. The association between a commodity name and the acceptable model codes for that commodity name is defined as follows. = ,, ... 6Q1C01 = GATSP, GAT, GATF, GATR 6Q1C02 = GATEX, GATEXB, GATEXBB



You can define as many as 50 model codes, separated by a comma, for each commodity name. The delivered RDB options list includes a list of acceptable model codes for the reference data provided with PDS. VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword precedes the list of valve operator types and their corresponding descriptions. The list of valve operator types is defined as follows.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

83

Piping Job Specification = OP_0 = None Required OP_3 = Handwheel



The delivered RDB options file includes a list of valve operator types for the reference data provided with PDS. The description is for information only to aid the user in selecting the proper valve operator type. END_VALVE_OPERATOR_LIST — This keyword must follow the valve operator list as a delimiter.

Piping Materials Class Data Command The Piping Materials Class Data command can be used to create a piping materials class definition in Table 201 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing piping materials class definition.

  

Create — The system activates the Create Piping Materials Class Data form. Revise By Keyin — The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form. Key in the name of the piping materials class to revise in the Piping Materials Class field. Revise By List — Select the piping materials class to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Materials Class Data form with the data for the selected piping materials class.

Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data The Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

84

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

The system highlights the mandatory input fields (those that must be specified). Once you define a valid input for a mandatory field the system will drop the highlight for that field. Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Materials Class Data (201) (on page 45) for more information on the attributes for the Piping Materials Class Data table (201).

Mandatory Input Fields 









Piping Materials Class (keyin) — Key in up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the piping materials class to be defined. The system verifies that specified piping materials class does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. Gasket Separation (keyin) — Key in the value for the gasket separation for this piping materials class. — OR — Gasket Table (keyin or list) — Key in the table name or select from the list of tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list of Gasket Separation Tables will exclude the pressure rating value. Service Limits (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Service Limits Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Service Limits Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Diameter (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Nominal Piping Diameter Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

85

Piping Job Specification 

Branch Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Branch Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Branch Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). The list will only include the unique tables, where the branch angle is 90 degrees. For more information, see Bends and Tee-type Branches and Branch Components in Piping Design Reference Guide.  



The 90 degree button only works if a Branch Table exists. You should not assign the same Branch Table to two different piping materials classes if, for example, one allows intersections at both 45 degrees and 90 degrees, and the other only allows 90 degree intersections. The Reference Data Manager will not detect this problem.  You can place components without a Branch Table; you simply select the components using the individual component buttons.  The Branch Table is the primary choice for picking branching components because of the engineering calculations required.  Sometimes you can override the Branch Table based on company rules or the Stress Group requirement. For example, the Branch Table can be overridden by not selecting the 90 degree button and then selecting any other branching component. However, doing so without direction from the rules or the Stress Group is a violation on the codes or standards. Tap Data (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Tap Properties Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Tap Properties Data Tables (as defined in PDtable_205 of the unapproved Material Reference Database). The unapproved tap properties data is referenced, since all specification data within the Material Reference Database is approved in one operation.

Optional Data - Wall Thickness This data is required for piping commodities, where the schedule or thickness is not explicitly defined in the piping materials class or in a wall thickness table.  Corrosion Allowance (keyin) — Key in a numeric value, if wall thickness calculations are to be used.  Thickness Equation (list) — Select one of the displayed wall thickness equations. ANSI B31.3-1987 EL01 ANSI B31.1a-1986 EJ01





The corresponding name for the thickness equation is loaded into the Piping Materials Class Data Table. Thickness Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Thickness Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Thickness Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Materials Data Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Materials Data Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Materials Data Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library).

Optional Data The following data is not required and can be defined or not defined based on your company practices.

86

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 

 

 

 





Materials Description (keyin or list) — Key in the numeric value for the materials description in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of materials descriptions (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library). Revision (keyin) — Key in up to two alphanumeric characters for the revision number. Revision Date (keyin) — Key in up to ten alphanumeric characters for the date. The current date will not be entered automatically. Note that the Reference Data Manager creates and maintains a separate revision management date on the basis of the current date and time which can be used in the reporting of reference data. Fluid Code (keyin list) — Define a default fluid code to be used for the piping materials class. — OR — Fluid Code Table (keyin list) — Key in the name of the Fluid Code Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Fluid Code Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Materials of Construction (keyin) — Key in up to six alphanumeric characters. Bend Deflect Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Bend Deflection Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Bend Deflection Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Pipe Length Table (keyin or list) — Key in the name of the Pipe Length Table for this piping materials class or select from a list of Pipe Length Tables (as defined in the approved Piping Job Specification Table Library). Standard Note Number (keyin or list) — Key in the note number in the Standard Note Library for this piping materials class or select from the list of standard notes (as defined in the approved Standard Note Library).

Piping Commodity Data Command The Piping Commodity Data command can be used to create a piping commodity definition in Table 202 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping commodity definition.





Create — Select the Piping Materials Class for the commodity item to be created from the list of piping materials classes (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

87

Piping Job Specification Revise By List — Select the piping materials class for the commodity item to be revised from the displayed list of piping materials classes and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity.  Copy — You can use the Copy option in conjunction with the Revise options as a cut-and-paste feature. This command requires that both the source piping materials class data and the destination piping materials class have been created. You can copy a complete piping materials class, including the piping commodity specification data or selectively copy specific commodities. Select the option for the items to be copied. Source and Destination Piping Materials Class - These are active fields that, when selected, display the piping materials class list. Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list, and then select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. 

Select All - This option copies the specification data for all piping commodities within the selected source piping materials class to the specified destination piping materials class. Select From List - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Then select the piping commodity to be copied from the list of all piping commodities within the source piping materials class. Select Gaskets - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for all gaskets within the source piping materials class to the destination piping materials class. Gaskets are recognized on the basis of the gasket commodity name, as specified through the Project Data Manager. Select Bolts - Select the source piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. Select the destination piping materials class from the displayed list and select Accept. The system copies the specification data for all bolts within the source piping materials class to the

88

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification destination piping materials class. Bolts are recognized on the basis of the bolt commodity name, as specified through the Project Data Manager.  Short Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Short Material Description Library.  Long Commodity Material Description ON/OFF — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Long Material Description Library.

If the Material Description toggle is set to ON and no corresponding material description is found for a specified commodity code, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library (on page 95).

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) (on page 48) for information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Specification Data table. Where possible, the system verifies that the specified value is valid for the applicable piping materials class. For example, NPD values are checked against the associated diameters table in the approved Piping Job Spec Table Library.  Commodity Type — This field can be used to select the type of piping commodity data to be created based on the settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. General Fittings

Piping

Pipe Bends

Tubing

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

89

Piping Job Specification Orifice Flanges

Gaskets

Branch Nipples

Bolts

Branch Reinforcement

Nuts

Valves The system will modify the form fields to reflect the data that is specific to that type of component. The system stores the commodity type as the input_form_type within the Piping Commodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database. Any input fields that are not used for a specific piping commodity type will be de-activated. The General Fittings category will allow input in all the input fields. This form is used for any piping commodity that does not fall within any of the other types.

General Fittings, Pipe Bends, Orifice Flanges, Branch Nipples, Branch Reinforcement, and Valves Commodity Name (keyin) From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list)  Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.  Table Suffix - First Size (list)  Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) — Attribute 10. This data is automatically set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.  Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the piping commodity. When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a system commodity code and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code in the Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data Table. The system automatically translates the specified commodity code to be upper-case. You can use the Implied Data option to specify implied data for this piping commodity. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command (on page 104) for information on project-specific implied data. Refer to Implied Data (on page 94) for information on class-specific implied data. The default is that implied data does not apply. For the revise command, the prefixes for implied data are not displayed as part of the commodity code, although the prefix will be loaded in the database. For implied data (project-wide or class-specific), the system will display the toggle setting rather than showing the prefix in the commodity code field.  Model Code (keyin or list) — Attribute 19. Key in the model code or select the model code from a list of acceptable model codes (as defined by commodity name in the RDB options file). Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) fabrication category (list) Define the following data for any reducing components. This data will not apply to either the orifice flange or branch nipple commodity type.  From NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 12. Key in the lowest second size for which this specification data applies.  To NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Attribute 13. Key in the highest second size for which this specification data applies.

90

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification You can optionally define the following fields when two ends of that component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify a red End Preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.  End Preparation - Second Size (list)  Pressure Rating - Second Size (keyin) — This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type.  Table Suffix - Second Size (list)  Schedule/Thickness - Second Size (list) — This data is set to undefined (blank) for the branch reinforcement commodity type. The following data must be defined for the designated [component types]. The setting is stored in the modifier attribute.  Bend Radius (keyin) [Pipe Bend] — Key in the bend radius for the pipe bend.  Number of Taps (toggle) [Orifice Flanges] — Set the toggle for the number of taps (1 or 2) on the orifice flange. If applicable, set the orientation of the taps as 90 degrees or 180 degrees. This toggle only appears for orifice flanges that have two taps.  Nipple Length (keyin) [Branch Nipples] — Key in length of the branch nipple.  Reinforcement Data (toggle) [Branch Reinforcement] — Set the toggle for the source of the branch reinforcement data to By System or By User. If you select the by user branch reinforcement option, the commodity option code is automatically defined with a value of 699 (User-defined), as required by PDS.  Valve Operator (keyin or list) [Valves] — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types. The list of valve operator types and the corresponding descriptions are defined in the RDB options list.  Valve Operator Display (toggle) [Valves] — Set the toggle to ON or OFF to determine whether the valve operator is displayed in the model.  Modifier (keyin) — You can define this value for specific piping commodities not covered by the previous list. You can define the following optional data depending on your requirements.  Commodity Option (list) — Attribute 4.  Max Temperature (keyin) — Attribute 5. If no value is specified, the default value (undefined) is assigned automatically.  Materials Grade (list) — Attribute 25.  Standard Note Number (list) — Attributes 26 and 27. Select the note for this commodity from the list of standard notes defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  PDS Sort Code (keyin) — Attribute 20. The specified value is automatically converted to upper-case.

Specification Data for Piping You must define the following data for piping. The piping commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list)  Joint Quality Factor (keyin) (For wall thickness calculations) — In lieu of the schedule/thickness, you can request that the wall thickness be computed automatically by the

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

91

Piping Job Specification system by specifying the joint quality factor for wall thickness calculations. The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100, add a *C prefix to designate that the default calculation is to be used, and loads the value into the schedule/thickness column. For example, if the joint quality factor is 0.95, this value will be '*C095'. Note that this is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the branch reinforcement calculations.  Commodity Code (keyin)  Model Code (toggle) — Set the toggle to By System (PIPE) or By User (*FPIPE). Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for piping. End Preparation - Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin)  E, Reinforcement (keyin) — Define the joint quality factor (E) for piping for which branch reinforcement calculations apply. The system multiplies the joint quality factor by 100 and loads it in the modifier column. This is not the joint quality factor that is to be used in the wall thickness calculations for the piping.  Purchased Length (keyin) — You can key in the purchased length of the piping in sub-units. This value is stored in the PDS sort code attribute. Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation - Other (list)

Specification Data for Tubing Define the following data for tubing. The tubing commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Schedule/Thickness - First Size (list) Joint Quality Factor (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) You can optionally define the following data for tubing. End Preparation - Second Size (list) Commodity Option (list) Maximum Temperature (keyin) E, Reinforcement (keyin) Purchased Length (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list) End Preparation - Other (list)

92

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Specification Data for Gaskets Define the following data for gaskets. The gasket's commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active project's selection of MTO options applicable to gaskets for reference. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) End Preparation - First Size (list) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin)  Gasket Thickness (keyin) — Key in the gasket thickness to be reported through the Report Manager. This value is loaded into the modifier column. You must define the following specification data for gaskets, when the alternate gasket search option has been enabled for MTO through the Project Data Manager. Otherwise, the input fields will be disabled.  Alternate End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Alternate Pressure Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.  Alternate Table Suffix (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You can optionally define the following data on the basis of the user-specific requirements for gaskets. Commodity Option (list) Max Temperature (keyin) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Specification Data for Bolts You must define the following data for bolts. The bolt's commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager. The system displays the active project's selection of MTO options applicable to bolts for reference. From NPD - First Size (keyin) To NPD - First Size (keyin) Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) Table Suffix - First Size (list) Commodity Code (keyin) Bolt Extension (keyin) You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for bolts. Commodity Option (list) Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Specification Data for Nuts You must define the following data for nuts. The commodity name is defined automatically, as specified through the Project Data Manager.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

93

Piping Job Specification Max Temperature (keyin) Commodity Code (keyin) You can optionally define the following data on the basis of user-specific requirements for nuts. Fabrication Category (list) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

List of Piping Materials Classes Form This form displays when you click any of the following commands:  Select Piping Materials Class. For more information, see Discrimination Data Form (on page 298).  Create or Revise by List in the Piping Commodity Data Command. For more information, see Piping Commodity Specification Data (PDtable_202) (see "Piping Commodity Data Command" on page 87). Select a Piping Materials Class by placing a data point over an entry in the list and selecting Accept.

Implied Data When defining a piping commodity, you can select the Implied Data option to indicate that the commodity will have an associated implied item that will be included in MTO reports. After selecting the option, set the toggle to Class Specific. This option is intended for implied components that are not unique within the project. A lap-joint flange is an example of the primary component, where the stub-end is the implied component. Refer to Commodity Implied Data Command (on page 104) for information on Project Specific implied data. When you select Accept to define a primary component, the system modifies the form display to allow you to define the specification data for the implied component.

94

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification When you accept the specification data for the implied component, the system prefixes an asterisk (*) to the commodity code of the primary component to indicate that implied data is present. The following specification data for the implied component are determined by the corresponding data for the primary component. This data is displayed in review only fields.  Commodity Name — Same as the primary component.  Commodity Option — The commodity option code for the implied component is set to the primary component's commodity option code plus 5000.  From NPD — same as the primary component.  To NPD — same as the primary component.  Model Code — same as the primary component. You can optionally define the following specification data for the implied component based on your reporting requirements. The values for the implied component default to the corresponding values for the primary component, except for the commodity code. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list)  Commodity Code (keyin) — Key in the commodity code for the implied item. The system converts this value to upper-case. When size-dependent commodity codes are required, this will represent a somewhat arbitrary value, referred to as the system commodity code, and will be used by the Report Manager to reference the size-dependent commodity code. Geometric Industry Standard (list) Weight Code (list) Fabrication Category (list) Modifier (keyin) Max Temperature (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)  PDS Sort Code (keyin) — (optional). The system converts the value to upper-case.

Add Entry to Material Description Library This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short, long, or specialty). Refer to Material Description Data (on page 269) for more information on material descriptions.

Requirements The Material Description toggle must be set to ON. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met:  The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager.  The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

95

Piping Job Specification



Description — Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. The system adds the specified entry to the Material Description Library.

Piping Specialty Data Command The Piping Specialty Data command can be used to create a piping specialty definition in Table 203 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing piping specialty definition. You can also add specialty descriptions to the Material Description Library.







96

Create — Select the type of specialty (Piping Specialty or Valves) from the list. Then key in the component number for the specialty item to be created and select Accept. The system activates the Create Piping Specialty Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the specialty to be modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty. Revise By List — Select the piping specialty to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping specialty.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 

Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library.

If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library (on page 95).

Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data The Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of a piping commodity within a specified piping materials class. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) (on page 56) for information on the attributes for the Piping Specialty Specification Data table.

Mandatory Input Fields 



Piping Component Number (keyin) — Key in the piping component number, which uniquely identifies the piping specialty. The system verifies that the piping component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database. From NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

97

Piping Job Specification To NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable specialty type is selected.  End Preparation - First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.  Table Suffix - First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the piping specialty.  Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties.  Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the sort code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for piping specialties. The system will convert the value to upper-case.  Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You must define the following data for any reducing component.  NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the piping specialty. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. You must define the following data for valves. This data is stored in the modifier attribute.  Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).  Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model.  Specialty Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of piping specialty data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list, then select the preferred data type. 

The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990.

Optional Input Fields You can optionally define the following data, when two ends of the component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness.

98

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) You can optionally define the following data depending on you requirements for piping specialties. Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Instrument Data Command The Instrument Data command can be used to create an instrument definition in Table 204 of the Material Reference Database or revise an existing instrument definition. You can also add descriptions to the Material Description Library.









Create — Select the type of instrument (Instruments or Valves) from the list. Then key in the component number for the instrument to be created and select Accept. The system activates the Create Instrument Specification Data form. Revise By Keyin — Key in the component number of the instrument to be modified and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument. Revise By List — Select the instrument to be revised from the displayed List of Instruments and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Instrument Specification Data form with the data for the selected instrument. Specialty Material Description — You can set this toggle to ON to verify that the material description for a specified commodity code has been defined in the Specialty Material Description Library.

If no corresponding material description is found, the system activates the Add Entry to Material Description Library form. See Add Entry to Material Description Library (on page 95).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

99

Piping Job Specification

Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data The Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an instrument. hen creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Instrument Component Specification Data (204) (on page 58) for information on the attributes for the Instrument Specification Data table.  Instrument Component Number (keyin) — Key in the component number, which uniquely identifies the instrument. The system verifies that the component number does not already exist in the Unapproved Material Reference Database.  From NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.  To NPD - First Size (keyin) — Key in the first size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input. The TO NPD field is only visible if an applicable instrument type is selected.  End Preparation - First Size (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Pressure Rating - First Size (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.  Table Suffix - First Size (list) — Select from the list of table suffix values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

100

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Model Code (keyin) — Key in the model code to be used to parametrically define the instrument.  Physical Data ID (keyin) — Key in the ID to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments.  Sort Code (keyin) — Key in the code to be used as an arbitrary index into the geometric data table for instruments. The system will convert the value to upper-case.  Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. You must define the following data for any reducing component.  NPD - Second Size (keyin) — Key in the second size value for the instrument. Both the from and to values are loaded on the basis of this input.  Instrument Type (field) — This field can be used to select the type of instrument component data to be created based on settings in Standard Note Type 990 of the Standard Note Library. Place a data point in this field to activate the Spec Writer Data Form Type pick list, and then select the preferred data type. 

The system stores the specialty type as the input_form_type within the Piping Specialty Data Table as a code-listed attribute for Standard Note Type 990. You can optionally define the following data when two ends of the component require different data. By PDS convention, if you specify the red end preparation, you must specify the corresponding pressure rating, table suffix, and schedule/thickness. End Preparation (list) Pressure Rating (keyin) Table Suffix (list) Schedule/Thickness (list) You must define the following data for valves. This information is stored in the modifier attribute.  Valve Operator (keyin or list) — Key in the valve operator type or select the valve operator type from a list of valve operator types (as defined in the RDB options file).  Valve Operator Display ON/OFF (toggle) — Set the toggle to determine whether the valve operator will be displayed in the model. You can optionally define the following data depending on your requirements for instruments. Weight Code (list) Geometric Industry Standard (list) Modifier (keyin) Materials Grade (list) Standard Note Number (list)

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

101

Piping Job Specification

Tap Properties Data Command The Tap Properties Data command can be used to create a tap properties definition in Table 205 of the Material Reference Database or revise and existing tap properties definition.

  

Create — Key in the name of the tap table to be defined. The system activates the Create Tap Properties Data form. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the tap table to be modified. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table. Revise By List — Select the tap table to be revised from the displayed List of Tap Properties Data (as defined in the Unapproved Material Reference Database) and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Tap Properties Data form with the data for the selected tap table.

Create/Revise Tap Properties Data The Create/Revise Tap Properties Data form is used to create or modify the specification data for taps. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value for all the mandatory fields.

Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields.

102

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Refer to Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61) for more information on the attributes for the Tap Properties Data. Tap Table Name (keyin) — Key in up to six characters for the table name. The combination of the tap properties table name, the tap nominal piping diameter, and the tap option code must be unique.  Nom Piping Diameter (keyin) — Key in the nominal piping diameter for this tap properties definition.  Tap Option (list) — Select from the list of tap option codes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. If you do not select a tap option code, the default value (one) is assigned automatically.  End Preparation (list) — Select from the list of end preparation values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Rating (keyin) — Key in up to eight characters to define the pressure rating.  Schedule/Thickness (list) — Select from the list of schedule/thickness values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.  Tap Material Code (keyin) — During the tap properties data creation process, if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to insert Tap Material Code data into the Short Material Description Library. This is the code that may optionally be used by MTO for appending the tap's material description to that of the component which has been tapped. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met:  The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager.  The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate (short) Material Description Library. Refer to Material Description Data (on page 269) for more information on material descriptions.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

103

Piping Job Specification

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. This code must be a unique index into the project's Material Description Libraries. The system converts the specified tap material code to upper-case, and then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries.

Commodity Implied Data Command The Commodity Implied Data command defines the specification data for implied components in Table 212 or the Material Reference Database. These implied components are reported by MTO with the primary component in situations where the implied data is independent of the piping materials class (used throughout the project).

 



104

Create — Key in the system commodity code of the implied component to be created. The system activates the Create Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form. Revise By Keyin — Key in the name of the piping materials class for the commodity item to be modified. Then select the piping commodity to be revised from the displayed List of Piping Commodities and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data form with the data for the selected piping commodity. Revise By List — Select the implied component definition to be revised from the displayed list of Commodity Implied Data and select Accept. The system activates the Revise Piping Commodity Implied Data form with the data for the implied component definition.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data The Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data form is used to create or modify the definition of an implied component. When creating a new definition, the system will jump to the input fields for the mandatory data. You must specify a value (by keyin or selection from a list) for all the mandatory fields.

Refer to RDB Options File (on page 76) for information on defining list options for the applicable input fields. Refer to Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) (on page 66) for more information on the attributes for the Piping Commodity Implied Material Data table.  System Commodity Code — Key in the commodity code for the primary component. The system converts the value to upper-case. For this type of implied data to be reported with the primary component, the specification data for the primary component must have enabled the option in each piping materials class for which this implied data applies.  From Diameter (First Size) — Key in the lowest first size value for which this implied specification data applies.  To Diameter (First Size) — Key in the highest first size value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.  From Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components, key in the lowest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. In cases where the piping commodity represents both a full-size component and a reducing component, this value should equal the corresponding first size NPD. Otherwise, for a reducing component, this value must be less than the corresponding first size value.  To Diameter (Second Size) — For reducing components, key in the highest second size value for which this implied specification data applies. The to value must equal or exceed the from value.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

105

Piping Job Specification 

  

Commodity Code (keyin) — During the commodity implied data creation process, if the Short and Long Commodity Description toggles are set to ON, you are allowed to insert Commodity Code data into the Short and Long Material Description Libraries. If you have defined size-dependent commodity codes, this option will be ignored, unless both of the following conditions are met:  The option for MTO to use the system commodity code to reference the material description has been enabled through the Material Takeoff Options of the Project Data Manager.  The material descriptions have been created with embedded commodity code labels as the means of inserting the size-dependent data into the material description. This form is used to define the material description for a specified commodity code in the appropriate Material Description Library (short or long). Refer to Material Description Data (on page 269) for more information on material descriptions.

Key in the material description for the specified commodity code and select Accept. This code must be a unique index into the project's Material Description Libraries. The system converts the specified commodity code to upper-case, then adds the specified entry into the appropriate Material Description Libraries. Quantity (keyin) — Key in a whole number or a decimal value for the quantity of the implied component per primary component. Fabrication Category (list) — Select from the list of fabrication category values as defined in the approved Standard Note Library. Standard Note Number (list) — You can optionally select from the list of standard notes as defined in the approved Standard Note Library.

Select a Piping Material Class commodity and click Accept.

106

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Table Checker You can use the Table Checker option to perform on-line Table Checker validation for the defined piping commodity specification data. When this option is enabled, table checker validation will be performed for all piping commodities, except:  implied data specific to the piping materials class  gaskets  bolts  nuts When you enable this option, the system displays a list of the defined Table Checker reports for the project. Select the report validation to be performed and select Accept.

Refer to Table Checker Form (on page 293) for more information on creating a Table Checker report definition.

Piping Job Specification Manager This command enables you to load all of the database tables which make up the Piping Job Specification portion of the Material Reference Database. You can also extract neutral files of the data contained in the Material Reference Database.

Before Using This Command   

Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a project and creating the approved and unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database. You must have installed the applicable reference database files (such as USRDB or DINRDB). Use the Default Project Control Data option to set default settings for Piping Spec Path and Piping Spec Node to point to the location of the neutral files. The default settings are maintained in the Project Control Database. You can also change these settings during the operation of the Piping Job Spec Manager. However, such changes are temporary; they will not update the default locations.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Piping Job Specification Manager option from the Reference Data Manager form.

The system displays the Piping Job Specification Manager main form used to select the type of Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

107

Piping Job Specification data to process.

The data manipulation procedure for each of the database tables is similar. You can perform the following activities for each of the entities. 2. Select Option Select Unapprove ==> Approve to post the data from the unapproved Specification/Material Reference Database to the approved database.

Accept to Create New Records or Exit Toggle between Submit Immediately to submit the report for immediate processing, or Delayed Submit to specify a time to submit the report for delayed processing.

108

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification When delayed submission is selected, you will be prompted Accept Time or Re-specify Submit Time. Enter the day, hour, and minute, and then select AM or PM. — OR — Select the command for the database table to be loaded.

The system displays the options for the selected item. The following illustration reflects the screen for Piping Materials Class.

Select Option Select the option for the type of action to be performed. Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset (see "Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset Options" on page 110) from a neutral file. Delete existing entries. For more information, see Delete Option (on page 112). Report on the entity data (create a neutral file). For more information, see Report Option (on page 112). The manipulation procedure for each of type of piping data (listed below) is similar. See Piping Job Specification Manager (on page 107).  Piping Material Class Data (Piping Materials Class Data (201) (on page 45))  Piping Commodity Data (Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) (on page 48))  Piping Specialty Data (Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components (on page 264))  Instrument Data (Instrument Component Specification Data (204) (on page 58))  Tap Properties Data (Tap Properties Data (205) (on page 61))  Size Dependent Material Data (Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) (on page 64))  Project Implied Material Data (Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) (on page 66))  Component Insulation Exclusion Data (Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) (on page 69))  Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) (on page 71))

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

109

Piping Job Specification 

Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) (on page 73))  Pipe Support Group Data (Pipe Support Group Reference Data)  Pipe Support Commodity Data (Pipe Support Commodity Reference Data Table 241)  Pipe Support Material Data (Pipe Support Material Reference Data Table 242)  Pipe Support Material Description (Pipe Support Material Description Data Table 243) Depending on the selected data, all or a few of the options below are available. Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset Options (on page 110) Delete Option (on page 112) Report Option (on page 112)

Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset Options These options enable you to load entries from a neutral ASCII file into the Material Reference Database. The Replace Commodity Subset option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands. Refer to Material Reference Database Structure (on page 41) for a list of database tables and neutral file formats used in defining the delivered PJS and material data.  Load adds the contents of the neutral file(s) to the information currently in that database table of the Specification/Material Reference Database.  Replace deletes all entries in the respective database table and then loads new entries from the neutral file.  Replace Commodity Subset revises (deletes and replaces) previously created size-dependent or implied commodity data for a specific commodity or group of commodity codes specified in a neutral file. This option is only available for the Size Dependent Material Data and Project Implied Material Data commands. The neutral files for the delivered USRDB data are in the directory \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\spec_data classes.pmc — the neutral file for the Piping Materials Class Data. *.pcd — The neutral files for the Piping Commodity Data are stored in a set of files of the format pmcname.pcd. (For example, 1c0031.pcd defines all the commodity items for piping materials class 1c0031.)  list.pcd — a file that lists the neutral file names of all the delivered pcd files for the different piping materials classes.  taps.data — the neutral file for Tap Properties Data.  implied.data — the neutral file for Project Implied Material Data. A set of sample neutral files are delivered in the directory \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data  

 specialty.data --- a sample neutral file for Piping Specialty Data.  instrment.data --- a sample neutral file for Instrument Data.  pcd_size.data --- a sample neutral file for Size Dependent Material Data. You can copy the files and make changes before loading the information into the database.

Before Using This Command You can define the variable PDS_COMMIT_INTERVAL= in the control.sh file to control the commit interval in loading specification data into the Material Reference Database. This has the

110

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification same impact as adjusting the -c option in a risload command line. The default commit value is 25. Increasing this variable may improve performance.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Load/Replace (or other load or replace) option. See the description above for differences in Load, Replace, and Replace Commodity Subset. 2. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the file specification for the neutral file that contains the data to be copied.  For Piping Commodity Data, you can load or replace a single file or a list of files. To process a list of files, create a list file which lists each neutral file on a separate line. The file list.pcd contains a list of all the delivered neutral files.  For Size-Dependent or Implied Commodity Data, you can replace specific commodity codes or all the entries in the database. To replace specific commodity codes, create a neutral file which contains only the commodity codes to be replaced. For the Load option, the system displays a dialog box to indicate that the data loaded will be appended to existing data. Select Accept to continue.

3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s). 4. Accept to Create New Records or Exit Select Accept to begin processing the request. Job Has Been Submitted

The system submits the load/replace request as a batch job. Once the job is completed, the system sends a mail message indicating the completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful). The system also creates a set of log files in the \tmp directory.  pmc.log — Piping Materials Class Data  pcd.log — Piping Commodity Data  specialty.log — Piping Specialty Data  instrument.log — Instrument Data  taps.log — Tap Properties Data  pcd_size.log — Size-Dependent Material Data  implied.log — Project Implied Material Data These log files contain the following information.  The name of the neutral file being loaded  The completion status of the load (successful or unsuccessful)  The line number that caused the failure if the neutral file was not loaded.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

111

Piping Job Specification

Delete Option This option enables you to delete entries from the Piping Job Specification.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Delete option.

The system displays a list of all the items in the database for the selected class of data.

2. Select the item to be deleted from the database. 3. Accept to Delete Materials Class Select Accept to begin deleting the data.

Report Option The Report options enable you to create neutral files using the information in the Specification/Material Reference database. The order and field lengths of the data in the neutral file is determined by a format file named spec_order.max. This format file is expected to reside in the same network address and directory specified for the report output. A default format file is delivered with the PD_Data product in the file \win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format\spec_order.max. If the spec_order.max file is not found at the specified output directory, the system will use the default spec order. If an unapproved Specification/Material Reference database exists for the active project, you can select the database to process: approved or unapproved.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Report option from one of the data forms (such as the Piping Commodity Data form). For Piping Commodity Data, select the appropriate PCD from the list.

112

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 2. Specify Neutral File Name Key in the name of the neutral file to be created. You can change the Node Name and File Path information. 3. Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time to process the neutral file(s). 4. Accept to Create Report Select Accept to create the specified neutral file. Job Has Been Submitted The system creates the neutral file and a log file named specmgr.log.

Example spec_order.max File ! ! This file contains the spec attribute order and their maximum attribute ! lengths required for creating spec output neutral files. When creating ! spec reports the system will default an attribute order and set of ! attribute lengths. The user can edit these attribute orders and ! lengths in this file ( spec_order.max ). If this file is in the ! directory where the software is being run the orders defined in ! this file will be used as the default attribute order and lengths. 201 = 2,16 3,3 4,3 5,10 6,7 7,7 8,8 9,6 10,6 11,6 12,6 13,6 14,6 15,6 16,6 17,6 18,8 19,6 20,6 202 = 3,6 4,6 5,7 6,6 7,6 8,6 9,8 10,8 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,8 17,6 18,16 19,6 20,6 21,7 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 26,6 27,6 203 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 204 = 2,20 3,6 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,6 8,8 9,8 10,6 11,8 12,8 13,8 14,8 15,8 16,6 17,8 18,6 19,7 20,6 21,6 22,6 23,6 24,6 25,6 205 = 3,8 4,6 5,8 6,8 7,8 8,10 211 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,8 10,8 212 = 2,16 3,8 4,8 5,8 6,8 7,16 8,8 9,6 10,6

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

113

Piping Job Specification

Piping Job Spec Report Manager This command activates the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form. It is used to generate reports from the Specification/Material Reference Database with the report definition data. The Piping Job Spec Report Manager stores the report record and location records for each discrimination data file and format file in the Project Control Database. The numbered records are used to locate ASCII files on their specified nodes.





 

Report Format — Displays the Report Format form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a format file (not the format file). For more information, see Report Format Form (on page 116). Report Discrimination Data — Displays the Discrimination Data form, which you can use to create, revise, copy, or delete the record of a discrimination data file as well as the file itself. For more information, see Report Discrimination Data Form (on page 119). Report — Displays the Report form, which you can use to create, revise, delete, and approve report records and report files. For more information, see Report Form (on page 125). Report Management Data — Displays the Report Management Defaults form, which you can use to create a record in the project control database of the default nodename and path for the report definition files. This option is primarily used for setup. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form (on page 133).

Using the Report Commands Understanding Report Files and Records The Piping Job Spec Report Manager uses the discrimination data files, format files, and database records that represent these files to generate reports. The following definitions explain all of the files and records in the reporting process.

114

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Format File and Record The format file is a user-defined, ASCII file which must be created with a text editor outside of the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. It contains special indices identifying what data appears in the report and how the data is sorted. It also defines how the data is formatted in the report. Without the format file(s), Piping Job Spec Report Manager reports cannot be processed. A set of basic format files is delivered for each type of reporting. Using the Report Format option, you can create a numbered record for each format file so that it can be accessed for report processing. The format record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific format file. Unlike the format file, the format record is created interactively. It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.

Discrimination Data File and Record The discrimination data file limits the report to only the specified database occurrences. It is an ASCII file that is created interactively using the Piping Job Spec Report Manager. The discrimination data record is a record in the Project Control Database used to name and locate a specific discrimination data file. There is a uniquely-numbered record for each discrimination data file so that it can be accessed for report processing. This is the same way that the format record is used to access a format file.

Report Output and Record The Piping Job Spec Report Manager creates a report using the specified format, discrimination, and search criteria data files, and places it in the specified directory on the specified node. The report record names or defines locations for all of the files that are necessary to generate a report, including the report output. (It is called a record to classify it as a block of data that is used for report processing but is not an actual file.)

Group Workflow There is a definite workflow for at least the first time you create a report. First, use the Report Management Data option to specify defaults for the nodename and path of the report definition files. By defining the defaults first, you can prevent keying in a nodename and path on each form. If you want to use a different nodename or path than the defined default, simply place a data point in that field and key in the modification. The following steps can be done in any order: create your format record, discrimination data record, and discrimination data file using the Report Format and Report Discrimination Data options. Reports cannot be generated until the format file, the discrimination data file, and their corresponding records have been established. Finally, use the Report option to create the actual report.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

115

Piping Job Specification

Report Format Form When you select the Report Format option from the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form, the Report Format form is displayed.

This form enables you to create, copy, revise, or delete a record of the location of the format file in the project control database. An option is also provided that enables you to copy a record and its corresponding ASCII format files. The format file defines the data that will be reported and the way in which that data will be displayed. Reports cannot be generated unless a format file exists and a record of the file's location has been entered into the project control database.  Create — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which enables you to add a new record of a format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form (on page 117).  Copy — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which copies the record of an existing format file from the project control database along with the corresponding ASCII format file. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form (on page 117).  Revise — Displays the Format Creation/Revision form, which modifies a record of an existing format file in the project control database. For more information, see Format Creation/Revision Form (on page 117).  Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing record of a format file from the project control database. If the record of the format file is deleted, reporting cannot be performed. For more information, see Format Deletion Form (on page 118).

116

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Format Creation/Revision Form When you select Create, Copy, or Revise from the Report Format form, the Piping Job Spec Report Manager form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, or revises a record in the project control database; this record defines the location of a format file. The format file itself defines the contents and format of the report. Both the location specification and the format file must exist to report on PDS data.  Number — A unique number of up to 24 characters. Specifies the short name in the project control database used to identify the record of the format file.  Description — A description of up to 40 characters for the format file.  File Specification — The file name of the format file to reference.  File Path — The disk location of the format file. This field retains the active setting.  File Node — The nodename of the system on which the format file is located. This field retains the active setting.

Before Using this Form You must have created an ASCII format file. A set of basic format files is delivered with the PD_Report product in the win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\format directory. The file for Spec Reporting reporting is named piping_rdb.fmt. For a description of each of the delivered sample format files, see PDS Report Manager.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Create, Copy, or Revise.

A list of available records displays for copy or revision. To create a database record, go to Step 3. 2. Select Report Format 3. From the displayed list, select the record to be copied or revised. Then select Accept.

Key-in fields are displayed for you to specify the required database information. 4. Specify Report Format Data Type information in each of the displayed fields, taking care to press Enter in each field. Then select Accept.

The project control database is updated.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

117

Piping Job Specification

Format Deletion Form When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.  Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database.  Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted. 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.

The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

118

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Report Discrimination Data Form When you select Report Discrimination Data from the Report Manager form, the Discrimination Data form is displayed.

This form creates, copies, revises, and deletes a discrimination data file from the specified directory. The associated record in the project control database is also copied, revised, or deleted as needed. A discrimination data file is an ASCII file that designates which models will be included in a report. That is, discrimination data specifies the scope of the report. The project control database record specifies the name and location of the discrimination data file that is to be associated with a specific report.  Create — Displays the Discrimination Data Creation form, which creates a new discrimination data file. The associated project control database record is also created. For more information, see Discrimination Data Creation Form (on page 120).  Copy — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which copies an existing data file. The associated project control database record is also copied. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form (on page 122).  Revise — Displays the Discrimination Data Revision form, which modifies discrimination data. You can use this option to revise the contents of the discrimination data file, the location of the discrimination file, and the associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Revision Form (on page 122).  Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes a discrimination data file as well as its associated record in the project control database. For more information, see Discrimination Data Deletion Form (on page 124).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

119

Piping Job Specification

Discrimination Data Creation Form

Commands  

Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database. For more information, see Search Criteria Form (on page 121).

Field Descriptions 

   

120

Number --- Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record to be created by discrimination. The number can be up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file. Description --- Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification --- Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to create. The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project. File Path --- Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node --- Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Search Criteria Form You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be reported based on database attributes. The default is no search criteria. This option enables you to define search criteria for specified attributes in the Spec Database. If you do not restrict the piping materials class attribute for Piping Commodity Data, all piping materials classes will be reported.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Search Criteria option from the Discrimination Data form.

2. Select Entity Select the database entity that contains the data to be restricted.

The system displays the attributes for the selected entity.

3. Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

121

Piping Job Specification The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

4. Select Operator Select the required operator to define the search criteria.

The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value. 5. Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard note library. Select the value and select Accept.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria. 6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator. Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition.

— OR — Accept the defined search criteria.

Discrimination Data Revision Form When you select Copy or Revise from the Discrimination Data form, the Discrimination Data Revision form displays. This form enables you to copy or revise a discrimination data file from the specified directory and its record from the Project Control Database. The copied discrimination data file can then be modified. First, the system displays the Record Number display list as shown below on the left. After you select and Accept the discrimination data file you need, the system then displays the discrimination data identification fields. These fields are used to define the record as shown below.

122

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Commands  

Approved Piping Job Spec — Defines the database to be reported: approved or unapproved. Search Criteria — Defines search criteria for specified attributes in the Specification/Material Reference Database. For more information, see Search Criteria Form (on page 121).

Field Descriptions 

   

Number — Key in a unique number to name the discrimination data record with up to 24 characters in the Project Control Database. This number is a short name to identify the record of the discrimination data file. Description — Key in a description of the discrimination data file with up to 40 characters in the Project Control Database. File Specification — Key in the filename of the discrimination data file to reference. The system verifies that the file does not already have a record in the project. File Path — Displays the disk location of the discrimination data file. This field retains the active setting. File Node — Displays the nodename where the discrimination data file is located. This field retains the active setting. If prompted to...

Do this:

Select Discrimination Data

Select the record number of the discrimination data file to revise and select Accept.

Specify Discrimination Data

Key in any changes to the discrimination data record displayed in the information fields, and select as many of the Discrimination Data options as necessary to define the discrimination data file.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

123

Piping Job Specification

Discrimination Data Deletion Form When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.  Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database.  Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted. 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.

The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

124

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Report Form When you select Report from the Report Manager form, the Report form is displayed.

This form creates, revises, and deletes report records and report files. A report record holds specifications for a report; these specifications include the report name, the report description, and which format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file to use to generate a report. The report name is not the title that is printed on the report; the title is included in the format file. At the end of each report, a parameters page is included that contains the following information:  Report Output — The report number, report title, report creation/revision date, and report node, path, and file name.  Format — The report format number, description, and node, path, and file name.  Discrimination Data — The report discrimination data number, description, and file location (network address, path, and file name). The following discrimination data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.  Search Criteria — The report search criteria number, description, and file location (node, path, and file name. The following search criteria data is also included: list of model numbers (with discipline), volume (if applicable), search criteria (if applicable), and sorting sequence.

Options  

Create — Displays the Report Creation form, which creates a report record and generates a report. For more information, see Report Creation Form (on page 126). Revise — Displays the Revise Report form, which regenerates a report from an existing or revised report record. For more information, see Revise Report Form (on page 128).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

125

Piping Job Specification   

Delete — Displays the Deletion form, which deletes an existing report record and the corresponding report. For more information, see Report Deletion Form (on page 130). Approve — Displays the Report Approval form, which approves an existing report. For more information, see Report Approval Form (on page 131). Multi-Create — Displays the Report Multiple Submit form, which submits multiple reports to the printer. For more information, see Report Multiple Submit Form (on page 131).

Report Creation Form When you select Create from the Report form, the Report Creation form is displayed.

Use this form to create a report record and to generate a report. Because report records are stored in the project control database, you can use them repeatedly.  Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.  Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file.  Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).  Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form (on page 133).  Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings, and it is automatically populated if you have specified this data on the Report Management Data form. For more information, see Report Management Defaults Form (on page 133).

126

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification 





    



 

Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept. Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept. Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file. If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number — The revision number (up to three characters) for the report. Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Submission is Delayed, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

Operating Sequence 1. From the Report form, select Create.

The Report Creation form is displayed. 2. Specify Report Data Key in the report record information. Then select the appropriate report format file, discrimination data file, and search criteria data file. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. 4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. 5. Click Accept to save the report file.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

127

Piping Job Specification

Revise Report Form When you select Revise from the Report form, the Revise Report form is displayed.

This form revises an existing report record and generates a report from the project control database. An option is also provided to update (in some cases) the report record without generating a report output file. Similarly, you can choose to generate an updated report output file without updating the report record.  Report Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.  Report Title — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file. This is not the title in the actual report, but is rather the title of the report record. The title of the report is contained in the format file.  Report File Spec — The name of the report output file (up to 14 characters).  Report File Path — The disk location for the report output file. This field retains the active settings.  Report Node — The name of the system on which the report output file will be located. This field retains the active settings.  Report Format File — The name of the format file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available format files is displayed. Select the appropriate format file, and click Accept.  Report Discrimination File — The name of the discrimination data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available discrimination data files is displayed. Select the appropriate discrimination data file, and click Accept.  Report Search Criteria — The name of the search criteria data file to be used to generate the active report. When you select this field, a list of available search criteria files is displayed. Select a search criteria file, and click Accept. Select this field a second time to specify a different search criteria file. To clear a specification, click Accept without selecting a file.



128

If the report discrimination data selected for the active report has search criteria data defined within it, and you specify a search criteria in this field, the search criteria specified in the Report Search Criteria field takes precedence over the search criteria contained in the discrimination data. Revision Number — The revision number (up to three characters) for the report.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification    



 



Last Revision Number — The revision number of the last report generated. This is a read-only field; you cannot edit it. Revised By — The user (up to five characters) who checked the report. This field is optional. Revision Description — The description (up to 40 characters) of the report revision. This field is optional. Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it. Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report. Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated. Revise Data Only/Revise Report and Data — Specifies revision of the report data only (Revise Data Only) or revision of the report data and the report output file (Revise Report and Data). To revise the report specification without updating the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Data Only, and click Accept. To revise the report output file only, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data without modifying any of the fields, and click Accept. To modify both the report file and the report output file, make the necessary changes, set this toggle to Revise Report and Data, and click Accept. If you update any field other than Report Number and Report Title, this toggle is automatically set to Revise Report and Data, and the report output file is generated.

Operating Sequence 1. From the Report form, select Revise.

The Report Creation form is displayed with a list of available report files. 2. Select Report From the displayed list, select the report to be revised. Then click Accept.

The fields update to display the selected report file specifications. 3. Revise Report Information Update the report record information as needed. 4. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. 5. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit Immediately) or later (Submission is Delayed). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. 6. Click Accept to save the report file.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

129

Piping Job Specification

Report Deletion Form When you choose Delete, the Deletion form is displayed.

This form deletes a report record from the project control database and can optionally delete the associated file. This form is used with format files and their database records, discrimination data files and their database records, and search criteria files and their database records.  Number/Description — Displays the 24-character short name and the 40-character description of a report record in the project control database.  Delete File/Do Not Delete File — Determines whether the associated file is deleted. When set to Delete File, the database record is deleted along with the associated file. When set to Do Not Delete File, only the database record is deleted.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Report Format From the displayed list, select the database record to be deleted. 2. Set the Delete File/Do Not Delete File toggle as needed. Then click Accept.

The specified record is deleted. If specified, the associated file is also deleted.

130

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Report Approval Form When you select Approve from the Report form, the Report Approval form is displayed.

Use this form to select a report to approve. Approving a report means that a database attribute is set from not approved (the default) to approved. This approval status provides a way for you to flag reports that you have run and verified that the output data is valid. When a report is revised, the approval status is automatically reset to not approved.  Number — The 24-character unique name (also called short name) of the report record.  Description — The 40-character description of the report record.

Operating Sequence 1. From the Report form, select Approve.

The Report Approval form is displayed. 2. From the displayed list, select a report to approve. Then click Accept.

The Approval form is displayed. For more information, see the PD_Report User's Guide.

Report Multiple Submit Form When you select Multi-Create from the Report form, the Report Multiple Submit form is displayed.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

131

Piping Job Specification

Use this form to submit multiple reports at the same time.  Number — The 24-character number that uniquely identifies the record of the report file in the project control database. This is sometimes referred to as the report file short name.  Description — The 40-character descriptive name of the report file.  Print/Delete — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and then deletes the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.  Print/Save — Submits the report output file to the specified print queue and saves the report output file. When you select this option, a list of available print queues is displayed. Click on a queue to select it.  Save — Saves the report output file without printing the report.  Submit to Batch Immediately/Delayed Submit to Batch — Specifies when the report will be processed. When this toggle is set to Delayed Submit to Batch, additional fields display for you to specify the date and time that the report is to be generated.

Operating Sequence 1. From the Report form, select Multi-Create.

The Report Multiple Submit form is displayed. 2. Select Reports for Submission From the displayed list, select the reports to submit. Highlighted reports are selected; select a highlighted report to remove the highlight and to not submit the report. 3. Select the appropriate print/save/delete option, and select a queue if the report is to be printed. 4. Specify whether the report is to be generated now (Submit to Batch Immediately) or later (Delayed Submit to Batch). If you choose delayed submission, specify the date and time that the report is to be submitted. 5. Click Accept to submit the reports.

132

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification

Report Management Defaults Form When you select Report Management Data from the Report Manager form, the Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

This form creates a record in the project control database of the node name and path of the report definition files. This option is used primarily for setup.  Report Path — Specifies the default path of the report output files.

      

It is recommended that you not send output reports to your system's temporary (that is, tmp or temp) directory. Report Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report output files are located. Report Format Path — Specifies the default path of the format files. Report Format Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which format files are located. Report Discrimination Data Path — Specifies the default path of the discrimination data files. Report Discrimination Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which discrimination data files are located. Report Search Criteria Data Path — Specifies the default path of the report search criteria data files. Report Search Criteria Data Node — Specifies the default node name of the system on which report search criteria data files are located.

Operating Sequence 1. From the Report Manager form, select Report Management Data.

The Report Management Defaults form is displayed.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

133

Piping Job Specification 2. Accept or Exit In the fields provided, key in the default paths and node names for the report output files, format files, discrimination data files, and search criteria data files. Then click Accept.

134

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 7

Piping Job Specification Tables Nonphysical data such as branch calculations or gasket separation are stored in the Spec Table Library or hard-coded in the system. The Spec Tables for US practice are delivered in the following files: \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l - object library \win32app\ingr\rdusrdb\us_pjstb.l.t - text library These libraries contain the Piping Job Specification tables and the other special tables which contain nonphysical data. The data in the Spec Table Library falls into two basic categories.  Specification Tables - Referenced in the Piping Materials Class Specification Data of the Material Reference Database. For more information, see PJS Tables and Functions (on page 135).  RDB Tables - Referenced in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager. For more information, see RDB Tables (on page 155). You can use the Piping Job Specification Tables command to create a new Piping Job Specification Table library or to create, modify, or delete tables in an existing library. For more information, see Piping Job Specification Tables Command (on page 173). Piping Job Specification Table files are limited to a file size of approximately 60,000 bytes or 750 rows.

PJS Tables and Functions The following special tables and functions are provided in the Spec Table Library. These table/equation names are defined in the Piping Materials Class Specification Table of the Specification Material Reference Database.  Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table (on page 136)  Nominal Piping Diameter Table (on page 137)  Thickness Data Tables (on page 140)  Materials Data Table (on page 142)  Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations (on page 152)  Branch Insertion Tables (on page 145)  Gasket Separation Table (on page 149)  Fluid Code Table (on page 151)

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

135

Piping Job Specification Tables

Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table The temperature and pressure service limits table includes the sets of temperatures and pressures that define the boundaries of acceptability for a piping materials class. These limits can be dictated by factors such as strength of components and materials used. You must insure that each of the components included in the piping materials class meet the indicated temperature and pressure limits. You can define both positive and negative values for temperature. However, you can only define positive values for pressure. The units of measure for the pressure and temperature values in the table are defined as a part of the table description. The system uses the information in this table to insure:  The highest temperature from the TDB does not exceed the highest temperature value in the table  The lowest temperature in the TDB is not less than the lowest value in the table  For a given temperature, the pressure from the table is not less than any of the corresponding pressure(s) from the TDB. This table is limited to 100 temperature and pressure values.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'LWWWW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Units= DF, PSIG ! Temperature Pressure WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZZZ END

Example Table_Data_Definition 'L1001' ! Description= B16.5 CL150-1.1, -20 to 800 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Units= DF, PSIG ! Temperature Pressure -20 285 100 285 200 260 300 230 400 200 500 170

136

Date=13-Feb-1987

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables 600 650 700 750 800 END

140 125 110 95 80

Parameters 







Table_Data_Definition (character-6) — This parameter specifies the name of the Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table. These tables use the following naming conventions.  first character: L  second character: the pressure rating of the piping materials class as defined by the following code: 1= CL150

8= GRAVHD

K= CL5000

2= CL300

9= OTHER

L= CL6000

3= CL400

A= CL125

M= CL9000

4= CL600

F= CL800

N= CL10000

5= CL900

G= CL2000

R= CL15000

6= CL1500

H= CL3000

T= CL20000

7= CL2500 J= CL4500 V= CL30000  third, fourth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One — This statement tells the system to interpolate between known values for the temperature value. The statement must be included as shown in the table format for the desired interpolation to take place. Temperature (real) — This field identifies the maximum temperature value. You can use both positive (+) and negative (-) values. Values are assumed to be positive unless otherwise indicated. Pressure (real) — This field identifies the value for pressure corresponding to the previously defined temperature. Negative (-) values are not accepted in this field.

Nominal Piping Diameter Table The NPD Table consists of the diameters for piping and tubing which are valid within any piping materials class which references this table. The system verifies any NPD input in the Piping Design TDB.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'DWWW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam WWWWW

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

137

Piping Job Specification Tables WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END This table can also be used to define the equivalency for English and metric diameters. The output column defines the English equivalent for the matching metric size.

Neutral File Format - English/Metric Equivalency Table_Data_Definition 'DWWW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN ! Metric Diam WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW WWWWW END

Examples Table_Data_Definition 'D036' ! Description= From 0.5 to 36 ! By=NP Ckd By=DG Rev=0 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= NPD_IN ! Diam 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26

138

Date=22-Jan-1987

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables 28 30 32 34 36 END Table_Data_Definition 'DB001' ! Description= From 6mm to 900mm (0.375 to 36) ! By=aw Ckd By= Rev=1 Date=17_jul 1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_MM, NPD_IN ! metric diam, imperial diam 10 0.375 15 0.5 20 0.75 25 1 40 1.5 50 2 80 3 100 4 150 6 200 8 250 10 300 12 350 14 400 16 450 18 500 20 550 22 600 24 650 26 700 28 750 30 800 32 850 34 900 36 END

Parameters 



Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the NPD table. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: D  second, third, and fourth characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This field identifies the value for nominal diameter. You can use the value ET_AL to indicate that any nominal diameter value from the TDB which is equal to or greater than the value in the preceding line is an acceptable nominal diameter for the PMC.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

139

Piping Job Specification Tables

Thickness Data Tables Thickness data is determined as a function of the table name and nominal piping diameter. These tables include the minimum, retirement, thread, and preferred thicknesses required in the calculation of piping wall thickness. The tables provide the actual thickness, not a schedule. Therefore, there must be an individual entry for each diameter. You cannot use an NPD range. PDS requires that the schedule/thickness values be in inches.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'TWWWW ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END

Example Table_Data_Definition 'TA501' ! Description= A,0.063CA,0.0071D=26 ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=31-Jan-1987 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 8 Units= NPD_IN, IN, IN, IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN, SC_TH_IN ! Diam Min Thick Ret Thick Thread Thick Preferred Schedules/Thicknesses 0.5 .147 .06 S-160 0.75 .154 .06 S-XS 1 .179 .06 S-XS 1.5 .2 .06 S-XS -

140

-

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 END

.154 .216 .237 .28 .250 .250 .250 .250 .250 .250 .250 .250 .250 .3125 .3125 .3125 .3125 .3125 .3125

.06 .06 .07 .1 .1 .1 .1 .12 .12 .12 .13 .15 .15 .17 .19 .20 .21 .23 .24

-

S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-10 S-10 S-10 S-10 S-STD S-STD

S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-XS

-

-

-

Parameters 

Table_Data_Definition - Thickness Data Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: T  second character: code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the piping materials class, as defined below. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys, stainless steels, and non-ferrous alloys. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria  third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended, per the following criteria: 1= None

C= 304 clad

P= Polyester lined

2= 0.020"

D= 304L clad

Q= Polypropylene lined

3= 0.030"

E= 316 clad

R= PTFE lined

4= 0.050"

F= 316L clad

S= Saran lined

5= 0.063"

G= 317 clad

T= Teflon lined

6= 0.10"

H= 317L clad

U= TK31 lined

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

141

Piping Job Specification Tables 7= 0.125"

J=321 clad

V= R11 lined

8= 0.188"

L= Cement lined

W= R15 lined

9= 0.250"

M= Epoxy lined

X= R18 lined

A= 405 clad

N= Glass lined

Y= Other 1

B= 410S clad O= Kynar lined Z= Other 2 fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter (integer) — This parameter identifies the desired value for nominal diameter. Min Thick - Minimum Required Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the least thickness, inclusive of corrosion allowance and mill tolerance, which is acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. Ret Thick - Retirement Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the least thickness, exclusive of corrosion allowance, thread allowance, or mill tolerance, which is acceptable for a given NPD. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. This value is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. Thread Thick - Thread Thickness (real) — This parameter represents the thickness for threaded pipe that must be added to the calculated wall thickness to account for the presence of threads. Either a positive number or a blank entry must be provided. It is only used in piping wall thickness calculations. Preferred Schedule/Thicknesses 1 through 6 (real) — These parameters represent the schedules and/or thicknesses you prefer be used as a result of a piping wall thickness calculation. Values in the table are arranged in ascending thickness sequence. The system rounds the calculated wall thickness to the next higher preferred thickness. You are restricted to a limit of six preferred thicknesses. PDS requires that these values be in inches. 

 







Materials Data Table The Materials Data Table consists of the materials data that is a function of the table name, material grade, wall thickness range, and temperature. These tables include the properties which are required for the calculation of piping wall thickness. You must insure that units of measure used in the Materials Table are consistent with those used in the corresponding Temperature-Pressure Table(s). Note that you can express the mill tolerance as either a thickness percentage or a tolerance value. Only one value can exist per table entry. If values exist for both, the system only uses the mill thickness percentage. The system uses the materials grade and temperature to access the information in the table and provide the values of thickness range, coefficient Y, allowable stress (S), and the applicable mill tolerance. Once the actual thickness is calculated for the component, the calculation software compares that value with the thickness range. If the thickness range is exceeded, the next entry in the materials table for the applicable materials grade and temperature is sought and the calculation process is repeated.

Neutral File Format

142

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables Table_Data_Definition 'MWWW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN ! Mill Tol ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ WWWW ZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZ ZZZZZZ ZZZZZ ZZZZZ END

Example Table_Data_Definition 'ML01' ! Description= ASTM A53-B, A106, API 5L-B ! By=DCG Ckd By=DG Rev=0 Date=24-Feb-87 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 6 Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One Units= INT, DF, IN, IN, DEC, PSI, DEC, IN ! Mill Tolrnce ! Mat Gr Temp Thick Range Y S % Value 142 -20 .4 20000 12.5 142 100 .4 20000 12.5 142 200 .4 20000 12.5 142 300 .4 20000 12.5 142 400 .4 20000 12.5 142 500 .4 18900 12.5 142 600 .4 17300 12.5 142 650 .4 17000 12.5 142 700 .4 16500 12.5 142 750 .4 13000 12.5 142 800 .4 10800 12.5 162 -20 .4 20000 12.5 162 100 .4 20000 12.5 162 200 .4 20000 12.5 162 300 .4 20000 12.5 162 400 .4 20000 12.5 162 500 .4 18900 12.5 162 600 .4 17300 12.5 162 650 .4 17000 12.5 162 700 .4 16500 12.5 162 750 .4 13000 12.5 162 800 .4 10800 12.5 116 -20 .4 20000 12.5 116 100 .4 20000 12.5 -

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

143

Piping Job Specification Tables 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 116 END

200 300 400 500 600 650 700 750 800

-

-

.4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4

20000 20000 20000 18900 17300 17000 16500 13000 10800

12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5

-

Parameters 

Table_Data_Definition - Materials Data Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the number of the table. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: M  second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention: A= ASME Section I [Power Boilers]

L= ANSI-B31.3 [Petroleum]

B= ASME Section III [Nuclear]

M= ANSI-B31.4 [Oil Transport]

C= Do not use

N= ANSI-B31.5 [Refrigeration]

D= ASME Section VIII-1 [Unfired Vessels]

P= ANSI-B31.8 [Gas Transmission]

E= ASME Section VIII-2 [Unfired Vessels]

Q= ANSI-B31.9 [Building Services]

J= ANSI-B31.1 [Power]

T= API

K= ANSI-B31.2 [Fuel Gas] V= AWWA third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One — This statement must be included as shown for interpolation to take place. Interpolation is used for all the output fields, if required. Mat Gr - Material Grade (integer - standard note 145) — This code-listed parameter identifies the materials grade. This compound attribute includes the code, specification, grade, temper, and joint efficiency to be used for the component. Temp - Temperature (real) — This field identifies the applicable temperature for a set of material properties. Thick - Wall Thickness Range - low (real) Range - Wall Thickness Range - high (real) — These fields identify the lower and upper wall thickness bounds for a set of material properties. You can enter positive numbers or blanks. A blank indicates that the properties apply regardless of the thickness of the component. You cannot define this range in terms of schedule. Y - Coefficient Y (real) — This parameter represents the coefficient Y corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or a blank. S - Allowable Stress (real) — This parameter represents the allowable stress corresponding to the previously defined parameters in the line. You can enter a positive number or a blank. S is the basic allowable stress for the material excluding casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E). Mill Tol % - Mill Thickness Percentage (real) — This parameter represents the per cent of the wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for pipe material. Enter the mill tolerance to be considered for the material as a percent of nominal thickness, such as 12.5%. 

 

  

 



144

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables 

Mill Tol Value - Mill Thickness Value (real) — This parameter represents the actual wall thickness that is to be considered as mill tolerance for plate material. Enter the value of mill tolerance to be considered for the material, such as 0.01 inch.

Branch Insertion Tables A branch insertion table defines the selection criteria for tee and lateral branches. You must specify the type of wye or cross to be placed in the model and specify the reinforcement data. Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches in the piping system as a function of the acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters for the intersecting lines. These tables do not include the reinforcement required at Y's and crosses. For them, the required reinforcement must be specified in Piping Design. The types of tee branch connections include branch weld, coupling, thredolet, reducing tee, tee with reducing insert, nipolet, branch weld with reinforcing pad, sockolet, tee, weldolet, tee with reducing bushing, and reducing tee with reducer(s). The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when no reinforcement component has been specifically defined. The system uses the information in this table, and the header nominal diameter (first size) and branch nominal diameter (second size) to provide the item name of the component to be used at the intersection. Neither interpolation nor extrapolation is allowed.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'BWWWW_WW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6, IN ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes Thickness WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX WWWWW WWWWW 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZ' 'ZZZZZZZ' XXXX END If thickness is not defined, then the system checks for the number of components in the preferred branch AABBCC codes component column. If there is only one component, then it is directly placed. If there are two components, then the system performs branch reinforcement calculation. If thickness is defined, the branch component is selected based on this thickness value against the thickness of the connected header pipe. If the value of Thickness is greater than the header thickness, the component from the first column under the preferred branch AABBCC codes is used. If the value of the Thickness is less than the header thickness, component from the second column under the preferred branch AABBCC codes is used. The branch insertion table does not include two components (for example, tee and reducer) at the same time. The software cannot place two components based on one set of criteria. For example, if you are trying to place a 6"x6"x6" tee and a 6"x2" reducer, one must be placed manually. There is no rule in the software allowing the placement of both components.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

145

Piping Job Specification Tables Example Table_Data_Definition 'BA901_90' No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 4 Units= NPD_IN, NPD_IN, AN*6, AN*6, AN*6, IN ! Nom Diam ! Header Branch 24 24 24 24 24 24 24

10 12 14 16 18 20 24

Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes '6Q3C80' '6Q3C80' '6Q3C80' '6Q3C80' '6Q3C80' '6Q3C86' '6Q3C22'

'6Q3C73' '6Q3C86' '6Q3C86' -

Thickness -

.360 .380 -

END

Parameters 

146

Table_Data_Definition - Branch Insertion Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the Branch Table entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the acute angle of intersection between the header and the branch. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: B  second character: a code which combines the criteria type with the maximum size for which threaded components are used in the PMC, as defined below. Criteria 1 applies to carbon steels and low-alloy steels; criteria 2 applies to aluminum alloys, stainless steels and non-ferrous alloys. A= Criteria 1 with no threaded components B= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter C= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter D= Criteria 1 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter F= Criteria 2 with no threaded components G= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1 inch diameter H= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 1.5 inch diameter I= Criteria 2 with threaded components up to 2 inch diameter Z= Special criteria  third character: the corrosion allowance of the piping materials class for which the table is intended, per the following criteria: 1= None

C= 304 clad

P= Polyester lined

2= 0.020"

D= 304L clad

Q= Polypropylene lined

3= 0.030"

E= 316 clad

R= PTFE lined

4= 0.050"

F= 316L clad

S= Saran lined

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables

 



5= 0.063"

G= 317 clad

T= Teflon lined

6= 0.10"

H= 317L clad

U= TK31 lined

7= 0.125"

J=321 clad

V= R11 lined

8= 0.188"

L= Cement lined

W= R15 lined

9= 0.250"

M= Epoxy lined

X= R18 lined

A= 405 clad

N= Glass lined

Y= Other 1

B= 410S clad O= Kynar lined Z= Other 2  fourth and fifth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the table name unique. The second part of the table name defines the acute angle of intersection. Negative values and values less than 45 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid. However, when dealing with branch reinforcements, negative values and values less than 20 degrees or greater than 90 degrees are not valid (per ANSI B31.1 and ANSI B31.3). The data fields are sorted by header NPD and then by branch NPD. Nom Diam Header - NPD for Run (integer) --- This field identifies the nominal diameter of the header at the intersection. This is the member with the largest nominal diameter. Nom Diam Branch - NPD for Branch (integer) --- This field identifies the nominal diameter of the branch member at the intersection. This is the member with the smallest nominal diameter. Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes (character 6) --- These field identify the commodity item name of the component used to reinforce the intersection.  If only one item name is listed, no branch reinforcement calculation is performed. The specified item is placed at the intersection.  If two or more item names apply in one line, the system calculates the branch reinforcement thickness. The system tests the listed item names sequentially (from left to right) until the applicable strength criteria are satisfied.  Therefore, these codes should be arranged in ascending strength sequence (for example, reinforcing welds, followed by reinforcing pads, followed by weldolets.)  If you enter a value of LOOKUP in the AABBCC field, it will refer to the BRANCHID.LN file in the \project directory. You must create this file and edit the attributes. For an example of the file format, see BRANCHID.LN File (on page 148) Typically, the codes are from one of the following types:  Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.  Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.  Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

147

Piping Job Specification Tables

BRANCHID.LN File The BRANCHID.LN file must be placed in the \project directory and is formatted as shown below: MATCHING_ATTRIBUTES: 3 LINE_DEF: WC-0104 BRANCH_DEF: 5192; 5192; 6Q3C22 BRANCH_DEF: 5768; 5320; 6Q3C80 LINE_DEF: WC-0105 BRANCH_DEF: 5192; 5032; ATECH 







MATCHING_ATTRIBUTES - Defines the search criteria for the pipeline to be revised. The value 3 is the attribute number as defined by the Design DDL and Piping Segment Data, and 3 is therefore equal to line_id. LINE_DEF - Used with the MATCHING_ATTRIBUTES value. In the example above, the first MATCHING_ATTRIBUTES: 3 value is WC-0104. The software searches for pipeline WC-0104 to place the branching component. BRANCH_DEF - Determines which branch value is placed on the pipeline based on the first and second size attributes. If the first and second size attributes match, the branch value is used. For example, in the second BRANCH_DEF line of the WC-0104 LINE_DEF section, the first and second size attributes are 5768 and 5320, respectively. If these attributes match up, then the value 6Q3C80 is placed on the WC-0104 pipeline. BRANCH_DEF - Determines which branch value is placed on the pipeline based on the first and second size attributes. If the first and second size attributes match, the branch value is used. For example, in the second BRANCH_DEF line of the WC-0105 LINE_DEF section, the first and second size attributes are 5192 and 5032, respectively. If these attributes match up, then the value ATECH is placed on the WC-0105 pipeline.

 

The piping assembly TECH must be proceeded by an A. The BRANCHID.LN file references the Piping Assembly Library when a value of "LOOKUP" is placed in the AABBCC field of the branch insertion table. Below is an example of the lookup value in the branch insertion table: ! Nom Diam Preferred Branch ! Header Branch AABBCC Codes 0.75 0.75 '6Q3C22' 1 0.75 '6Q3C24' 1 1 '6Q3C22' 1.5 0.75 '6Q3C24' 1.5 1 '6Q3C24' 1.5 1.5 '6Q3C22' 2 0.75 '6Q3C74' 2 1 '6Q3C74' 2 1.5 '6Q3C74' 2 2 '6Q3C22' 3 0.75 '6Q3C74' 3 1 '6Q3C74' 3 1.5 '6Q3C74' > 3 2 'LOOKUP' 3 3 '6Q3C22' 4 0.75 '6Q3C74' -

148

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables

> >

> > >

4 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

1 1.5 2 3 4 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6

'6Q3C74' '6Q3C74' '6Q3C73' 'LOOKUP' '6Q3C22' '6Q3C74' '6Q3C74' '6Q3C74' '6Q3C73' '6Q3C73' 'LOOKUP' '6Q3C22'

-

-

END

Gasket Separation Table These tables define the gasket gap to be used for a given nominal diameter and maximum temperature. For each bolted end, the system uses the applicable table, the NPD of the end, and the maximum temperature for the gasket to be used at the end, to determine the gap thickness to be used at the end. Lines in this table are sorted by NPD first and maximum temperature second.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'GWWW_WWWWWW' ! Description= ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ ! By=ZZZ Ckd By=ZZZ Rev=ZZ Date=ZZ-ZZZ-ZZZZ No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ WWWWW ZZZ ZZZZZ END

Example Table_Data_Definition 'G001_1500' ! Description= SP-1000 deg F , RJ-1001 deg F ! By=DCG Ckd By=DCG Rev=0 Date=24-Jun-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1 Units= NPD_IN, DF, IN ! Diam TMx Gaskt Gap 0.5 1000 .125 0.75 1000 .125 1 1000 .125 1.5 1000 .125

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

149

Piping Job Specification Tables 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 END

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001 1001

.125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .125 .16 .16 .16 .16 .12 .12 .12 .12 .16 .16 .19 .22 .31 .31 .38 .44

Parameters 

 



150

Table_Data_Definition - Gasket Gap Table Name (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the table. This name results from the compounding of the entry defined in the Piping Materials Class with the rating of the bolted end to which the gasket gap applies. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first character: G  next three characters: numbers from 001 through 999 used to make the table name unique.  The second part of the table name is the rating of the components to which it applies. The characters CL and # are not included in the rating designation. Diam - Nominal Piping Diameter — This field identifies the applicable NPD value. The units of measure used to define the NPD must match the NPD units to be used in the Piping model. TMx - Maximum Temperature — This field identifies the maximum temperature for the gasket as defined in the Piping Commodity Specification Data (Table 202 attribute 5). (The system must find a match of the commodity item temperature and the value in this column for successful retrieval of data.) The units of measure used to define the temperature must be the same as the units used in the Temperature Pressure Service Limits table. Gasket Gap — This field identifies the full gasket gap to be used.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables

Fluid Code Table Fluid Code tables can be used to limit the number of fluid codes which are valid for a particular Piping Material Class. A Fluid Code table works much like the Diameters table. Where the Diameters Table contains a valid set of diameters for a PMC, the Fluid Code table contains a set of valid Fluid Codes for a PMC. To use a Fluid Code table,  Specify the name of the Fluid Code Table in the fluid_code attribute of the Piping Materials Class definition.  Set the Fluid Code Control toggle to Yes on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this form.

Neutral File Format Table_Data_Definition 'FC001' ! Description= By Process Vendor ! By=SCC Ckd By=SCC Rev=1 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 0 Units= INT 521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550 END

Date=12-OCT-90

Parameters 



Table_Data_Definition (character 6) — This field identifies the name of the Fluid Code table. These tables use the following naming conventions:  first and second character: FC  third, forth, and fifth characters: numbers from 001 to 999 used to make the table name unique. Fld Cd (integer) — This field lists the code list numbers for the valid fluid codes from code list set 125.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

151

Piping Job Specification Tables

Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch reinforcement to resist positive pressure. The actual equations and their logic are hard-coded in the software. PDS requires that the thickness value be defined in inches. Thickness equations have project unique names which must follow the following convention:  first character: E  second character: the applicable design code, per the following convention: A= ASME Section I

[Power Boilers]

B= ASME Section III

[Nuclear]

C= Do not use D= ASME Section VIII-1

[Unfired Vessels]

E= ASME Section VIII-2

[Unfired Vessels]

J= ANSI-B31.1

[Power]

K= ANSI-B31.2

[Fuel Gas]

L= ANSI-B31.3

[Petroleum]

M= ANSI-B31.4

[Oil Transport]

N= ANSI-B31.5

[Refrigeration]

P= ANSI-B31.8

[Gas Transmission]

Q= ANSI-B31.9

[Building Services]

T= API V= AWWA  third and fourth characters: numbers from 01 through 99 used to make the equation name unique. If the equation name is provided as part of the definition *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data table, the equation name must be limited to the format Ex; no third or fourth character can be defined. These equations define formulas for the calculation of piping wall thickness and branch reinforcement to resist positive pressure.

Delivered Equations The thickness and branch reinforcement logic for the following equations are hardcoded in the software.  EJ01 Source - ANSI-B31.1.1986 [Power Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 104.1, equation 3 Reinforcement logic from paragraph 104.3.1(D)



152

EL01

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables Source - ANSI-B31.3c.1986 [Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping] Thickness logic from paragraph 304.1, equation 3a Reinforcement logic from paragraph 304.3.3 & Code - Appendix H

The following considerations apply to both thickness equations and branch reinforcement calculations.  Pressures and temperatures used in thickness/branch reinforcement calculations are derived from data in the Piping Design Database. Both normal and alternate pressure and temperature conditions are considered. If actual values exist for the normal design or the alternate design pressure/temperatures, the corresponding operating conditions are ignored. If default values exist for BOTH sets of design conditions, both normal and alternate operating conditions are used. At least one complete set of conditions must be defined.  Once the proper pressure and temperature sets are determined, their units of measure are converted to those used in the Temperature-Pressure Table associated with the Piping Materials Class to which the component belongs. Conversions are performed using the procedures and conversion factors defined for the Units of Measure in Appendix F.  Only positive pressure is considered. The system reports an error if you request a thickness calculation involving a vacuum condition (negative pressure).  Independent sets of thickness/reinforcement calculations are carried out for each applicable pressure/temperature set. In each calculation set, table values that are temperature dependent are determined on the basis of the temperature applicable to the calculation set being considered. The thicker calculated thickness is used.

Thickness Equations The following considerations apply to thickness equations.  Thickness calculations are triggered by specifying an equation name in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Piping Commodity Specification Data. An asterisk (*) followed by a name (of the form xyyy) defines the specific calculation or table lookup to be used for wall thickness. The letters that form this code have the following meaning: x alphanumeric code that defines the equation to use in the calculation. Possible values and their definitions are:  If this character is C, the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined in the DEFAULT_WALL_THICK_EQUATION attribute of the Piping Materials Class database table.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

153

Piping Job Specification Tables 



If the code is any character other than C, the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation with the name EX. yyy casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining a calculation to be performed on a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should be entered here. For components with ends having different nominal diameters, independent sets of thickness determinations are performed for each NPD. One or more ends may need to calculated, as determined by specific *xyyy entries in the Commodity Item entity. The larger thickness (calculated or predefined) is used. For example:  A 20" x 10" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *xyyy 20" end and a 0.55" thick, 10" end. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.55" thick reducer is used.  A 24" x 20" reducer is defined in the Piping Commodity Table to have a *XYYY 24" end and a *XYYY 20" end. The calculation of the 24" end results in a 0.6" thickness. The calculation of the 20" end results in a 0.5" thickness. A 0.6" thick reducer is used.  All thickness calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The value for this factor is YYY/100, where YYY is defined in the entry *XYYY made under the Schedule Thickness attribute for the Commodity Item under consideration.

Branch Reinforcement The following considerations apply to branch reinforcement calculations.  The need to perform a branch reinforcement calculation is triggered by  the placement of a generic branch component with the actual item name determined from a branch table. (See Branch Insertion Tables.)  the presence of more than one item name in the Preferred Branch AABBCC Codes fields of the applicable branch table.  the applicable branch reinforcement being either a reinforcing weld or a reinforcing pad.  All calculations involve a casting, joint, or structural grade quality factor (E). The value for this factor is YYY/100, where YYY is defined in the Modifier attribute for entries with an item name of PIPING.  The fillet welds joining reinforcing pads to the header and to the branch are considered in determining the available reinforcement area.

Spec Access The execution of a pipe wall thickness calculation is performed when the variable PIPE_OD_n is encountered in the physical data definition of a pipe or component. Therefore, pipe outside diameter must be calculated or retrieved from a table before the wall thickness can be used as part of a table name. After the actual thickness is calculated, it is compared against the thickness range in the Materials table and the retirement thickness in the Thickness Data table. The system uses the greater of these values as the uncorroded wall thickness. Then the system adds the corrosion allowance from the PMC, the thread thickness from the wall thickness table, and the mill tolerance from the Materials table. This revised thickness is compared against the minimum thickness value in the Thickness Data table. The larger of these two values is compared against the preferred thickness value in the Thickness Data table, and the next largest preferred value is used for table look-ups and is stored in the TDB.

154

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables If the Thickness Data table uses schedules as preferred thickness, the schedules are translated to an actual thickness by a table look-up from a table of the form MALWT//Term_type//shc_thick//generic_flag//weight_code and output 2 gives the actual wall thickness.

Verification of Schedule Thickness You can set an option in the RDB to determine how the piping segment override schedule/thickness value will be handled during wall thickness calculations. By default, the piping segment schedule/thickness override is used in place of the value determined from the Piping Job Specification.

RDB Tables The following reference data tables are defined in the Spec Table Library. These tables are required to provide basic data for the performance of the software. TNF

Table Name

G02

COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME (see "Commodity Item Name Table (G02)" on page 156)

G04

BEND_DEFLECTION (see "Bend Deflection Table (G04)" on page 158)

G06

PIPE_RUN_LENGTH (see "Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06)" on page 159)

G07

PIPE_LENGTH (see "Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07)" on page 160)

G11

BOLT_LENGTH (see "Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11)" on page 161) WELD_TYPE_TABLE (see "Weld Type Table" on page 164) WELD_C10031 (see "Weld Clearance Table" on page 167) DRV_WELD_DEF (see "Weld Graphics Dimensions Table" on page 168) CommodityCode_BLT (Bolt Commodity Code Table (on page 166)) CommodityCode_GKT (Gasket Diameter Table (on page 169)) FIELD_FIT_LENGTH (see "Field Fit Length Table" on page 170) Component_Mirror_Table (see "Component Mirror Table" on page 170) Operator_Mirror_Table (see "Operator Mirror Table" on page 171) Default_End_Prep (see "Default End Preparation Table"

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

155

Piping Job Specification Tables on page 172) MTO Tables and Functions (on page 172) The system uses the settings in the Component Placement and Material TakeOff forms of the Project Data Manager to determine the applicable names for these basic tables. Refer to Table Formats and Naming Conventions (on page 219) for information on the basic conventions used for PDS tables.

Commodity Item Name Table (G02) The commodity item name table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). It enables you to relate the component types (1 to 70) hard-coded in the software with the applicable Item Names. As the system processes the segment for component placement, it uses the derived Item Name from this table to reference the Piping Commodity Specification data in the Specification Material Reference Database. When placing change of direction components, this table is used in conjunction with the Bend Deflection Table. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G02 COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME

Example Table_Data_Definition 'COMMODITY_ITEM_NAME' ! Description= Correlation of hardcoded component types and AABBCC codes ! By=GJH Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=16-May-1989 No_Inputs 1 No_Outputs 1 Units= INT, AN*6 ! Comp AABBCC ! Type Code 1 'PIPING' 2 'TUBING' 3 'HOSE' 4 '6Q2C23' 5 '6Q2C01' 6 '6Q2C01' 7 '6Q2C76' 8 '6Q2C75' 9 '6Q2C56' 10 '6Q2C55' 11 '6Q3C45' 12 '6Q3C60' 13 '6Q2C47' 14 '6Q2C84' 15 '6Q3C47' 16 '6Q3C49' 17 '6Q3C50' 18 '6Q3C25' 19 '6Q3C47' 20 '6Q3C77' 21 '6Q3C82' 22 '6Q3C80'

156

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables > 23 > 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 END

'6Q3C88' '6Q2C24' '6Q1C76' '6Q2C16' '6Q2C19' '6Q2C21' '6Q2C08' 'IND' '6Q2C49' '6Q2C51' '6Q2C53' '6Q2C06' '6Q3C89'

The meaning of the various component types is outlined below: Comp Type

Definition

1

Piping (not used by the software)

2

Tubing (not used by the software)

3

Hose (not used by the software)

4

Concentric diameter change

5

Flange in bends

6

Flange in other components

7

90 degree directional change

8

45-90 degree directional change

9

45 degree directional change

10

< 45 degree directional change

11

True Y

12

Equal size cross (if not equal size, software will handle as a branch)

13

> 90 pipe bend

14

90 degree reducing elbow

15

Lateral (not used by the software)

16

Reducing lateral

17

Reducing run and branch lateral

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

157

Piping Job Specification Tables Comp Type

Definition

18

Reducing run and branch tee

19

Lateral (not used by the software)

20

Elbolet (used by Compute for Elbolet under the Tap command)

21

Reinforcing weld

22

Reinforcing pad

23

Branch nipple

25-27

vent/drain valve A - C

28

end

29

plug

30

cap

31

blind flange

32-37

Closing component A - F

38-40

Instrument indicator A - C

41

5.625 degree bend

42

11.25 degree bend

43

22.5 degree bend

44

Orifice flange

45

In-line nipple

51-60

Pipe-like commodity item 1 - 10

61-70 Pipe-like model code 1 - 10 If you do not want to place one of the above component types as part of automatic component placement, place a hyphen (-) for the Item Name.

Bend Deflection Table (G04) The bend deflection table is used when placing a component at the vertex of an existing piping segment (in either automatic or manual component placement). The system uses the bend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type of component to be placed. This table contains the following data:  bend angle - low  bend angle - high  index into the Commodity Item Name table for a full size bend  index into the Commodity Item Name table for a reducing bend This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for a specified angle range. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of one pipe run makes with the other run. The component types are defined in the commodity item name table. See Commodity Item Name Table (G02) (on page 156). A value of 0 for the type indicates that no reducing component should be placed for an angle range.

158

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Job Specification Tables The system uses the bend angle to search this table for the matching range of bend angles. The system uses the index into the Commodity Item Name table for either a full size bend or a reducing bend depending upon the nominal piping diameters of the line route segments that form the bend. The system searches for an entry in the table where the angle is greater than or equal to the low bend angle and less than the high bend angle. You can define more than one bend deflection table for a project provided they are given different names. For example, one table can apply to underground piping and the other to aboveground piping. Refer to the Component Placement form in the Project Data Manager for information on defining the bend deflection table for a project or model. The table name format that applies to this table is: TNF=G04 BEND_DEFLECTION

Example Table_Data_Definition 'BEND_DEFLECTION' ! Description= Component type to use as function of angle between runs ! By=EPZ Ckd By=DCG Rev=2 Date=09-Nov-1987 No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 2 Units= DEC, DEC, INT, INT ! Angle Comp Type To Use ! Low High Full Red 0.1 44.9 10 0 44.9 45.1 9 0 45.1 89.9 8 0 89.9 90.1 7 14 90.1 179.9 13 0 END The following listing shows the component types used in this example. bend angle index low high full size reducing size 0.1 44.9 10 ( < 45 trimmed bend) N/A 44.9 45.1 9 (45 bend) N/A 45.1 89.9 8 (45-90 trimmed bend) N/A 89.9 90.1 7 (90 bend) 14 (reducing 90 bend) 90.1 179.9 13 ( > 90 trimmed bend) N/A

Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) This table enables you to define the minimum allowable segment run length which can be placed in the model during centerline routing. The values defined in this table do not apply to the segment run automatically created by the software when placing components end to end. The Piping Designer insures that the length of any pipe run of a piping segment exceeds the active segment run length threshold. The threshold is determined from this table as a function of nominal piping diameter. The only exception to this is for the small pipe run required for the offset of an eccentric reducer. This threshold is used to insure that the pipe run between two connected bends exceeds the fabrication length of the two bends. The value for nominal diameter is interpreted as follows: Diam Entry

Range of Diameters Covered

n1

nominal diameter < n1

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

159

Piping Job Specification Tables n2

n1 ) have been revised since their original release. For example, the section of the table shown below has been revised three times since it was first delivered.

Component Tables The following conventions apply to the definition of columns in all the tables except tables for specialty items.  The following line is required to define the number of input and output columns: No_Inputs x No_Outputs x





The number of input columns must not exceed 2. The number of output columns must not exceed 9; it can be 0. The following statements are used in some tables to indicate that values will be interpolated. Input_Interpolation 1, Next_One Input_Interpolation 2, Next_One A definition must be made using the following format regarding the units of measure used in each column of a table: Units= NPD_IN, SF, LB, INT, DEC, IN, RAT, IN, IN, IN

Units Units are defined for each column of a table as follows:

220

Angle, degrees

DEG

Angle between runs, degrees

DEC

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Table Formats and Naming Conventions Area

FT2 IN2 YD2 MI2 SCM SKM

Code-listed attributes

INT

Density

LBF3 LB_UKGAL LB_USGAL KIPFT3 USTONFT3 KG_L KG_DM3 KGM3

Length, inches

IN

Length, millimeter

MM

Length, inches decimal

IN_DEC

Length, mm decimal

MM_DEC

Mass

GRAIN USTON UKTON MG G

Nominal diameter, inches

NPD_IN

Nominal diameter, mm

NPD_MM

Pressure, psig

PSIG

Pressure, pascal gage

PAG

Pressure, bar

BAR

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

221

Table Formats and Naming Conventions Pressure, bar (gage)

BAR_G

Pressure, atmospheres

ATM

Pressure, inches water absolute

INH20

Pressure, inches water at 32 deg

INH20_32F

Pressure, inches mercury absolute

INHG

Pressure, inches mercury at 32 deg

INHG_32F

Pressure, kg per cm squared (gage)

KG_CM2

Pressure kg per cm squared (absolute)

KG_CM2_A

Pressure, mm water at 4 deg

MMH20

Pressure, mm mercury at 32 deg

MMHG

Pressure, megaPascal (gage)

MPa_g

Rating

RAT CLxxx and xxx# are expressed as xxx

Schedule/thickness, inches

SC_TH_IN

Schedule/thickness, millimeters

SC_TH_MM

Stress, psi

PSI

Stress, pascal

PA

Stress, kpa

KPA

Stress, mpa

MPA

Surface area, square feet

SF

Surface area, square meter

SM

Surface area, square millimeter

SMM

Surface area/unit,

222

square feet per foot

SFF

square meter per meter

SM_M

square millimeter per meter

SMM_M

Temperature, degrees Celsius

DC

Temperature, degrees Fahrenheit

DF

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Table Formats and Naming Conventions Temperature, degrees Kelvin

DK

Temperature, degrees Rankine

DR

Unitless alphanumeric

AN*xx where xx defines the number of characters

Unitless integer

INT

Unitless real number

DEC

Weight, pounds

LB

Weight, kilogram

KG

Weight/unit, pounds per foot

LBF

Weight/unit, kilograms per meter

KGM

Fields (Input/Output Columns) 

    



 

Attributes can consist of the following field types. The system determines the field type on the basis of data provided in each table.  -NPD (for nominal diameter)  -INTEGER2  -REAL4 (floating point)  -AN*x (alphanumeric, where x defines the number of characters up to a maximum of 8) All entries in the tables are left justified. Field locations and field lengths defined with XXXXs, WWWWs, and ZZZZZs in this document are observed. Fractions are not used to define any table value. Adjacent columns in a table are separated by one or more spaces. If a value in a table is not known, a hyphen (-) must be used in the corresponding field. The system interprets this entry as a blank value and displays a blank in reports, drawings, and other data outputs. Real numbers without decimals can be expressed with or without a decimal point. For example, a nominal diameter of twenty inches can be expressed as 20, 20. , or 20.0. For consistency, all delivered tables use the value 20 All alphanumeric values in a table must be enclosed in single quotes (' '). For example, 'ZZZZZ'. For tables with only one input column, the generic value ET_AL can be used in the input column. The system translates this entry to indicate that values in the immediately preceding line apply to any input value equal to or greater than the value in the current line.

NPD Values The following table is used to correlate English nominal pipe diameters with their corresponding metric values.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

223

Table Formats and Naming Conventions Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 0.125 6 0.250 8 0.375 10 0.500 15 0.750 20 1.000 25 1.250 32 1.500 40 2.000 50 2.500 65 3.000 80 3.500 90 4.000 100 5.000 125 6.000 150 8.000 200 10.00 250 12.00 300

Nominal Pipe Diameter inches mm 14.00 350 16.00 400 18.00 450 20.00 500 22.00 550 24.00 600 26.00 650 28.00 700 30.00 750 32.00 800 34.00 850 36.00 900 38.00 950 40.00 1000 42.00 1050 44.00 1100 46.00 1150 48.00 1200

Rating The following conventions apply to the rating attribute with respect to the naming of data tables:  Ratings can be expressed in the PJS in any of the following formats: CLxxxx, xxxx#, or OTxxxx. However, table entries and file names representing the rating exclude the CL, #, or OT characters. This enables the same table to be used regardless of how the rating is defined. In the delivered PJS, these rating formats are used in accordance with the following criteria: CLxxxx refers to an ANSI or API pressure rating xxxx# refers to a pressure rating defined by an organization other than ANSI or API. OTxxxx refers to a rating that meets the applicable ANSI or API rating geometrically but not from a pressure carrying standpoint. An example is a valve supplied with flanged ends meeting the bolting pattern of ANSI CL150 pressure rating but with pressure carrying characteristics different from those of that ANSI rating.  Female ends for plastic pipe are usually defined in terms of schedule/thickness and not in terms of rating. To make female ends for plastic pipe follow the rules for other female ends, the applicable schedule/thickness is used as the value for rating. If such rating values contain alphanumeric characters, the system strips all the alpha characters from the rating value and uses only the numeric values in accessing the applicable tables.  If the rating in the PJS is expressed in alphabetic characters only, the system uses the characters to access a data table. The names of the data tables include all the alphabetic characters included in the PJS. GRAVHD can be used to identify the rating for components rated to sustain a nominal fluid head. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables. OTHER can be used to identify a nonstandard rating value. NONE can be used to identify the rating for components whose ends would normally require the rating value as part of the table name, but for which a rating does not apply. This value can be used in the PJS and in the data tables.

224

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Table Formats and Naming Conventions Schedule/Thickness Schedule or thickness values are shown for all applicable components. In order of preference, schedule and thickness are expressed in terms of:  Generic schedules, such as S-STD, S-XS, and S-XXS. If the schedule name exceeds the provided field length (for example, S-SDR13.5), it is defined in terms of its wall thickness.  Specific schedules, such as S-40, S-60, and S-80.  NREQD: This value is used in cases where all of the following conditions apply:  The thickness value is not required to purchase the component.  Empty weights are not significantly affected by actual thickness values.  Either stress analysis is not applicable, or the component is considered to be infinitely rigid in stress analysis calculations.  Specific wall thicknesses: To insure compatibility between the data tables, the PJS, and wall thickness calculations, thickness is expressed as defined below. Trailing zeroes are not included. Decimal points are not included for numbers without decimals. .xxxx if the thickness is less than 1 inch x if the thickness is an even inch x.xxx if the thickness is 1 inch or larger  *Cyyy: The need to perform a thickness calculation is triggered by an entry with the format *Cyyy in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity. The letters that make up this code have the following meaning:  The character C ensures that the schedule/thickness for the applicable end of the component is determined by calculations using the thickness equation defined for the piping materials class in the Default Wall Thickness Equation attribute of the Piping Materials Class entity.  The characters yyy define the casting, joint or structural grade quality factor (E) times 100. This factor is one of the parameters used in the thickness calculation. If you are defining a calculation for a seamless fitting (E=1) but want to match the thickness for the mating welded pipe (E=0.85), the quality factor for the pipe should be used.  MATCH: The need to match the thickness of a component to that of the pipe of the same diameter and of option 1 is triggered by an entry with the format MATCH in the Schedule/Thickness attribute of the Commodity Item entity.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

225

Table Formats and Naming Conventions To minimize duplication when the same thickness can be expressed for metallic materials in terms of either a generic or a specific schedule, the following convention is used. For a given nominal diameter, only the schedules shown in the line for that diameter are used in the PJS and in the data tables.

Weight Tables Weight tables are required for the following thicknesses:

226

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Table Formats and Naming Conventions 



For components made from pipe material:  If the thickness involved is covered by a schedule, tables are required for all commercially available schedules to the full range of their nominal diameter.  If the thickness involved is not covered by a schedule, tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches (inclusive), and from 22 inches to the full range of their nominal diameter. For components made from plate material, tables are required in 1/16 inch increments from 0.25 to 1.25 inches and in 1 inch increments from 12 to 144 inches.

Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used to describe the table name formats in this document. (G)

Green

(R)

Red

BrchTbl

Branch Table

Cmdty Code

Commodity Code

GCP

Green Connect Point

GS

Geometric Industry Standard (from CL575)

MC

Model Code

Op

Operator/actuator type (from CL550)

Rat

Pressure Rating

RCP

Red Connect Point

Sc/Th

Schedule/Thickness

Term

End Preparation (from CL330)

TNF

Table Name Format

TS

Table Suffix (from CL576 and CL577)

Type

Termination type (BLT, FEM, or MAL)

WC Weight Code (from CL578) Refer to Variables for Generic Tables (on page 232) and Variables for Specific Tables (on page 247) for a description of the variables used in table definitions. Generally, values appearing in all uppercase characters (such as BLT or STUD) indicate a hard-coded value.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

227

Table Formats and Naming Conventions

Table Requirements This section indicates which tables are required to place a particular type of component (such as a valve or fitting). The table groups listed in this section are used to store data required for interactive processing of piping and instrument components. The applicability of the various table groups is defined as a function of the termination types of the components as defined in the Piping Job Specification (PJS). Refer to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailed description of the requirements for specific commodity items, instruments, and miscellaneous piping and instrument items. Typically, the tables in the table combinations are used to store:  The surface area and weight of water for the component.  The dimensional parameters for the component.  The empty weight of the component and/or data about valve operators. Tables Required for Piping Components (on page 228) Tables Required for Instrument Components (on page 231)

Tables Required for Piping Components Valves (6Q1C) (on page 229) Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C, and 6Q3C) (on page 230) Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C) (on page 231) Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) (on page 231)

228

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Table Formats and Naming Conventions

Valves (6Q1C) Termination Types Bolted(G) Male(G) Female(G) Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0.000000 [1] Piping Segment Data [1] line_number_label - Character (40) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2 **************** Label Name = Piping Component No Graphics Color = 4 Graphics Weight = 1 Graphics Style = 0 Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 20 Text Space = 0.300000 Number Line = 1 Text Font = 0 Enclosure Option = 9 Cell Enclosure Name = Leader Line = 1 Line Terminator Char = > Text Font = 125 Under Line = 0.000000 [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 200 ****************

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

363

Label Description Library Label Name = No Label Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.000000 **************** Label Type = 201 **************** Label Name = Rectangle Enclosure Text Color = 4 Text Weight = 1 Label Category = 0 Char Size = 0 Max Length = 10 Text Space = 0.250000 Number Line = 2 Text Font = 0 Under Line = 0.000000 Attribute Data *************************************** **************** Label Type = 300 **************** Label Name = Piping Component ID [1] / [3] Connect Point Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name - Character (6) 2 - ' / ' [3] model_code - Character (6) 4 - 5 space(s) 5 - 'Connect Point ' *************************************** **************** Label Type = 301 **************** Label Name = Piping Comp Center [1] / [3] Component Center Piping Component Data [1] commodity_name - Character (6) 2 - ' / ' [3] model_code - Character (6) 4 - 5 space(s) 5 - 'Component Center' *************************************** **************** Label Type = 353 **************** Label Name = Dgn Rvw Weld Label Weld Number: [2] - [4] Weld Type: [6] Piping NPD/OD: [8] - [10] PMC: [12] Weld Attributes

364

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Label Description Library 1 - 'Weld Number: ' [2] weld_id - Character (16) 3 - ' - ' [4] weld_no_A - Character (8) 5 - 'Weld Type: ' [6] weld_type_A - Character (20) 7 - 'Piping NPD/OD: ' [8] nom_pipe_diam_A - Character (20) 9 - ' - ' [10] outside_diam_A - Real (15.4) 11 - 'PMC: ' [12] piping_mater_class - Character (16) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 400 **************** Label Name = Comp cmdty code [1] Piping Component Data [1] commodity_code - Character (16) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 401 **************** Label Name = Pipe sch/thk 1 [1] Piping/Tubing Data [1] schedule_thickness - Character (8) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 404 **************** Label Name = 1/2CP COMP GCP [1] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 405 **************** Label Name = 2CP RED COMP GCP X RCP [1] X [3] Piping Component Data [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 'X' [3] CP_2_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 408 **************** Label Name = 3CP RED COMP GCP x RCP [1] CP_1_NOM_PIPE_DIAM 2 'X' [3] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 410 **************** Label Name = 3CP COMP RCP [1] CP_3_NOM_PIPE_DIAM *************************************** **************** Label Type = 950 **************** Label Name = MAL nozzle descr [1] [3] Nozzle Data

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

365

Label Description Library [1] nominal_piping_dia - Character (9) 2 - 1 space(s) [3] preparation - Character (8) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 951 **************** Label Name = Iso continuation [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code - Character (3) [2] line_sequence_no - Character (16) 3 - '-' [4] fluid_code - Character (5) [5] design_area_number - Character (12) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 1150 **************** Label Name = Line ID [1][2]-[4] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code - Character (3) [2] line_sequence_no - Character (16) 3 - '-' [4] fluid_code - Character (5) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 1151 **************** Label Name = Iso no [1][2]-[4][5] Piping Segment Data [1] unit_code - Character (3) [2] line_sequence_no - Character (16) 3 - '-' [4] fluid_code - Character (5) [5] design_area_number - Character (12) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2200 **************** Label Name = Specialty 2cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20) *************************************** **************** Label Type = 2201 **************** Label Name = Specialty 3cp (1st) [1] Piping Component Data [1] piping_comp_no - Character (20) ***************************************

Label Library Merger The Label Library Merger utility allows PDS users to copy labels from one or two label description libraries into another library and to modify the destination library as necessary. You can only add and remove labels with this command. To edit an existing label or create a new label definition, use the Label Description Library Manager command.

366

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Label Description Library Features     

Copy labels from one library to another. Delete an existing label from the destination library. Rename an existing label in the destination library. Compress the destination library. Validate the destination library.

Label Library Merger Interface This section contains descriptions of the Label Library Merger interface, including information on all dialog boxes and commands. The Label Library Merger commands are available from the toolbar and from menus.

The Label Library Merger dialog box contains three label description library views. The two views on the left display the contents of the source libraries, and the view on the right displays the contents of the destination library. Each library view is divided into two columns, Number and Description, which display the appropriate data for each label. You can click a heading in any library view to sort the labels by that heading. The bottom pane of the Label Library Merger dialog box is the message window, which displays errors and other informational messages during the library merge workflow.

File Menu The commands on the File menu allow you to open libraries, display information in the Message Window, and exit the Label Library Merger.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

367

Label Description Library Open Source Label Library 1 This command opens a label description library from which to copy labels. You can key in or browse to the location of a source library. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 1 View.

Open Source Label Library 2 This command opens a second label description library from which to copy labels. Using a second source library is optional, and not required for the use of this command. The system displays the label number and description in the Library 2 View.

Open Destination Library This command opens a new or existing destination library, where labels from the source libraries are copied. The system displays the copied label numbers and descriptions in the Destination Library View. To create a new destination library, browse to the appropriate folder in the Open Destination Library dialog box, type a new library name in the File name text box, and click Open. The system will then create the new label description library in the specified location.

Information This command displays information in the Message Window regarding the source and destination libraries.

Example MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\labels.l Opened as Source Label Library 1 MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\company_labels.l Opened as Source Label Library 2 MESSAGE: D:\WIN32APP\INGR\PDSHELL\lib\all_labels.l Opened as Destination Label Library

Exit This command closes the Label Library Merger utility.

Edit Menu The commands on the Edit menu allow you to modify your selections in the various views on the Label Library Merger dialog box, modify and delete the label information in the destination library, and check the destination library for errors.

Select All This command selects all the labels in the active view.

368

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Label Description Library Unselect All This command resets selections so that no labels in the active view are selected.

Invert Selection This command switches the selection status of the labels in the active view, so that labels that are currently selected become unselected, and labels that are currently not selected become selected.

Edit Label Number This command allows users to modify the label number of the selected label in the Destination Library View.

Edit Label Description This command allows users to modify the label description of the selected label in the Destination Library View.

Delete This command removes the selected labels from the destination library.

Validate This command checks the labels in the destination library for valid label numbers, and reports any invalid label numbers in the Message Window.

Compress Destination Library This command removes the deleted labels from the destination library.

Copy to Destination This command copies the selected labels from the source libraries to the destination library. The system uses the following criteria to determine label numbers:  If there is no label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied, the label is copied with its original label number.  If there is a label in the destination library with the same label number as the label being copied, the label is copied with a new label number, which is assigned using the following criteria:  If there is an unassigned label number in the copied label's category in the destination library, the system assigns the next available label number in that category.  If there is no unassigned label number in the copied label's category in the destination library, the system adds 5000 to the label number and copies the label. For example, label number 23 in the source library is copied to label 5023 in the destination library. Label numbers above 5000 generate errors in PDS. The Validate command reports any such label numbers in the Message Window. Refer to Label Description Library (on page 343) for more information on label categories.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

369

Label Description Library Clear Error Messages This command refreshes the Message Window.

Help Menu The commands on the Help menu display online Help and other information about the Label Library Merger utility.

Contents This command displays the Label Library Merger online Help file.

About Library Merger This command displays the About dialog box with information about the Label Library Merger utility, including the version number and copyright date.

Label Library Merge Workflow This section describes the general workflow for the Label Library Merger utility. 1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PDS Label Library Merger to start the Label Library Merger utility.

The Label Library Merger interface displays.

370

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Label Description Library

2. Click File > Open Source Label Library 1. 3. Browse to the location of the first label description library, select the library, and click Open.

The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 1 View. 4. Repeat the previous two steps for the second label description library.

The system displays the contents of the library in the Library 2 View. 5. Click File > Open Destination Library. You can either open an existing library for update or create a new library.

The system displays the contents of the destination library in the Destination Library View. 6. Select labels in the existing label description libraries to copy to the destination library. Use CTRL+click to select multiple labels, or SHIFT+click to select a range of labels. Use the selection commands on the Edit menu to select all labels, unselect all labels, or invert your selections. 7. Click Edit > Copy to Destination to copy the selected labels to the destination library.

The system displays the copied labels in the Destination Library View. 8. Click Edit > Edit Label Number or Edit > Edit Label Description to modify labels in the destination library as necessary. 9. Click Edit > Validate to check the destination library for errors.

The system displays any warnings in the Message View. 10. Click Edit > Compress Destination Library to compress the destination library.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

371

Label Description Library The system displays any warnings in the Message View.

11. When you are finished modifying the destination library, click File > Exit to exit the Label Library Merger utility.

372

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 15

Piping Assembly Library The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components. The PAL definition is compiled and stored in Piping Assembly Language object library and its text stored in the text library. A Piping Assembly Library which contain the definitions for basic assemblies (macros) is included in the product delivery. \win32app\ingr\pdshell\lib\assembly.l The PAL definition must be processed and stored in the Piping Assembly Library.

See Also Piping Assembly Language (on page 373) Piping Assembly Library Manager (on page 386)

Piping Assembly Language The Piping Assembly Language provides a set of functions to define the placement operation. You can create a PAL definition outside the PDS environment using a text editor.

PAL Keywords The following list outlines all the keywords that can be used to create a PAL definition. Keywords followed by a number in (parentheses) such as NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223) are used to create form gadgets for defining and placing piping assemblies. The number represents the application command number for the keyword. The key entry field number is this number minus 3000. (Therefore, the key entry field number for NPD_A is 221.)

Formbuilder Guidelines You can customize forms for the purpose of inputting data in the creation of a piping assembly, such as a control station. You can use the gadget numbers for the corresponding input fields. You must adhere to the following conventions when customizing form input fields for the applicable piping assembly. If not documented, any other gadgets on the form should remain consistent with those delivered by Intergraph.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

373

Piping Assembly Library All input fields should be sequenced and must have the following characteristics. The Edit Field Options setting in the Form Builder should be Change Mode.

The characteristics form in the Form Builder should have the following settings. Notify Upon Completion - off (NOT the default) Notify at Initial Selection - off The forms delivered by Intergraph can be used as examples for customization. The following list the form builder data for the standard form gadgets. Help

key:

456

gadget number:

995

button:

automatic

Form Size key:

403

gadget number:

997

button:

automatic

Exit

374

key:

4001

gadget number:

998

button:

manual

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library Accept

key:

4002

gadget number:

999

button:

manual

Message Area A - for messages gadget number:

251

characters:

40

lines deep:

3

edit mode:

review only

font size:

12

Message Area B - for active segment data display gadget number:

254

characters:

40

lines deep:

3

edit mode:

review only

font size:

12

Material description display gadget number:

150

characters:

80

lines deep:

3

edit mode:

review only

font size:

12

Description # This keyword is used to specify a description for the piping assembly from within the assembly language file. Place a # in the first column of any line followed by a description of as many as 100 characters. Examples: # Control Station

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

375

Piping Assembly Library Commands COMMAND This keyword is used with other keywords to initiate a defined action. Examples: COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA COMMAND = UPDATE_APP COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE CONNECT This keyword defines the active point for the next component placed in the PAL definition. The specified reference point must be defined before using this option. Example: CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE This keyword defines the type of item to be placed. Refer to the PLACE Command Component keywords for a list of component/instrument types. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY This keyword is used with the PLACE keyword to set the placement mode to be used in placing the specified component. Refer to the Connect Point keywords for a list of viable placement modes. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 STEM This keyword is used with an orientation keyword to define the direction of the secondary axis. It can be used at the end of a PLACE statement. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 , STEM = UP

PLACE Command Components FITTING, VALVE, FLANGE, BRANCH, PIPE, SPECIALTY, INSTRUMENT, OPTIONAL, TAP These keywords are used with the PLACE keyword to define the type of item to be placed. Example: PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1 PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01, BY CP2 RDB_INSTRUMENT, RDB_SPECIALTY These keywords are used to place instruments and specialty items that have been defined in the PJS using the tag number. Example: PLACE RDB_INSTRUMENT, INSVLV1, BY CP1

Connect Point CENTER, CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5 ACTIVE_PP FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP1, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP2, FACE_OF_FLANGE_CP3 These keywords identify the connect point for an operation. They can be used with the BY keyword to indicate the means of placement. Example: PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C38, BY CP1

376

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library INLET_ELEVATION This keyword sets the starting elevation or point of connection. Example: REF_PNT_A = ACTIVE_PP COORDINATE_1 = INLET_ELEVATION

Orientation ACTIVE EAST, NORTH, UP WEST, SOUTH, DOWN These keywords identify the orientation direction. Example: PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C01, BY CP1, STEM = UP

No Material TakeOff NO_MTO=1 This keyword can be used immediately before a PLACE statement to specify that the component is not reportable. The system automatically resets MTO processing after placement.

Assembly End Keywords ASSEMBLY_END_A, ASSEMBLY_END_B These keywords define an assembly end point as a specified coordinate value. An assembly end definition is used to define the endpoints of an assembly. This is required when the assembly is being placed into a pipe so that the pipe is broken properly and the assembly inserted (as in the case of a valve assembly: flange - valve - flange). Example: ASSEMBLY_END_A = CP2

Reference Point Keywords REF_PNT_A, REF_PNT_B, ... REF_PNT_T ACTIVE_PP, NOZZLE These keywords set reference points at specified coordinate values. You can define up to 20 points on the assembly for future reference in the PAL definition. Example: REF_PNT_A = CP_1 Once a reference point is defined, it can be used by a following statement in the PAL definition to indicate a coordinate location (for example, CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A).

Generic End Types NULL_GEN_TYPE, BOLTED, FEMALE, MALE These keywords specify the generic termination type for use in conditional testing.

Number of Connect Points NUMBER_CPS This keyword contains the number of connect points of the component just placed. It can be used in branch placement to determine whether to use CP2 or CP3 as a reference point. Example: IF (NUMBER_CPS .EQ. 2.0) THEN REF_PNT_A = CP2

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

377

Piping Assembly Library ELSE REF_PNT_A = CP3 ENDIF

Commodity Item Name ITEM_NAME This keyword defines an item name to be used for placement. Example: ITEM_NAME = xxxxxxx COMPONENT_TAG (3246) This keyword defines the tag for the component to be placed. You can prompt for the tag or use the tutorial interface using the designated field and command numbers. Example: COMPONENT_TAG = USER_INPUT

UORs per Model Subunit UORS_PER_SUBUNIT This keyword defines the number of UORs per Subunit defined in the model. It can be used to calculate tap location.

Local Coordinates and Orientation APP_X, APP_Y, APP_Z These keywords define the active placement point which can be used in the connect to segment and point in space routines. These keywords are initially set to the active placement point of the assembly at the start of the assembly placement. COORDINATE_1 (3191) ... COORDINATE_12 (3203) DIMENSION_1 - DIMENSION_20 These keywords are used to receive user input from the tutorial to define the active placement point. The Coordinate keywords identify actual points and the Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets. The Coordinate keywords are only used for elevation values, not Easting or Northing values. Example: APP_Z = COORDINATE_1 COORDINATE_2 = INLET_ELEVATION LOCAL_X, LOCAL_Y, LOCAL_Z These keywords are defined as the active primary, secondary, and normal axis at the time the assembly is placed. They are automatically set internally at the start of placement and cannot be modified.

Dimension Definition DIMENSION_1 (3141), DIMENSION_2 (3142), ... DIMENSION_20 (3160) The Dimension keywords identify distances and offsets.

Move Specified Distance MOVE_DISTANCE This keyword moves a specified distance in the direction of the active primary. It is useful in placing a variable length pipe by moving out a specified distanced and calling place pipe. Example: MOVE_DISTANCE = DIMENSION_1 PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_A

378

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library Load Spec Data LOAD_SPEC_DATA This keyword reads the spec record for the commodity item and assigns values for the following keywords: TERM_TYPE_1, TERM_TYPE_2, ... TERM_TYPE_5 PR_RATING_1, PR_RATING_2, ... PR_RATING_5 GEN_TYPE_1, GEN_TYPE_2, ... GEN_TYPE_5 Example: LOAD_SPEC_DATA = '6Q1C80' IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF

Setting First and Second Size FIRST_SIZE, SECOND_SIZE, NPD_STEP_UP, NPD_STEP_DOWN These keywords set the active first size or second size placement parameter a step down/up in the NPD piping material class table. (The system uses the next entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step up or next higher size and uses the previous entry in the NPD table from the active size as the first/second size for a step down or lower size). This particular statement in PAL is used as the active size (first or second) in the placement of all the following components, until the active size is redefined. If you do not include a line size in the PAL definition, the active size at the time of placement of the piping assembly will be used. Example: FIRST_SIZE = NPD_STEP_DOWN

Coordinates of Component Just Placed COMPONENT_CENTER, CP_1_LOCATION, CP_2_LOCATION COMPONENT_CENTER_X, _Y, _Z CP_1_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z CP_2_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z These keywords define coordinate values for the component just placed. Example: TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y + DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT

Outside Diameter PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the pipe outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location. Example: DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 - PIPE_OD_CP2 ) / 4.0 FLANGE_OD_CP1, FLANGE_OD_CP2 These keywords contain the flange outside diameter at each connect point for the component just placed. These values can be used to calculate a tap location.

Tutorial Display and Acquisition DISPLAY_TUTORIAL, DISPLAY, DISPLAY_NUMERIC DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = 'PALCST'

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

379

Piping Assembly Library PROMPT_MESSAGE = 'Keyin coordinates and valve data' DISPLAY = prompt_message used to display any ascii keyword. DISPLAY_NUMERIC = npd_a used to display any numeric keyword. COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA used to get data from the user at placement via a tutorial. GET_ASCII, GET_DECIMAL, GET_INTEGER These keywords get data of a specified type from a user keyin.

Prompt for ASCII Input USER_INPUT

Updating Active Place Point Example:

COMMAND = UPDATE_APP

The variables APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are assigned the X, Y, and Z values of the current active placement point. This command is useful for variable distance changes in assemblies, and you need to know the new coordinates.

Point in Space Example:

COMMAND = POINT_IN_SPACE

The values of the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are used to define the active placement point that is not connected to piping or a piping segment. These keywords need to be set before POINT_IN_SPACE is called.

Connect to Piping Segment Example:

CONNECT TO APP

The command syntax is the same as for connecting to a reference point except that the keywords APP_X, APP_Y, and APP_Z are used as the coordinates. These points are assumed to lie on a piping segment whereas a reference point identifies a connect point. The keywords should be set before this command is called.

Orientation of Primary and Secondary ORIENTATION, PROMPT, ORIENT_SECONDARY, ORIENT_PRIMARY, INVERT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_X This statement orients the primary axis to be the same as the primary at the beginning of the assembly placement. ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_Y This statement orients the secondary to be the same as the secondary at placement. ORIENT_SECONDARY = INVERT This statement allows the secondary to be inverted from its current position. You can also use INVERT for the primary axis.

Placement of BRANCH using Table Lookup 90_DEG, 45_DEG, VARIABLE Example:

380

PLACE BRANCH, 90_DEG , BY CENTER

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library This statement performs a table lookup on the 90 degree branch table to determine the branch component type given the current first and second size. If the branch is on a piping segment or in free space, then Placement BY CENTER should be used. If you are placing fitting to fitting, you should specify connect point placement (BY CP1).

Placement of OPTION flange OPTION_RATING, OPTION_END_PREP Example: IF ( END_PREP_A .GE. 2.0 .and. END_PREP_A .LE. 199) THEN OPTION_RATING = RATING_A OPTION_END_PREP = END_PREP_A PLACE OPTIONAL, 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF The keywords OPTION_RATING and OPTION_END_PREP values are used to determine which option to use for the specified flange. OPTION_TBL_SUFFIX TBL_SUFFIX_GREEN, TBL_SUFFIX_RED END_PREP_1, END_PREP_2, ... END_PREP_5 TBL_SUFFIX_A (301), TBL_SUFFIX_B (302), ... TBL_SUFFIX_E (305) These keywords provide the ability to select the correct optional flange, when the flange is being placed by its welded end.

Placement of Optional Components OPTION_CODE Examples: OPTION_CODE = PROMPT OPTION_CODE = 790 This keyword sets the option code for the next component placed. If the PROMPT keyword is used, the system activates the Option Code Selection tutorial at placement to enable the user to select the option code. Otherwise, the option code is hard-coded.

Placement of Variable Length Pipe Example:

PLACE PIPE TO REF_PNT_E

Logical Marks CHECK_MARK CHECK_MARK_1 (3161), CHECK_MARK_2 (3163), ... CHECK_MARK_20 (3180) The check marks are logical keywords that can be accessed through the tutorial. They can be used for testing for placement of components, etc. Initially, they are all set to true.

Changing Piping Materials Class within an Assembly ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS (3205) MATERIALS_CLASS_A (3206), MATERIALS_CLASS_B (3207), MATERIALS_CLASS_C (3208) MATERIALS_CLASS_D (3264), MATERIALS_CLASS_E (3265), ... MATERIALS_CLASS_J (3270) Example:

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

381

Piping Assembly Library MATERIALS_CLASS_B = USER_INPUT ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS = MATERIALS_CLASS_B The values for materials class can be:  obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields  defined by prompt (USER_INPUT)  hard-coded in the PAL definition. The values for MATERIALS_CLASS_A through _J are stored locally until a statement with ACTIVE_MATERIALS_CLASS is executed. At that time, the Materials Class in the active data is updated to the assigned value. This enables you to obtain up to three different classes from the tutorial at the start which can be used as needed in the definition.

Component Attributes NPD_A (3221), NPD_B (3222), NPD_C (3223) NPD_D (3284), NPD_E (3285), ... NPD_J (3290) These keywords store nominal piping diameter values. END_PREP_A (3231), END_PREP_B (3232) These keywords store end preparation values. RATING_A (3236), RATING_B (3237) These keywords store pressure rating values. SCHEDULE_A (3241), SCHEDULE_B (3242) These keywords store schedule/thickness values.

Setting Bend Angle ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE (3211) BEND_ANGLE_A (3212), BEND_ANGLE_B (3213), ... BEND_ANGLE_E (3216) Example: BEND_ANGLE_A = PROMPT ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE = BEND_ANGLE_B The values for bend angle can be:  obtained from the tutorial using the predefined fields  defined by prompt  hard-coded in the PAL definition The active bend angle in the model is not set until a statement with ACTIVE_BEND_ANGLE is executed. At that time, the active bend angle is assigned the appropriate value and the next component placed uses that value. The active bend angle is set to 0 after placement.

Component Group COMPONENT_GROUP, ON, OFF Example:

COMPONENT_GROUP = ON

This statement causes the system to search for the next available component group number. This number is assigned to the component group number attribute of each subsequent component placed until the statement COMPONENT_GROUP = OFF is executed or the assembly is completed.

382

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library Local Variables You can use local variables to store values for use in defining a piping assembly. You can use any alphanumeric string as long as it is not reserved as a keyword.

Test Attribute Values T12C# - Piping Segment Data T34C# - Piping Component Data T50C# - Pipe Data T67C# - Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to test specific values of the active segment data or active component data, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. The active component data is represented by the last component placed or the component to which the user is connected.

Pre-Define Attribute Values T34C# - Piping Component Data T50C# - Pipe Data T67C# - Instrument Component Data You can use these keywords to pre-define specific values for the component to be placed, where # refers to the column (attribute) number for the applicable database table. This functionality is similar to the Pre-Define Component Data option of the Place Component command. If you pre-define a value for fabrication category, the component will be designated as having the fabrication category defined by user versus by system such that reconstructing the component will not override the user value with the value in the Reference Database. Having the ability to pre-define the fabrication category within a control station piping assembly will enable you to automatically override the RDB specification of the fabrication category of a single field component, such as a small diameter control valve, in what would otherwise be a shop spool. See Placing Taps in Assemblies (on page 383) for additional information on PAL keywords.

Placing Taps in Assemblies The syntax for placing taps in assemblies is outlined below: PLACE TAP , 2.0 , 1 where 2.0 is the tap NPD and 1 is the option code. PLACE TAP BY CPn CPn designates the connect point from which to obtain the tap data. The following PAL definitions should be used to specify the tap location before making the PLACE TAP request. TAP_LOCATION = COMPONENT_CENTER CP_1_LOCATION CP_2_LOCATION COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP1 COMPUTE_FOR_ELBOLET_USING_CP2 — OR — TAP_LOCATION_X = COMPONENT_CENTER_X +- delta_distance CP_1_LOCATION_X +- delta_distance CP_2_LOCATION_X +- delta_distance TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y +- delta_distance CP_1_LOCATION_Y +- delta_distance

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

383

Piping Assembly Library CP_2_LOCATION_Y +TAP_LOCATION_Z = COMPONENT_CENTER_Z CP_1_LOCATION_Z +CP_2_LOCATION_Z +-

delta_distance +- delta_distance delta_distance delta_distance

The keywords PIPE_OD_CP1, PIPE_OD_CP2, FLANGE_OD_CP1, and FLANGE_OD_CP2 can be used to calculate the delta distance. These values are based on the component just placed in the assembly. For TAP_LOCATION_X, _Y, _Z, the X, Y, and Z represent a local coordinate system that is analogous to the orientation at Connect point 1 of the component flipped to point towards the inside of the component. The tap orientation should also be set before making the PLACE TAP request using the PAL orientation commands. The active orientation at time of placement (tap) is used.

Sample Piping Assembly Files This section presents sample PAL files from the delivered Piping Assembly Library. It lists the files and shows the resulting graphics created by the file. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on placing piping assemblies with the Place Component command.

DRAIN # Drain assembly PAL 'DRAIN' ! ! This assembly will place a drain. The user needs to place a 1" ! sockolet at the point the drain is desired. ! PLACE FITTING, 6Q3C88 , BY CP1 ! ! The data from the component spec is read into the keywords. ! TERM_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the numeric value for end preparation (eg. 21) ! PR_RATING_1 TO 5 gets the pressure rating ! GEN_TYPE_1 TO 5 gets the textual value for end preparation (eg. MALE) ! LOAD_SPEC_DATA = '6Q1C76' ! ! This 'IF' statement determines if an optional flange is needed before ! the gate valve is placed. ! IF ( GEN_TYPE_1 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_1 OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_1 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 ENDIF ! ! Places a gate valve. Notice in the spec that this type of gate valve ! is different than a 6Q2C01. ! PLACE VALVE, 6Q1C76 , BY CP1 IF ( GEN_TYPE_2 .EQ. BOLTED ) THEN OPTION_RATING = PR_RATING_2

384

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library OPTION_END_PREP = TERM_TYPE_2 PLACE OPTIONAL , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 ENDIF ! ! This command allows the user to pick which component to place. If the ! option command is not used the s/w will choose option 1. In this instance, ! without the OPTION_CODE command will cause an error because there are no ! option 1 attributes available for 6Q2C16. Another possiblilty would be to ! use OPTION_CODE = PROMPT. The user will be prompted for which component is ! desired. ! OPTION_CODE = 163 PLACE FITTING, 6Q2C16 , BY CP1 END

Graphics Placed by Drain Assembly

Pump Discharge Assembly # Pump Discharge PAL 'PDISC1' ! ! Pump Discharge ! ! DISPLAY_TUTORIAL = 'PAS010' NPD_A = FIRST_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_A NPD_B = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_B PROMPT_MESSAGE = 'Enter Reducer First Size ' DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 FIRST_SIZE = NPD_A DELTA_DISTANCE = ( PIPE_OD_CP1 * 0.5 - PIPE_OD_CP2 * 0.5) / 2.0 PLACE FITTING , 6Q2C23 , BY CP2

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

385

Piping Assembly Library TAP_LOCATION_Y = COMPONENT_CENTER_Y - DELTA_DISTANCE * UORS_PER_SUBUNIT ORIENT_PRIMARY = LOCAL_Y ORIENT_SECONDARY = LOCAL_X PLACE TAP BY CP1 REF_PNT_A = CP1 REF_PNT_B = CP3 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_B NPD_C = SECOND_SIZE DISPLAY_NUMERIC = NPD_C PROMPT_MESSAGE = 'Enter Branch Size DISPLAY = PROMPT_MESSAGE COMMAND = GET_TUTORIAL_DATA SECOND_SIZE = NPD_C PLACE BRANCH , 90_DEG , BY CP1 OPTION_CODE = PROMPT PLACE FITTING , 6Q3C88 , BY CP1 ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C80 , BY CP1 CONNECT TO REF_PNT_A PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP2 PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C38 , BY CP1 ORIENTATION = PROMPT PLACE VALVE , 6Q1C01 , BY CP1 PLACE FLANGE , 6Q2C01 , BY CP1 END

'

Graphics Placed by Pump Discharge Assembly

Piping Assembly Library Manager The Piping Assembly Library Manager enables you to create a new (empty) piping assembly library or create, revise, and delete piping assembly definitions in an existing library. The Piping Assembly Language (PAL) enables you to define the parameters necessary to place a piping assembly (group of components) automatically in the model. This function is most useful for a commonly placed group of components.

386

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library Refer to Piping Assembly Library (on page 373) for more information on this library, and refer to Piping Assembly Language (on page 373) for more information on the PAL files.

Before Using This Command  

Define the location of the approved and unapproved (if applicable) Assembly Library files in the Reference Database Management Data. You must have write access to the specified file and directory path.

Options    

     

Create Library (on page 388) — used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. Compress (on page 388) — used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Unapproved ==> Approved (on page 388) — used to copy the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library. Create/Interactive Data (see "Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data" on page 388) — used to compile Piping Assembly Language source files and insert them in the Piping Assembly Library. Create/Batch Data (see "Create/Batch Assembly Data" on page 389) — used to compile Piping Assembly Language Source files via batch processing. Revise Data (see "Revise Piping Assembly Data" on page 389) — used to select an PAL module from the library, edit the file, and put the revised file back into the library. Delete Data (see "Delete Piping Assembly Data" on page 391) — used to remove an PAL module from the library. Report Data (see "Report Assembly Data" on page 392) — used to create a report of the library contents. List Data (see "List Assembly Data" on page 393) — used to display the Eden modules in the library. Extract Data (see "Extract Assembly Data" on page 394) — used to extract an Eden module from the library for editing or printing.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

387

Piping Assembly Library 

Full List / Sub-string — You can set the toggle at the bottom of the form to determine the assembly data tables to be listed.  Full List lists all the assembly definitions in the Assembly Library.  Sub-string limits the list to those files which contain a specified substring.

Create Library This option is used to create a new Piping Assembly Library. It automatically creates the object library (.l) and the text library (.l.t) for the library that is being created. The system displays the approved and unapproved Piping Assembly Library names as defined in the RDB Management Data.

Accept to Create or Exit to Avoid Creating New Library Select Accept to create the specified library files. If you specify an existing library file, the system displays an error indicating the library already exists.

Compress This option is used to compress the Piping Assembly library. Any tables which have been deleted from the library will be removed.

Unapproved ==> Approved This option copies the unapproved Piping Assembly library to the approved library.

Accept to Copy or Exit to Avoid Copying Select Accept to copy the unapproved library file to the approved library.

Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. You can process a single file or specify a list of files to be created. Refer to the description of the Piping Assembly Library (on page 373) for more information on Piping Assembly Language modules.

Before Using This Command  

To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Create/Interactive option.

2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file.

388

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library 3. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library.

The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. You can use the default options or override the values for this operation. 4. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the file to begin processing.

Create/Batch Assembly Data This option enables you to compile PAL source code into object code and insert the specified files into the Piping Assembly library. The specified files are submitted to the batch queue PDreference for processing.

Before Using This Command  

To add more than one PAL file to the library, create a list file which identifies the names of the source files to be added. The list file should contain one entry (source file name) per line. Set Assembly Path and Assembly Node in the RDB Management Data to the location of the assembly source files.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Create/Batch option.

2. Set the toggle to Single to process a single source file or to List to process a list file. 3. Specify Filename for Processing Key in the name of the PAL file or list file to be compiled and added to the active library and select Accept.

The system displays the default node name and path for the location of the PAL files at the bottom of the form. You can use the default values or override the values for this operation. 4. Accept to Submit or Specify Submit Time Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or Delayed Submit. For Delayed Submit, set the time and day to process the files. 5. Accept the file to begin processing.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreference.

Revise Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to select a PAL module from the library, edit the file, and then compile the file and put it back in the library.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

389

Piping Assembly Library Before Using This Command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Revise option.

The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

2. Select Assembly for Revision Select the PAL modules to be revised and select Accept.

The system extracts the specified file from the library and activates the text editor (specified for PD_EDITOR in the control.sh file) to enable you to modify the file.

390

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library

3. Make any changes to the displayed file.

When you exit the text editor, the system compiles the revised file and inserts it back into the library. (If you quit the text editor, the file is not recompiled.) If an error occurs in revising a piping assembly, the system invokes the editor automatically to give you an opportunity to correct the problem. 4. You can select other files to edit or select exit to return to the data management form.

Delete Piping Assembly Data This option enables you to delete a PAL module or set of PAL modules from the Piping Assembly Library.

Before Using This Command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Delete option.

The system displays the table files in the active library.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

391

Piping Assembly Library

2. Select Module for Deletion Select the modules to be deleted from the list of modules. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. 3. Accept or Select Other Option Accept the modules and begin processing.

The system deletes the modules from the Piping Assembly Library.

Report Assembly Data This option enables you to create a list file of all the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Report option from the Data Management form.

2. Revise Report Parameters Key in the file information for the location of the report file to be created. 3. Select Print or Print/Save.

392

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Piping Assembly Library Then select the print queue from the list of displayed queues. Refer to the section on Plot and Print Queues in the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on setting up multiple print queues. If you select the Print/Save option, the system will create a file named assemblies in the default source file location. 4. Accept to Form Report Select Accept to create the specified report file.

List Assembly Data This option displays all the PAL modules for the Piping Assembly Library.

Before Using This Command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL modules to be listed.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the List option.

The system displays the PAL modules in the Piping Assembly Library.

2. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files. 3. Select Cancel to exit the form.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

393

Piping Assembly Library

Extract Assembly Data This option enables you to extract an PAL module out of the Piping Assembly Library for editing or printing.

Before Using This Command Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-string to determine the PAL files to be listed. Define the node name and path for the location of the PAL files in the Default Project Control Data or using the fields at the bottom of the Assembly Data Management form.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Extract from the Data Management form.

2. Select Assembly for Extraction Select the modules from the list of files and select Accept. You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the available files.

The system pulls the files out of the library and places them in the default directory specified in the Project Control Data. The system also writes the names of the extracted files to a file named PD_pal_list. If the list file is less than 24 hours old, the system appends the entries to the file; otherwise, it overwrites the file.

394

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

SECTION 16

Reference Database Revision Manager This command creates a set of reports used to coordinate revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. Each of the four reports listed is created in the directory for the applicable model. Creation of any of these reports also generates a summary report. The summary report is created and named according to user-specified information provided on the Reference Database Revision Manager form. Selecting the option to print the summary report will also force the printing of the individual report that initiated the creation of the summary report.

Reference Data Conflict Report (on page 397) - Creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. The RDB Conflict Report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the model directory as .rpt. Refer to the section titled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. You should run this report when segment data or RDB data (such as in the Piping Job Specification Database, the Piping Job Spec Tables, and the Physical Dimension Tables) have been changed and you want to determine which components need to be reconstructed or updated from the RDB. Table Change Report (on page 401) - Creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

395

Reference Database Revision Manager tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The Table Change Report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as .tcr. If your project was created with PDS version 6.0, use the Reference Data Conflict Report instead. Reference Data Impact Report (on page 407) - Creates a report, based on user-defined search criteria, of the effects of modifying individual component attributes in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as .imp. Proposed RDB Changes Report (on page 410) - Creates a single report assessing the effect of multiple changes in the unapproved Material Reference Database. The Proposed RDB Changes Report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as .pcs. This report does not update the model. Scheduled Reference Data Conflict Report - This is the same report as the Reference Data Conflict Report (on page 397) except that you can schedule the report to run on a regular basis using Batch Services.

Field Descriptions Report Node — Specifies the node on which the summary report will be created. Report Path — Specifies the directory in which the summary report will be created. Report Name — Specifies the name that will be used for the summary report file. Print/Delete — This option deletes the summary report after it is printed. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue. Print/Save — This option does not delete the summary report after it is printed. Selecting this option activates the queue pick list which allows you to select the appropriate print queue. Save — Saves the report in the model directory, and saves the summary report in the user-specified directory. This option does not print the summary report.

Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy The following chart summarizes some of the parameters used in the processing and creation of the reports available from this command:

Discrepancies are reported according to the significance of the problem they represent. In all cases, the most severe problem will be the problem that is reported. The hierarchy of the problems reported is as follows: 1. Item not found in the spec.

396

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager 2. Dimension tables have changed. 3. Discrepancy between component connect point NPD and segment NPD. 4. Discrepancy between model and RDB for any of the following attributes: end preparation - green

commodity code

pressure rating - green

model code

schedule/thickness - green

modifier

table suffix - green

geometric industry standard

end preparation

weight code

pressure rating - red

fabrication category

schedule/thickness - red

materials grade

table suffix - red 5. Weight tables have changed.

Reference Data Conflict Report This option creates a report of piping or instrument components (including piping and tubing) in any model within the project that have any specification data that is in conflict with the appropriate Piping Commodity Data, Piping Specialty Data, or Instrument Data of the Material Reference Database. The output file for this report has an extension of .rpt. This command is used to coordinate between revisions in the Reference Database and the implied changes which are required in the model. It also reports piping and instrument components that require reconstruction or recalculations as a result of piping segment data changes in the model.  The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has geometric type specification data revised.  The Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has non-geometric specification data (such as commodity code or weight table) revision.  The Re-Compute Thickness command is required for any component which has been reported as requiring calculations as a result of changes in the material tables or thickness tables. You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or an update of the specification data as a result of changes to the Material Reference Database. This command allows you to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or replacement as a result of RDB changes or deletions from the Material Reference Database. In support of this review capability, an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, is created in the same directory as the model with the name .rdb. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on this command. Any component, previously reported as having required reconstructing or updating, which has been deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB solely on the basis of the requirement to reconstruct flag being set for the piping segment associated with that component. The Reference Data Conflict Report will clear the requirement

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

397

Reference Database Revision Manager to reconstruct (or recalculate) flag if it determines there are no discrepancies for the component associated with that piping segment. The system will not report a component as requiring reconstruction or updating from the RDB as the result of changing any attributes of an Implied Item.

Before Using This Command You should not access any piping model for an interactive design session while a Reference Database Revision Management report is being created.

Processing Piping Commodities The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity. piping materials class

second size

commodity name

option code

first size maximum temperature The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself. If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. The data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green

* commodity code

* pressure rating - green

* model code

* schedule/thickness - green

* modifier

* table suffix - green

* geometric industry standard

* end preparation - red

weight code

* pressure rating - red

fabrication category

* schedule/thickness - red

materials grade

* table suffix - red Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report. The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. When a component is placed next to an integral gasket, the gasket thickness is set to zero in the model. As a result, the Reference Data Conflict Report may report a gasket thickness

398

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager error for such components. The report compares the component gasket thickness in the model (0) with the component gasket thickness defined in the reference data, which may be different from 0, without considering the mating component data. Such errors should be ignored. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum:  the application of the schedule/override in the model.  changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. 



Refer to the section titled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapter for information on the order of significance of reported problems. The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

Piping Specialties and Instruments The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties. The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments. The data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green

* physical data id

* pressure rating - green

* model code

* schedule/thickness - green

* modifier

* table suffix - green

* geometric industry standard

* end preparation - red

weight code

* pressure rating - red

fabrication category

* schedule/thickness - red

materials grade

* table suffix - red The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

399

Reference Database Revision Manager The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties. The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum:  the application of the schedule/override in the model.  changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. The RDB Conflict Report does not identify discrepancies between taps placed in the model and the RDB Tap Properties Data tables used to place the taps.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Reference Data Conflict Report option.

The system activates the Reference Data Conflict form.

2. Select the extent of the project to be processed.  Project — process all piping models for the entire project.  Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas.  Models — process the selected models within a selected design area.

400

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager 3. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. 4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. 5. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 6. Select Accept to submit the request for processing.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The Reference Data Conflict report file has an extension of .rpt and is created in the model directory as.rpt . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

Table Change Report This option creates a report of all piping or instrument components (including pipes) in any model within the project that are affected by a change to a specific table for a specific input or set of inputs. Both geometric changes as a result of revisions to dimension tables and changes in weight data as a result of revisions to weight tables are reported. The output file for this report has an extension of .tcr. This report should be used only in the following situation: The RBD was revised and you did not reconstruct the affected components. Then you upgraded the project to PDS version 6.0, at which time all components were updated to have the new last_placed_date attribute set to the date the upgrade occurred. You will need to know the date the RDB was modified in order to find which components require reconstruction as a result of the RDB change. This report may return false discrepancies because it will include those items that were placed after the RDB was changed. In short, we recommend using this report only when the RDB is changed prior to upgrading to PDS version 6.0, and affected components have not been reconstructed to reflect the RDB change. The Reconstruct Component command is required for any component which has a dimension table revised and the Update from Reference Database command is required for any component which has a weight table revised.

Processing The system performs a virtual component placement for each component in a piping model (in a manner similar to that used by the Table Checker) to determine if that component has had any of its geometric or weight data derived from the specified tables. The system searches all piping and instrument components in all piping models within the project for the use of such tables and creates a report. In searching the model for components that have dimensional and weight data derived from the list of revised tables, the first size and second size are determined from the component’s data - not the piping segment data. This is due to the fact that reconstruction of the component will be

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

401

Reference Database Revision Manager required, if the nominal piping diameter of any segment associated with the component differs from the corresponding connect point size. The contents of this report include the following data, which is sorted by the piping model number and the line id within each piping model. piping model number line id component number (if applicable) commodity name (if applicable) model code dimension or weight tables The title page for the report will include the sub-title, Table Change Report. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data have been defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). You can use the Review Reference Database Revision Management Report command to review any component in the model requiring reconstruction or updating as a result of the component’s geometric or weight data being changed by a table revision. In support of this review capability, the system creates an indexed file, the RDB Revision Management Component List, in the same directory as the model with the name .rdb. Refer to the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide for more information on the Review Reference Data Revision Report command. Any component, previously reported as needing reconstructing or updating, which has been deleted from the model, will not be included in any future reports or in the RDB Revision Management Component List. Likewise, the RDB Revision Management Component List will be automatically compressed as part of the report creation process. Piping and instrument components in any model which do not have a corresponding record in the applicable table of the Piping Design Database are ignored and excluded from the report. These components, if any, are reported through the Database Verification command of the Project Administrator.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Table Change Report option.

402

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager The system displays a list of Physical Data Libraries.

2. Select Table Library Select the Physical Data Library to process, such as U.S. Practice, DIN, or Company Practice and select Accept. 3. Enter Date for Search ( dd-mmm-yy ) Key in a date (such as 10-Aug-95) in the Revision Date field to list all the tables that have been revised since the specified date. 4. Accept, Re-enter Date or Choose Extent Set the toggle to Full List or Sub-String. For Sub-String, key in a string to limit the tables to be listed. — THEN — Select Accept to begin processing.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

403

Reference Database Revision Manager The system displays a list of all dimension and weight tables (or those which match a specified substring).

5. Select Tables or Exit Select the dimension tables to be considered in the creation of the revision management report. — OR — You can select Process All to process all the listed tables (those which meet the specified revision date and substring). — THEN — Select Accept to process the selected tables.

404

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager For each of the selected tables, the system displays the table data in the Table Data Display form.

6. Select Table Entry For each table, you can specify which entries (up to a total of 200 entries) in the table have been revised.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

405

Reference Database Revision Manager Although the performance of the Reference Data Manager in creating the report will not be impacted by the number of dimension table entries that are to be considered for revision management, the list of components in the model will be impacted. For example, if you inadvertently identify entries which had not actually changed, you may create significant, unnecessary work.

7. Select the extent of the project to be processed.  Project — process all piping models in the entire project.  Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas.  Models — process the selected models within a selected design area.

The summary report path and report node are determined by the settings defined with the Report Manager. 8. You can change the location or name for the summary report output or use the defaults. 9. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. 10. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 11. Select Accept to begin processing the request.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The table change report file has an extension of .tcr and is created in the model directory as .tcr . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

406

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager

Reference Data Impact Report Selecting the Reference Data Impact Report command activates the Search Criteria form.

This report is based on user-defined search criteria of attributes such as piping materials class, commodity code, commodity name, option code, maximum temperature, nominal diameter, end preparation, schedule thickness, table suffix, and so forth. The purpose of this report is to find which components (constrained by your search criteria) will be impacted by a change in the attributes as they exist in the current approved RDB. The RDB Impact Report search criteria are valid for Piping Material Class Data (pdtable_201) and Piping Component Specification Data (pdtable_202). The RDB Impact Report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as .imp. This report does not include a graphical review capability.

Example 1 As an example, assume that you want to know the impact of changing the vendor for a specific type of valve. You could define the search criteria to find all instances of valves with that specific geometric industry standard that would need to be reconstructed if the vendor were changed.

Example 2 As a second example, assume that you are working with a project that uses spec A and spec B. Both of these specs contain the value X, for the vendor of gate valves. A model has been created that uses both spec A and B, and valves have been placed from both of these specs. Also, assume that spec B has been modified since the valves have been placed so that the vendor in spec B now has a value of Y (instead of X), and the model has not been updated to reflect this spec change.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

407

Reference Database Revision Manager If the Reference Data Impact Report was run now to determine the impact of changing the vendor X, the system would scan the RDB for all occurrences of vendor X (which, at this time, would be only those placed from spec A), check the portions of the design you specified for occurrences of vendor X, then report the matching occurrences back to you. The resulting report would not list those valves from vendor X that were placed from spec B, because the occurrences of those valves in the model did not match the occurrences in the RDB (due to the model not being updated after the spec change).

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Reference Data Impact Report command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form.

The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select the attribute to be restricted. 2. Select Attribute Select the attribute to be restricted.

After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selected attribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.

3. Select Operator Select an operator to define the search criteria.

The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to key in an attribute value. 4. Enter Attribute Value Key in the attribute value. For a sub-string search, key in a string to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard Note Library. 5. Select the value and select Accept.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the Search Criteria display field. 6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator

Select AND to specify an additional condition or select OR to specify an alternative condition. — OR — Accept the defined search criteria and activate the Reference Data Revision Manager form.

408

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager

7. Revise the search criteria, if necessary, using the Revise Search Criteria option. — OR — Select the extent of the project to be processed.  Project — Process all piping models for the entire project.  Piping Design Area — Process the selected piping design areas.  Models — Process the selected models within a selected design area. 8. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. 9. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. 10. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 11. Select Accept to submit the request for processing.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The reference data impact report file has an extension of .imp and is created in the model directory as .imp . If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

409

Reference Database Revision Manager

Proposed RDB Changes Report This command creates a report assessing the impact of multiple changes in the unapproved RDB. Selecting this command from the Reference Data Revision Manager form activates the Proposed RDB Changes Report form. You must make changes to the unapproved Material Reference Database in order to assess the effect of these changes. You are responsible for restoring the unapproved Material Reference Database to its original state if you decide not to pursue these changes. Refer to the section titled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapter for information on the order of significance of reported problems.

Piping Commodities The system extracts the following data from the model for the purpose of reading piping commodity specification data from the Material Reference Database. This is the same data that is used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping commodity. piping materials class

second size

commodity name

option code

first size maximum temperature The first size and second size are determined from the piping segment data and not from the component itself. If the piping commodity in the model is a branch that was initially placed using a branch table from the Reference Database, the system reads the appropriate branch table from the Piping Materials Class data to determine if there has been a change in the commodity name for the branch. If so, this component is flagged as requiring reconstruction.

410

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping commodities. The data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green

* commodity code

* pressure rating - green

* model code

* schedule/thickness - green

* modifier

* table suffix - green

* geometric industry standard

* end preparation - red

weight code

* pressure rating - red

fabrication category

* schedule/thickness - red

materials grade

* table suffix - red Note that user overrides of fabrication category and schedule/thickness will not be included in the report. The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping commodity with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping commodity which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data (either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. The system compares the NPD at each connect point of the component with the NPD of the segment. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum:  the application of the schedule/override in the model.  changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table. Refer to the section titled Summary of Report Parameters and Discrepancy Hierarchy found at the beginning of this chapter for information on the order of significance of reported problems.

Piping Specialties and Instruments The system extracts the component number from the model for the purpose of reading piping specialty and instrument specification data from the Material Reference Database. The component number is also used for the placement or reconstruction of a piping specialty or an instrument. For example, instrument_comp_no is used for instruments, and piping_comp_no is used for piping specialties.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

411

Reference Database Revision Manager The system compares the following data for consistency between the model and the Reference Database for piping specialties and instruments. The data which may impact the geometry and/or the symbology in the model is designated by an asterisk. * end preparation - green

* physical data id

* pressure rating - green

* model code

* schedule/thickness - green

* modifier

* table suffix - green

* geometric industry standard

* end preparation - red

weight code

* pressure rating - red

fabrication category

* schedule/thickness - red

materials grade

* table suffix - red The system compares the gasket thickness for each bolted end of a piping specialty or instrument with the gasket separation in the corresponding Piping Materials Class data. If a value is defined in the Reference Database, the gasket thickness at the bolted end is compared with that value. If a Gasket Separation Table name is defined, that table is used to determine a gasket separation value for comparison with the gasket thickness at the bolted end. The system compares the specification data for any connect point of a piping specialty or instrument which has been designated as a tap with the appropriate data, i.e. either the specification data from the Tap Properties Data in the Reference Database or from another connect point. Piping specialties and instruments are excluded from this report when the specification data and the geometry data is defined by the user (not defined in the Reference Database). The system compares the green specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points for that component in the model which are designated as having green connect point properties. The system compares the red specification data in the Reference Database with all connect points, if any, which are designated as having red connect point properties. The system compares the schedule thickness data for a component in the model to the corresponding data in the Material Reference Database. The comparison will consider the following issues at a minimum:  the application of the schedule/override in the model.  changes to the value for the schedule thickness in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the joint efficiency value in the Piping Commodity Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the value for the thickness equation in the Piping Materials Class Data within the Material Reference Database.  changes to the Thickness Data Table or the Materials Data Table.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the Proposed RDB Changes Report option.

The system activates the Proposed RDB Changes form.

412

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Reference Database Revision Manager

2. Select the extent of the project to be processed.  Project — process all piping models for the entire project.  Piping Design Area — process the selected piping design areas.  Models — process the selected models within a selected design area. 3. You can key in changes to the Report Node, Report Path, and Report Name for the summary report output or use the default location and name. The default location for the summary report is determined by the Report Management Data of the Report Manager. 4. Select the desired output method for the summary report: Print/Delete, Print/Save, or Save. If you will be printing the summary report, select a queue from the pick list. 5. Accept to Submit Job, Restart or Exit Set the toggle to Submit Immediately or select Delayed Submit and fill in the day and time to process the request. 6. Select Accept to submit the request for processing.

The system submits the request to the batch queue PDreport. It updates the batch log file periodically to include a list of piping models which have been processed. The proposed RDB changes report file has an extension of .pcs and is created in the model directory as .pcs. If the summary report is printed as a result of creating this report, this report will also be printed. Reference Data Conflict Report (on page 397) Proposed RDB Changes Report (on page 410)

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

413

SECTION 17

MicroStation V7 Checker As PDS projects do not support MicroStation V8 design files, you can use MicroStation V7 Checker to find any MicroStation V8 design files in a project. MicroStation V7 Checker generates an ASCII-based log file at a user-defined location that provides a report on the files contained in the project. You can then remove any MicroStation V8 files from the project. If PDS finds a MicroStation V8 design file, this error message displays:

If there are any V8 design files in a project, the software may crash or produce unusual errors. To locate the problem file(s) in the project: 1. Enter the following: File name - Specifies the name of the text file to generate. Directory - Type the path where to create the file. Node name - Type the computer name on which to create the log file.

The log file is generated at the specified location. 2. Open the file using any ASCII text editor to view a report on the project files. For any MicroStation V8 files, the message, "Unsupported V8 file found in the path..." displays.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

415

SECTION 18

Verify RDB Library For releases prior to the 4.2 PDS release, a problem existed in the Reference Data Manager, such that the binary tree structure in a reference data library (such as the Graphic Commodity Library) could be corrupted without the user immediately detecting any problems with that library. Although the software problem was corrected in the 4.2 PDS release, the data problem that resulted may have persisted beyond that release, particularly if the library has not been compressed. As a final step within the project upgrade process, the system verifies the integrity of the binary tree structure within each of the reference data libraries. If an error is detected, a specific warning message will be reported, both interactively and in the upgrade log. In this event, you should contact Intergraph immediately for assistance in repairing the library. The Verify RDB Library utility has been provided to allow the capability to verify the integrity of the binary tree structure on demand. The Verify RDB Library icon is located in the PD_Shell program group on systems upon which the PD_Data software has been loaded locally; double-click on this icon to activate the command.

Operating Sequence 1. Execute the command by double-clicking on the Verify RDB Library icon in the PD_Shell program group.

The system activates the Reference Database Library Verification Utility form, and prompts you to select the appropriate project number from the list.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

417

Verify RDB Library

2. Select the desired project number, and then select the Verify Reference Database Library command.

The system begins the verification process and displays the Verifying RDB Library Files message. When processing is complete, the system returns a message similar to the one shown below:

A typical output file has been excerpted below. No errors were found in this example. Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.t header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pjstb.l.r header number keys = 234 tree number keys = 234

418

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Verify RDB Library Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618shbom.l header number keys = 2877 tree number keys = 2877 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618lgbom.l header number keys = 2629 tree number keys = 2629 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618spbom.l Empty file, no keys. Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l header number keys = 4162 tree number keys = 4162 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618note.l.t header number keys = 65 tree number keys = 65 Counting implied keys for code31 Counting implied keys for code35 Counting implied keys for code36 Counting implied keys for code37 Counting implied keys for code50 Counting implied keys for code69 Counting implied keys for code125 . . . Counting implied keys for code2000 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618label.l header number keys = 217 tree number keys = 217 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618assem.l.t header number keys = 110 tree number keys = 110 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618gcom.l.t header number keys = 1509 tree number keys = 1509 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.t header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Opening : /onneso3a/rdb/lib/approved/618pcdim.l.r header number keys = 4820 tree number keys = 4820 Total files with errors : 0

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

419

APPENDIX A

Appendix: Reference Data Manager Error Messages The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in the win32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.  pdsmc.msg — command field messages  pdsme.msg — error and warning messages  pdsmp.msg — prompts and messages  pdsms.msg — status messages.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

421

APPENDIX B

Appendix: Codelists This section details the codelists used in PDS. The data contained within this appendix is for informational purposes only and may not exactly match the codelists delivered with the product.

General Comments Codelist sets in this document define the values for all codelisted attributes used in the PDS Piping Task which are specific to US plant design practices. You can add, delete, or revise codelist sets to reflect your own practices, terminology, and language. A task user, however, cannot revise a codelist set from a work session. Revisions to a codelist set, can only be made in the General RDB or Standard Note Library. In listings that follow, the maximum number of entries that may be expected for a specific codelist set is shown in parentheses following the name of the codelist set. For PDS users that wish to modify codelist files delivered with the PDS software to reflect their own practices, two approaches are possible:  Make the modifications within the range of codelist numbers defined in the codelist library delivered with the PDS software. This has the advantage of resulting in the best organized set of codelisted definitions. The disadvantage is that numbers added by the user may conflict with numbers added in future versions of software.  Increase the maximum number of entries allowed for the codelist set and make additions to it in the range of extended numbers. This will minimize possible conflicts assigned numbers but will require compiling of the codelists and of the associated databases. Values enclosed in brackets [ ] in pages that follow represent descriptive information. The values stored in the codelist sets will exclude this bracketed information from the codelist descriptions. The net length of a codelist entry cannot exceed 50 characters. Other considerations may, however, require that a shorter description be made. For example:  For the P&ID Task, the total compressed length of a label part can not exceed 36 characters.  The formats of specification type reports for the Instrument Task require that applicable codelist descriptions do not exceed 25 characters.

Comments Specific to Units of Measure Codelist Sets The PDS system of units is derived from the 1980 Edition of API-2564, Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter 15 "Guidelines for the Use of the International System of Units (SI) in the Petroleum and Allied Industries". The tables in this document include the following information. Codelist set

This is the number of the codelist set that identifies a specific quantity. For example, codelist set 1028 includes the units of measure that apply to the quantity "mass".

Codelist no

This is the number that defines a specific unit of measure within a codelist set. For example, codelist number 1 in codelist set 1028 refers to the "lb" units of measure.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

423

Appendix: Codelists Unit type

This code is not explicitly shown in the tables. The unit type equals the number of the codelist set minus 1000. For example, reference to unit type 28 refers to "mass".

Quantity name

Entries in this column define the quantity whose units of measure are being defined.

Unit name

Several unit names are provided for a given codelist set. Any of these names can be used to define the quantity.

Conversion to destination unit

Two sets of columns define the conversion of variables expressed in the units shown under the column "Unit Name" to the unit shown under the column "Destination Unit". The following explanations apply:



The column captioned Destination Unit defines the unit to which the unit included under the column Unit Name will be converted using the value shown under the column Factor.



The column captioned Factor provides the actual conversion factor to be used for the conversion. For example, in codelist set 1028, to convert a mass measurement in "lb" to "kg", multiply the value in the former units by the conversion factor, 4.535 924 E-01. In some cases, such as temperature, summation may also be required to effect the desired conversion. All conversion factors are taken or derived from API Publication 2564. Groups of three digits are separated by spaces with no commas. For example, 3.048 000 E-01 = 3.048 000 x 10ˆ-1 = 0.3048000. Similarly, 9.290 304 E+02 = 9.290 304 x 10ˆ2 = 929.0304.

An asterisk (*) indicates that all following digits are zeros. If a conversion factor happens to end in several zeros but does not have an asterisk, any subsequent digits would not necessarily be zeros. Most of the conversion factors are shown to six or seven significant figures. Those shown to fewer than six significant figures are limited by the precision of the known or determinable value of a physical property, such as the density of distilled water at a reference temperature. Conversion to first unit in CL

Two sets of columns define the conversion of the units shown under the column Unit Name to the first unit shown in that column. The conversion is done per the equation: y= A + Bx where, x applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the column captioned Unit Name. y applies to the value of the variable expressed in the units shown in the first line of the column captioned Unit Name. A is the factor in the column captioned Factor A. B is the factor in the column captioned Factor B.

424

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists The distinction between upper case and lower case symbols is very important. For example: K= kelvin k= kilo= 10ˆ3 M= mega= 10ˆ6 m= milli= 10ˆ-3 (when m is used as a prefix) m= metre (when m is used alone) N= newton n= nano= 10ˆ-9 In editing any of the codelist sets for units, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. In all codelist sets for units, a blank space is provided as the first character in the unit name. The blank space is used to silence the units in the formation of labels. Nomenclature: Symbol

Name

Quantity

bar

bar

pressure

degC

degree Celsius

temperature

g

gram

mass

kg

kilogram

mass

m

metre

length

min

minute

time

Pa

pascal

pressure

t

metric ton

mass

CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) C31 DF=’WRK_DD_CODLST:CODE0031.ENT’ MAX=999 0031, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) Equipment Category Object Types (100-149) The Range of 100-149 for the equipment category is divided into two parts: 101-110 These entries are reserved by INTERGRAPH and may not be changed by the user. 111-149 Codelist entries in this range may be created, revised, and/or deleted by the user. If modified the user must also revise the contents of the file eqp_object.dwg and labels.xxx (where xxx is the drawing type number defined in CL2000 ) in the project directory.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

425

Appendix: Codelists 101 110 120 124 128 130 135 140

= = = = = = = =

’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment ’Equipment

Group’ Nozzle’ Platform’ Handrail’ Penetration’ Stair’ Ladder’ Davit’

Piping Category Object Types (200-249) 205 207 210 215 220

= = = = =

’Piping ’Pipe’ ’Piping ’Piping ’Piping

Segment’ Component’ Specialty’ Support’

Instrument Category Object Types (250-279) 250 252 255 260

= = = =

’Control Valves and Regulators’ ’Relief Devices’ ’Other In-Line Instruments’ ’Off-Line Instruments’

HVAC Category Object Types (359-399) 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC ’HVAC

Coil Data’ Connector Data’ Damper Data’ Diffuser Data’ Duct Data’ DEquipment Data’ Filter Data’ Fitting Data’ Grille Data’ Hood Data’ Humidifier Data’ Register Data’ Terminal Devices’

EERWAY Category Object Types (300-306) 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308

426

= = = = = = = = =

’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY ’EERWAY

Connect Point’ OneLine’ Straight’ Fitting’ Space Envelope’ To_Equipment’ To_Support’ Eqp Panel’ Duct Bank’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists

CL35, Approval Status (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. The following are the requirements in use of the "approval status." 2 reserved for ’approved’ 3 reserved for ’not approved’ 11-20 reserved for ’approved’ 21-30 reserved for ’not approved’ 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’A =Approved’ 3 = ’NA=Not approved’

CL36, Structural Approval Status (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 0= ’New’ 1 = ’Existing’ 2 = ’Future’ 3 = ’User 1’ 4 = ’User 2’

CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 2 3 4

= = = =

’New’ ’Existing’ ’Dismantle’ ’Future’

CL50, Hold Status (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

427

Appendix: Codelists values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = ’NH=Not held’ 2 = ’H =Hold’

CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of codelist value "All". Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other data displays require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

= = = = = = = =

’A= ’B= ’C= ’D= ’E= ’F= ’H= ’I=

All’ Vessels’ Heat transfer’ Mechanical’ Civil/Structural’ Piping’ Electrical’ Other’

CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 950-999. 1 = [Blank] 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 40

428

= = = = = = = = = =

’A’ ’AC’ ’AE’ ’AI’ ’AO’ ’AP’ ’APU’ ’AR’ ’AS’ ’AZ’

[Air] [Combustion air] [Aeration air] [Instrument air] [Operational air] [Plant air] [Purge air] [Regeneration air] [Starting air] [Other air]

71 = ’C’ 75 = ’CA’ 79 = ’CE’ 83 = ’CF’ 87 = ’CLP’ 91 = ’CPR’ 100 = ’CZ’

[Refrigerant] [Ammonia refrigerant] [Ethylene refrigerant] [Freon refrigerant] [LP refrigerant] [Propylene refrigerant] [Other refrigerant]

101 = ’D’

[Sewer]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 103 105 107 109 111 113 115 117 119 121 123 125 127 128 130

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’DC’ ’DCH’ ’DGR’ ’DOW’ ’DP’ ’DPH’ ’DS’ ’DSP’ ’DST’ ’DW’ ’DWS’ ’DX’ [Blank] [Blank] ’DZ’

[Caustic sewer] [Chemical sewer] [Drain to grade] [Oily water sewer] [Process sewer] [Heated process sewer] [Sanitary sewer] [Press sanitary sewer] [Storm sewer] [Clean water sewer] [Sour water sewer] [Acid sewer] [Storm, oily water or sanitary sewer] [Storm or oily water sewer] [Other sewer]

161 = ’F’

[Foam]

191 194 197 198 200 203 206 209 212 215 218 221 224 227 230 233 236 239 242 245 250

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’G’ ’GCD’ ’GCL’ ’GCN’ ’GF’ ’GG’ ’GH’ ’GHS’ ’GI’ ’GLP’ ’GM’ ’GN’ ’GNI’ ’GOX’ ’GP’ ’GR’ ’GS’ ’GSO’ ’GSW’ ’GW’ ’GZ’

[Gas] [Carbon dioxide gas] [Chlorine gas] [Chlorination gas] [Fuel gas] [Flue gas] [Hydrogen gas] [Hydrogen sulphide gas] [Inert gas] [LP gas] [Make-up gas] [Natural gas] [Nitrogen gas] [Oxygen gas] [Purge gas] [Reformed gas] [Synthesis gas] [Sour gas] [Sweet gas] [Waste gas [Other gas]

341 346 351 356 370

= = = = =

’K’ ’KG’ ’KF’ ’KD’ ’KZ’

[Solvent] [Glycol] [Furfural] [Dewaxing] [Other solvent]

401 402 405 409 413 417 421 425

= = = = = = = =

’M’ [Blank] ’MAA’ ’MAC’ ’MAW’ ’MC5’ ’MCL’ ’MEO’

[Chemical] [Chemical injection] [Anhydrous ammonia] [Aluminum chloride] [Aqueous ammonia] [0-50% caustic solution] [Dry chlorine] [Ethylene oxide]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

429

Appendix: Codelists

430

429 433 434 440 444 448 452 460

= = = = = = = =

’MHC’ ’MIA’ ’MIB’ ’MLA’ ’MMA’ ’MS’ ’MSL’ ’MZ’

[Hydrogen chloride] [Inhibitor A] [Inhibitor B] [Lube oil additives] [Methyl alcohol] [Sulfur] [Liquid sulfur] [Other chemical]

491 493 495 497 499 500 503 505 507 509 511 513 515 520

= = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’O’ ’OD’ ’ODS’ ’OF’ ’OFR’ ’OFS’ ’OH’ ’OL’ ’OLS’ ’OS’ ’OSO’ ’OSW’ ’OWS’ ’OZ’

[Oil] [Diesel fuel oil] [Dry slop oil] [Flushing oil] [Fuel oil return] [Fuel oil supply] [Hydraulic oil] [Lube] [Lube and seal oil] [Seal oil] [Sour oil] [Sweet oil] [Wet slop oil] [Other oil]

521 522 524 527 530 533 536 539 542 545 550

= = = = = = = = = = =

’P’ [Blank] ’PA’ ’PAS’ ’PB’ ’PH’ ’PHH’ ’PHW’ ’PL’ ’PS’ ’PZ’

[Process] [Special process] [Process w/ rich/lean amine] [Process w/ severe amine] [Process w/ benzene] [Process w/ H2] [Process w/ H2 & H2S] [Process w/ aqueous H2S] [Low temperature process] [Process w/ S] [Other process]

581 = ’RA’ 591 = ’RF’ 610 = ’RZ’

[Relief to atmosphere] [Relief to flare] [Other relief]

611 613 615 617 621 623 625 627 629 631 633 635 640

[Steam] [Boiler feed water or steam] [Boiler feed water, steam or condensate] [Steam or condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam] [High press CL900 steam] [Low press CL150 steam] [Med press CL600 steam] [Nor press CL300 steam] [Superheated steam] [Vacuum steam] [Exhaust CL125 steam] [Other steam]

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

’S’ [Blank] [Blank] [Blank] ’SE’ ’SH’ ’SL’ ’SM’ ’SN’ ’SS’ ’SV’ ’SX’ ’SZ’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 641 643 645 647 649 651 653 655 660

= = = = = = = = =

’SC’ ’SCA’ ’SCE’ ’SCH’ ’SCL’ ’SCM’ ’SCN’ ’SCV’ ’SCZ’

[Steam condensate] [Atmospheric CL125 steam condensate] [Extr press CL1500 steam condensate] [High press CL900 steam condensate] [Low press CL150 steam condensate] [Med press CL600 steam condensate] [Nor press CL300 steam condensate] [Vacuum steam condensate] [Other steam condensate]

721 731 741 750

= = = =

’V’ ’VA’ ’VF’ ’VZ’

[Vent] [Vent to atmosphere] [Vent to flare] [Other vent]

751 753 755 757 759 761 763 764 765 767 768 771 772 773 775 777 779 781 783 785 786 789 791 792 795 797 798 801 803 805 807 809 811 812 815 817 819 830

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’W’ ’WB’ ’WBA’ ’WBB’ ’WC’ [Blank] ’WCH’ ’WCL’ ’WCF’ ’WCR’ ’WCS’ ’WPT’ [Blank] ’WDM’ ’WFA’ ’WFI’ ’WFU’ ’WG’ ’WGL’ ’WGR’ ’WGS’ ’WH’ ’WHR’ ’WHS’ ’WI’ ’WIR’ ’WIS’ ’WK’ ’WN’ ’WP’ ’WR’ ’WS’ ’WSR’ ’WSS’ ’WT’ ’WU’ ’WW’ ’WZ’

[Water] [Boiler feed water] [Ballast water] [Water boiler blowdown] [Cooling water] [Cooling or utility water] [Chlorinated water] [Chlorine in water] [Clarified water] [Cooling water return] [Cooling water supply] [Potable water] [Potable water or instrument air] [Demineralized water] [Aboveground fire water] [Filtered water] [Underground fire water] [Glycol water] [Gland water] [Glycol water return] [Glycol water supply] [Hot water] [Hot water return] [Hot water supply] [Chilled water] [Chilled water return] [Chilled water supply] [Treated water] [Brine water] [Process water] [Raw water] [Sea water] [Sea water return] [Sea water supply] [Test water] [Utility water] [Waste water] [Other water]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

431

Appendix: Codelists 831 835 839 843 847 851 853 860

= = = = = = = =

’X’ ’XH’ ’XN’ ’XSD’ ’XS3’ ’XS8’ ’XS9’ ’XZ’

[Acid] [Hydrofluoric acid] [Nitric acid] [Dilute sulfuric acid] [30% sulfuric acid] [75-80% sulfuric acid] [93-97% sulfuric acid] [Other acid]

861 865 869 873 877 881 890

= = = = = = =

’Y’ ’YA’ ’YG’ ’YH’ ’YL’ ’YW’ ’YZ’

[Catalyst] [Catalyst addition] [General catalyst] [Catalyst w/ H2] [Catalyst lift lines] [Catalyst withdrawal lines] [Other catalyst]

950 951 953 955 956 960 961 999

= = = = = = = =

’ODPC’ ’OUPC’ ’UODPC’ ’ODIC’ ’OUIC’ ’OVPC’ ’OSPC’ ’TERM’

[Off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-unit piping connectors] [Utility off-dwg piping connectors] [Off-dwg instr connectors] [Off-unit instr connectors] [Off-vol piping connectors] [Off-site piping connectors] [Terminator piping connector]

CL130, Construction Status (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values 2, 3 and 8. In addition, codelist values 4-7 must imply an "existing" construction status. Codelist values 9-15 inherit the color symbology from the construction status of the item previously placed in the model. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

= = = = = = = =

[Blank] ’New’ ’Existing’ ’Revamp’ ’Relocate’ ’Temporary’ ’Dismantle’ ’Future’

CL145, Materials Grade (4500) NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed.

432

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 1 = [Blank] Irons, 10-99 10 = ’A47-32510’ 12 = ’A47-35018’ 15 = ’A48-20’ 16 = ’A48-25’ 17 = ’A48-30’ 18 = ’A48-35’ 19 = ’A48-40’ 20 = ’A48-45’ 21 = ’A48-50’ 22 = ’A48-55’ 23 = ’A48-60’ 25 = ’A74’ 30 = ’A126-A’ 31 = ’A126-B’ 32 = ’A126-C’ 35 = ’A197’ 40 = ’A278-20’ 41 = ’A278-25’ 42 = ’A278-30’ 43 = ’A278-35’ 44 = ’A278-40’ 45 = ’A278-50’ 46 = ’A278-60’ 47 = ’A278-70’ 48 = ’A278-80’ 55 = ’A338’ 60 = ’A395-Ductile’ 62 = ’A395-Ferritic Ductile’ 70 = ’A571’ 75 = ’AWWA-C110-Ductile’ 76 = ’AWWA-C151-Ductile’ Carbon Steels, 100-499 110 = ’API-5L-A’ 114 = ’API-5L-A25’ 116 = ’API-5L-B’ 118 = ’API-5L-X42’ 120 = ’API-5L-X46’ 122 = ’API-5L-X52’ 124 = ’API-5L-X65’ 135 = ’A36’ 140 = ’A53-A’ 142 = ’A53-B’ 144 = ’A53-Type F’ 150 = ’A105’ 160 = ’A106-A’ 162 = ’A106-B’ 164 = ’A106-C’ 170 = ’A120’ 180 = ’A134-A36’ 182 = ’A134-A283-A’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

433

Appendix: Codelists 183 184 185 186 187 188 190 191 192 193 194 195 200 202 210 212 214 216 218 220 230 234 240 241 242 243 244 245 250 252 254 264 266 270 272 274 276 280 282 284 290 293 295 298 300 302 305 310 312 320 321 322 323 325

434

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A134-A283-B’ ’A134-A283-C’ ’A134-A283-D’ ’A134-A285-A’ ’A134-A285-B’ ’A134-A285-C’ ’A134-A570-30’ ’A134-A570-33’ ’A134-A570-36’ ’A134-A570-40’ ’A134-A570-45’ ’A134-A570-50’ ’A135-A’ ’A135-B’ ’A139-A’ ’A139-B’ ’A139-C’ ’A139-D’ ’A139-E’ ’A179’ ’A181-CL60’ ’A181-CL70’ ’A211-A570-30’ ’A211-A570-33’ ’A211-A570-36’ ’A211-A570-40’ ’A211-A570-45’ ’A211-A570-50’ ’A216-WCA’ ’A216-WCB’ ’A216-WCC’ ’A234-WPB’ ’A234-WPC’ ’A283-A’ ’A283-B’ ’A283-C’ ’A283-D’ ’A285-A’ ’A285-B’ ’A285-C’ ’A333-1’ ’A333-6’ ’A334-1’ ’A334-6’ ’A350-LF1’ ’A350-LF2’ ’A352-LCB’ ’A369-FPA’ ’A369-FPB’ ’A381-Y35’ ’A381-Y42’ ’A381-Y46’ ’A381-Y48’ ’A381-Y50’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 327 334 340 342 344 346 350 352 354 356 360 361 362 363 364 365 370 372 375 380 390 392 394 396 398 400 402 404 406 408 410 420 422 424 426 428 430 432 434 436 438 440 442 444 446 448 460 464

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A381-Y52’ ’A420-WPL6’ ’A515-55’ ’A515-60’ ’A515-65’ ’A515-70’ ’A516-55’ ’A516-60’ ’A516-65’ ’A516-70’ ’A520-30’ ’A520-33’ ’A520-36’ ’A520-40’ ’A520-45’ ’A520-50’ ’A524-I’ ’A524-II’ ’A537-CL1’ ’A587’ ’A671-CA55’ ’A671-CB60’ ’A671-CB65’ ’A671-CB70’ ’A671-CC60’ ’A671-CC65’ ’A671-CC70’ ’A671-CD70’ ’A671-CE55’ ’A671-CE60’ ’A671-CK75’ ’A672-A45’ ’A672-A50’ ’A672-A55’ ’A672-B55’ ’A672-B60’ ’A672-B65’ ’A672-B70’ ’A672-C55’ ’A672-C60’ ’A672-C65’ ’A672-C70’ ’A672-D70’ ’A672-E55’ ’A672-E60’ ’A672-N75’ ’A691-CMS75’ ’A691-CMSH70’

Low 510 512 514 516

and Intermediate Alloy Steels, 500-899 = ’A182-F1’ = ’A182-F2’ = ’A182-F5’ = ’A182-F5a’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

435

Appendix: Codelists 518 519 520 521 523 524 526 528 530 532 534 536 540 542 550 552 554 556 560 562 564 576 578 580 582 584 586 588 590 600 602 610 614 616 618 620 622 624 630 632 634 636 644 646 648 650 652 664 666 668 670 680 682 684

436

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A182-F6a Cl.1’ ’A182-F6a Cl.2’ ’A182-F6a Cl.3’ ’A182-F6a Cl.4’ ’A182-F6b’ ’A182-F7’ ’A182-F9’ ’A182-F11’ ’A182-F12’ ’A182-F21’ ’A182-F22’ ’A182-F22a’ ’A202-A’ ’A202-B’ ’A203-A’ ’A203-B’ ’A203-D’ ’A203-E’ ’A204-A’ ’A204-B’ ’A204-C’ ’A217-C5’ ’A217-C12’ ’A217-CA15’ ’A217-WC1’ ’A217-WC4’ ’A217-WC5’ ’A217-WC6’ ’A217-WC9’ ’A225-A’ ’A225-B’ ’A234-WP1’ ’A234-WP5’ ’A234-WP7’ ’A234-WP9’ ’A234-WP11’ ’A234-WP12’ ’A234-WP22’ ’A302-A’ ’A302-B’ ’A302-C’ ’A302-D’ ’A333-3’ ’A333-4’ ’A333-7’ ’A333-8’ ’A333-9’ ’A334-3’ ’A334-7’ ’A334-8’ ’A334-9’ ’A335-P1’ ’A335-P2’ ’A335-P5’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 686 687 690 692 694 696 698 700 702 710 720 722 724 730 740 742 744 746 748 750 752 754 756 758 760 761 770 771 774 775 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785 786 787 794 798 800 802 804 806 808 810 812 814 816 817 820 822

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A335-P5b’ ’A335-P5c’ ’A335-P7’ ’A335-P9’ ’A335-P11’ ’A335-P12’ ’A335-P15’ ’A335-P21’ ’A335-P22’ ’A350-LF3’ ’A352-LC1’ ’A352-LC2’ ’A352-LC3’ ’A353’ ’A369-FP1’ ’A369-FP2’ ’A369-FP3b’ ’A369-FP5’ ’A369-FP7’ ’A369-FP9’ ’A369-FP11’ ’A369-FP12’ ’A369-FP21’ ’A369-FP22’ ’A385-7 Cl.1’ ’A385-7 Cl.2’ ’A387-2 Cl.1’ ’A387-2 Cl.2’ ’A387-5 Cl.1’ ’A387-5 Cl.2’ ’A387-9 Cl.1’ ’A387-9 Cl.2’ ’A387-11 Cl.1’ ’A387-11 Cl.2’ ’A387-12 Cl.1’ ’A387-12 Cl.2’ ’A387-21 Cl.1’ ’A387-21 Cl.2’ ’A387-22 Cl.1’ ’A387-22 Cl.2’ ’A420-WPL3’ ’A420-WPL8’ ’A426-CP1’ ’A426-CP2’ ’A426-CP5’ ’A426-CP5b’ ’A426-CP7’ ’A426-CP9’ ’A426-CP11’ ’A426-CP12’ ’A426-CP15’ ’A426-CPCA15’ ’A426-CP21’ ’A426-CP22’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

437

Appendix: Codelists 830 832 835 840 842 850 852 854 860 862 864 866 868 870 872 874 876 878

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A553-Type I’ ’A553-Type II’ ’A645’ ’A671-CF70’ ’A671-CF71’ ’A672-L65’ ’A672-L70’ ’A672-L75’ ’A691-CM65’ ’A691-CM70’ ’A691-CM75’ ’A691-0.5Cr’ ’A691-1Cr’ ’A691-1.25Cr’ ’A691-2.25Cr’ ’A691-3Cr’ ’A691-5Cr’ ’A691-9Cr’

Stainless Steels, 900-1324 920 = ’A167-301’ 922 = ’A167-302’ 923 = ’A167-302B’ 926 = ’A167-304’ 927 = ’A167-304L’ 930 = ’A167-305’ 932 = ’A167-308’ 934 = ’A167-309’ 935 = ’A167-309S’ 938 = ’A167-310’ 939 = ’A167-310S’ 942 = ’A167-316’ 943 = ’A167-316L’ 946 = ’A167-317’ 947 = ’A167-317L’ 950 = ’A167-321’ 952 = ’A167-347’ 954 = ’A167-348’ 960 = ’A182-F10’ 964 = ’A182-F304’ 965 = ’A182-F304H’ 966 = ’A182-F304L’ 968 = ’A182-F310’ 970 = ’A182-F316’ 971 = ’A182-F316H’ 972 = ’A182-F316L’ 974 = ’A182-F321’ 975 = ’A182-F321H’ 978 = ’A182-F347’ 979 = ’A182-F347H’ 982 = ’A182-F348’ 983 = ’A182-F348H’ 990 = ’A240-X8M’ 992 = ’A240-302’

438

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 994 = ’A240-304’ 995 = ’A240-304L’ 996 = ’A240-304H’ 998 = ’A240-305’ 1000 = ’A240-309S’ 1004 = ’A240-310S’ 1006 = ’A240-316’ 1007 = ’A240-316L’ 1010 = ’A240-317’ 1011 = ’A240-317L’ 1014 = ’A240-321’ 1016 = ’A240-347’ 1018 = ’A240-348’ 1020 = ’A240-405’ 1022 = ’A240-410’ 1023 = ’A240-410S’ 1026 = ’A240-429’ 1028 = ’A240-430’ 1040 = ’A268-TP329’ 1044 = ’A268-TP405’ 1046 = ’A268-TP409’ 1048 = ’A268-TP410’ 1050 = ’A268-TP430’ 1051 = ’A268-TP430Ti’ 1054 = ’A268-TP443’ 1056 = ’A268-TP446’ 1060 = ’A269-TP304’ 1061 = ’A269-TP304L’ 1064 = ’A269-TP316’ 1065 = ’A269-TP316L’ 1066 = ’A270-TP316L’ 1070 = ’A312-TP304’ 1071 = ’A312-TP304H’ 1072 = ’A312-TP304L 1074 = ’A312-TP309’ 1076 = ’A312-TP310’ 1078 = ’A312-TP316’ 1079 = ’A312-TP316H’ 1080 = ’A312-TP316L’ 1082 = ’A312-TP317’ 1084 = ’A312-TP321’ 1085 = ’A312-TP321H’ 1088 = ’A312-TP347’ 1089 = ’A312-TP347H’ 1092 = ’A312-TP348’ 1095 = ’A351-CA15’ 1100 = ’A351-CF3’ 1102 = ’A351-CF3A’ 1104 = ’A351-CF3M’ 1106 = ’A351-CF8’ 1108 = ’A351-CF8A’ 1110 = ’A351-CF8C’ 1112 = ’A351-CF8M’ 1113 = ’A351-CF10’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

439

Appendix: Codelists 1114 1116 1118 1120 1122 1124 1126 1128 1130 1140 1141 1144 1146 1148 1149 1152 1154 1156 1160 1162 1163 1166 1167 1170 1171 1174 1175 1178 1179 1190 1191 1192 1194 1196 1198 1199 1200 1202 1204 1205 1206 1207 1210 1220 1222 1224 1226 1228 1230 1232 1234 1240 1241 1244

440

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’A351-CF10MC’ ’A351-CN7M’ ’A351-CH8’ ’A351-CH10’ ’A351-CH20’ ’A351-CK20’ ’A351-HK30’ ’A351-HK40’ ’A351-HT30’ ’A358-304’ ’A358-304L’ ’A358-309S’ ’A358-310S’ ’A358-316’ ’A358-316L’ ’A358-321’ ’A358-347’ ’A358-348’ ’A376-16-8-2H’ ’A376-TP304’ ’A376-TP304H’ ’A376-TP316’ ’A376-TP316H’ ’A376-TP321’ ’A376-TP321H’ ’A376-TP347’ ’A376-TP347H’ ’A376-TP348’ ’A376-TP348H’ ’A403-WP304’ ’A403-WP304H’ ’A403-WP304L’ ’A403-WP309’ ’A403-WP310’ ’A403-WP316’ ’A403-WP316H’ ’A403-WP316L’ ’A403-WP317’ ’A403-WP321’ ’A403-WP321H’ ’A403-WP347’ ’A403-WP347H’ ’A403-WP348’ ’A409-TP304’ ’A409-TP309’ ’A409-TP310’ ’A409-TP316’ ’A409-TP317’ ’A409-TP321’ ’A409-TP347’ ’A409-TP348’ ’A430-FP304’ ’A430-FP304H’ ’A430-FP316’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 1245 1248 1249 1252 1253 1260 1262 1264 1266 1268 1270 1272 1280 1282 1284 1300

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Copper 1325 = 1330 = 1331 = 1334 = 1335 = 1338 = 1339 = 1342 = 1346 = 1350 = 1354 = 1356 = 1358 = 1362 = 1363 = 1364 = 1368 = 1369 = 1370 = 1374 = 1375 = 1376 = 1380 = 1381 = 1382 = 1386 = 1387 = 1392 = 1393 = 1398 = 1399 = 1404 = 1408 = 1410 = 1412 = 1414 =

’A430-FP316H’ ’A430-FP321’ ’A430-FP321H’ ’A430-FP347’ ’A430-FP347H’ ’A451-CHP10’ ’A451-CHP20’ ’A451-CPF8C’ ’A451-CPF8M’ ’A451-CPF10MC’ ’A451-CPH8’ ’A451-CPK20’ ’A452-TP304H’ ’A452-TP316H’ ’A452-TP347H’ ’ASME SA479-316L’ and Copper Alloys, 1325-1549 ’AISI-CDA Alloy 377’ ’B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.C10200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’ ’B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.C12000, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’ ’B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 0.0625-2’ ’B42 Cl.C12200, drwn, NPD 2.5-12’ ’B43 Cl.C23000, annld’ ’B61 Cl.C92200’ ’B62 Cl.C83600’ ’B68 Cl.C10200, annld’ ’B68 Cl.C12000, annld’ ’B68 Cl.C12200, annld’ ’B75 Cl.C10200, annld’ ’B75 Cl.C10200, hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C10200, light drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C12000, annld’ ’B75 Cl.C12000, hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C12000, light drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C12200, annld’ ’B75 Cl.C12200, hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C12200, light drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C14200, annld’ ’B75 Cl.C14200, hrd drwn’ ’B75 Cl.C14200, light drwn’ ’B88 Cl.C10200, annld’ ’B88 Cl.C10200, drwn’ ’B88 Cl.C12000, annld’ ’B88 Cl.C12000, drwn’ ’B88 Cl.C12200, annld’ ’B88 Cl.C12200, drwn’ ’B96 Cl.C65500, annld’ ’B152 Cl.C10200, annld’ ’B152 Cl.C10400, annld’ ’B152 Cl.C10500, annld’ ’B152 Cl.C10700, annld’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

441

Appendix: Codelists 1416 1418 1422 1430 1432 1434 1436 1438 1440 1442 1450 1452 1456 1458 1462 1463 1466 1467 1472 1474 1476 1478 1480 1482 1484 1486 1488 1490 1492 1494 1496 1498 1500 1502

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

Nickel 1560 = 1561 = 1564 = 1565 = 1568 = 1572 = 1573 = 1574 = 1576 = 1577 = 1578 = 1582 = 1586 = 1587 = 1590 = 1591 = 1594 = 1595 =

442

’B152 ’B152 ’B169 ’B283 ’B283 ’B283 ’B283 ’B283 ’B283 ’B283 ’B402 ’B402 ’B466 ’B466 ’B467 ’B467 ’B467 ’B467 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584 ’B584

Cl.C12200, Cl.C12300, Cl.C61400, Cl.C11000’ Cl.C37700’ Cl.C46400’ Cl.C48500’ Cl.C63900’ Cl.C65500’ Cl.C67500’ Cl.C70600, Cl.C71500, Cl.C70600, Cl.C71500, Cl.C70600, Cl.C70600, Cl.C71500, Cl.C71500, Cl.C86200’ Cl.C86300’ Cl.C86400’ Cl.C86500’ Cl.C86700’ Cl.C90300’ Cl.C90500’ Cl.C92200’ Cl.C92300’ Cl.C95200’ Cl.C95300’ Cl.C95500’ Cl.C95600’ Cl.C97300’ Cl.C97600’ Cl.C97800’

annld’ annld’ soft’

annld’ annld’ annld’ annld’ annld, annld, annld, annld,

4.5in OD’ 4.5in OD’

and Nickel Alloys 1550-1774 ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B127-400 (N04400) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B160-200 (N02200) annld’ ’B160-200 (N02200) hot fin’ ’B160-201 annld’ ’B161-200 (N02200) annld, 5in OD’ ’B161-200 (N02200) stress rlvd’ ’B161-201 (N02201) annld, 5in OD’ ’B161-201 (N02201) stress rlvd’ ’B162-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B162-201 (N02201) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B164-400 (N04400) annld forged’ ’B164-400 (N04400) hot fin’ ’B165-400 (N04400) annld, 5in OD’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 1596 1600 1601 1604 1605 1606 1607 1610 1611 1614 1615 1616 1620 1624 1626 1628 1630 1632 1634 1636 1638 1642 1643 1646 1648 1650 1652 1654 1656 1658 1660 1664 1666 1670 1672 1676 1680 1684 1688 1700 1702 1704 1706 1708 1710 1714 1718 1722 1724 1726 1728 1730 1732

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’B165-400 (N04400) stress rlvd’ ’B166-600 (N06600) annld’ ’B166-600 (N06600) hot fin’ ’B167-600 (N06600) cold drwn annld, 5in OD’ ’B167-600 (N06600) hot fin/hot fin annld, 5in OD’ ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt annld’ ’B168-600 (N06600) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld plt’ ’B333-B (N10001) sln annld sheet’ ’B333-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B335-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B366-WPHB (N10001)’ ’B366-WPHX (N06002)’ ’B366-WPN (N02200)’ ’B366-WPNC (N04400)’ ’B366-WPNC1 (N06600)’ ’B366-WPNL (N02201)’ ’B366-WPNLWX’ ’B366-WPNWX’ ’B407-800 (N08800) cold drwn annld’ ’B407-800 (N08800) hot fin/hot fin annld’ ’B407-800H (N08810) cold drwn sln annld/hot fin’ ’B443-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B444-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B446-625 (N06625) annld’ ’B464-20Cb (N08020) annld’ ’A494-CW-12M-1’ ’A494-CW-12M-2’ ’A494-CY-40’ ’B574-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B574-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B575-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B575-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B581-G (N06007) sln annld’ ’B582-G (N06007) sln annld’ ’B612-200 (N02200) hot rolled plt AR’ ’B619-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B619-B (N10001) sln annld’ ’B619-B-2 (N10665) sln annld’ ’B619-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B619-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B619-G1 (N06007) sln annld’ ’B619-X (N06002) sln annld’ ’B620-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B621-20-Mod (N08320) sln annld’ ’B622-B (N10001) sln annld’ ’B622-B-2 (N10655) sln annld’ ’B622-C-4 (N06455) sln annld’ ’B622-C-276 (N10276) sln annld’ ’B622-G (N06007) sln annld’ ’B622-X (N06002) sln annld’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

443

Appendix: Codelists Aluminum Alloys 1775-2299 1780 = ’B26-356.0 temper T6’ 1782 = ’B26-356.0 temper T71’ 1784 = ’B26-443.0 temper F’ 1790 = ’B209-1060 temper 0’ 1792 = ’B209-1060 temper H12’ 1794 = ’B209-1060 temper H14’ 1796 = ’B209-1060 temper H112’ 1798 = ’B209-1100 temper 0’ 1800 = ’B209-1100 temper H12’ 1802 = ’B209-1100 temper H14’ 1804 = ’B209-1100 temper H112’ 1806 = ’B209-3003 temper 0’ 1808 = ’B209-3003 temper H12’ 1810 = ’B209-3003 temper H14’ 1812 = ’B209-3003 temper H112’ 1814 = ’B209-3004 temper 0’ 1816 = ’B209-3004 temper H32’ 1818 = ’B209-3004 temper H34’ 1820 = ’B209-3004 temper H112’ 1822 = ’B209-5050 temper 0’ 1824 = ’B209-5050 temper H32’ 1826 = ’B209-5050 temper H34’ 1828 = ’B209-5050 temper H112’ 1830 = ’B209-5052 temper 0’ 1832 = ’B209-5052 temper H32’ 1834 = ’B209-5052 temper H34’ 1836 = ’B209-5052 temper H112’ 1838 = ’B209-5652 temper 0’ 1840 = ’B209-5652 temper H32’ 1842 = ’B209-5652 temper H34’ 1844 = ’B209-5652 temper H112’ 1846 = ’B209-5083 temper 0’ 1848 = ’B209-5083 temper H321’ 1850 = ’B209-5086 temper 0’ 1852 = ’B209-5086 temper H32’ 1854 = ’B209-5086 temper H34’ 1856 = ’B209-5086 temper H112’ 1858 = ’B209-5154 temper 0’ 1860 = ’B209-5154 temper H32’ 1862 = ’B209-5154 temper H34’ 1864 = ’B209-5154 temper H112’ 1866 = ’B209-5254 temper 0’ 1868 = ’B209-5254 temper H32’ 1870 = ’B209-5254 temper H34’ 1872 = ’B209-5254 temper H112’ 1874 = ’B209-5454 temper 0’ 1876 = ’B209-5454 temper H32’ 1878 = ’B209-5454 temper H34’ 1880 = ’B209-5454 temper H112’ 1882 = ’B209-5456 temper 0’ 1884 = ’B209-5456 temper H321’ 1886 = ’B209-6061 temper T4’ 1888 = ’B209-6061 temper T4, wld’

444

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 1890 1892 1894 1896 1898 1900 1902 1904 1906 1908 1910 1912 1914 1916 1918 1920 1922

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’B209-6061 temper ’B209-6061 temper ’B209-6061 temper ’B209-Alclad 3003 ’B209-Alclad 3003 ’B209-Alclad 3003 ’B209-Alclad 3003 ’B209-Alclad 3004 ’B209-Alclad 3004 ’B209-Alclad 3004 ’B209-Alclad 3004 ’B209-Alclad 6061 ’B209-Alclad 6061 ’B209-Alclad 6061 ’B209-Alclad 6061 ’B209-Alclad 6061 ’B209-Alclad 6061

T6’ T6, wld’ T651’ temper 0’ temper H12’ temper H14’ temper H112’ temper 0’ temper H32’ temper H34’ temper H112’ temper T4’ temper T4, wld’ temper T6’ temper T6, wld’ temper T451’ temper T651’

1930 1932 1934 1936 1938 1940 1942 1944 1946 1948 1950 1952 1954 1956 1958 1960 1962 1964 1966 1968 1970 1972 1974 1976 1978 1980 1982 1984 1986 1988 1990 1992 1994 2010 2012 2014

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’B210-1060 temper ’B210-1060 temper ’B210-1060 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-3003 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5052 temper ’B210-5083 temper ’B210-5083 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5086 temper ’B210-5154 temper ’B210-5154 temper ’B210-5456 temper ’B210-5456 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6061 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-6063 temper ’B210-Alclad 3002 ’B210-Alclad 3003 ’B210-Alclad 3003 ’B210-Alclad 3002 ’B221-1060 temper ’B221-1060 temper ’B221-1100 temper

0’ H14’ H112’ 0’ H14’ H18’ H112’ 0’ H32’ H34’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H32’ H34’ H112’ 0’ H34’ 0’ H112’ T4’ T4, wld’ T6’ T6, wld’ T4’ T4, wld’ T5, wld’ T6’ T6, wld’ temper 0’ temper H14’ temper H18’ temper H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

445

Appendix: Codelists 2016 2018 2020 2022 2024 2026 2028 2030 2032 2034 2036 2038 2040 2042 2044 2046 2048 2050 2052 2054 2056 2070 2072 2074 2076 2078 2080 2082 2084 2086 2088 2090 2092 2094 2096 2098 2100 2102 2104 2106 2108 2110 2112 2114 2116 2118 2120 2122 2124 2126 2128 2130 2140 2142

446

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’B221-1100 temper ’B221-3003 temper ’B221-3003 temper ’B221-5052 temper ’B221-5053 temper ’B221-5086 temper ’B221-5154 temper ’B221-5454 temper ’B221-5456 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6061 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-6063 temper ’B221-Alclad 3003 ’B221-Alclad 3003 ’B241-1060 temper ’B241-1060 temper ’B241-1100 temper ’B241-1100 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-3003 temper ’B241-5052 temper ’B241-5083 temper ’B241-5083 temper ’B241-5086 temper ’B241-5086 temper ’B241-5454 temper ’B241-5454 temper ’B241-5456 temper ’B241-5456 temper ’B241-5462 temper ’B241-5462 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6061 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-6063 temper ’B241-Alclad 3003 ’B241-Alclad 3003 ’B247-3003 temper ’B247-3003 temper

H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ 0’ T4’ T4, wld’ T6’ T6, wld’ T4’ T4, wld’ T5’ T5, wld’ T6’ T6, wld’ temper 0’ temper H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H18’ H112’ 0’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ 0’ H112’ T4’ T4, wld’ T6, NPD 1’ T6, wld’ T4’ T4, wld’ T5’ T5, wld’ T6’ T6, wld’ temper 0’ temper H112’ H112’ H112, wld’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 2144 2146 2148 2150 2152 2160 2162 2164 2166 2168 2170 2172 2174 2176 2178 2180 2182 2184 2186 2188 2190 2192 2194 2196 2198 2200 2202 2220 2222 2224 2226 2228 2230 2232 2234 2236 2238 2240 2242 2244 2246 2248 2250 2252 2254

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’B247-5083 temper 0’ ’B247-5083 temper H112’ ’B247-5083 temper H112, wld’ ’B247-6061 temper T6’ ’B247-6061 temper T6, wld’ ’B345-1060 temper 0’ ’B345-1060 temper H112’ ’B345-3003 temper 0’ ’B345-3003 temper H18’ ’B345-3003 temper H112’ ’B345-5083 temper 0’ ’B345-5083 temper H112’ ’B345-5086 temper 0’ ’B345-5086 temper H112’ ’B345-6061 temper T4’ ’B345-6061 temper T4, wld’ ’B345-6061 temper T6, NPD 1’ ’B345-6061 temper T6, wld’ ’B345-6063 temper T4’ ’B345-6063 temper T4, wld’ ’B345-6063 temper T5’ ’B345-6063 temper T5, wld’ ’B345-6063 temper T6’ ’B345-6063 temper T6, wld’ ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper 0’ ’B345-Alclad 3002 temper H112’ ’B361-WP1060 temper 0’ ’B361-WP1060 temper H112’ ’B361-WP1100 temper 0’ ’B361-WP1100 temper H112’ ’B361-WP3003 temper 0’ ’B361-WP3003 temper H112’ ’B361-WP5154 temper 0’ ’B361-WP5154 temper H112’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T4’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T4, wld’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T6’ ’B361-WP6061 temper T6, wld’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T4’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T4, wld’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T6’ ’B361-WP6063 temper T6, wld’ ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper 0’ ’B361-AP Alclad 3003 temper H112’

Other Materials 2300-2999 2310 = ’B337-1’ 2311 = ’B337-2’ 2313 = ’B337-3’ 2317 = ’B337-7’ 2320 = ’C76-CLIII’ 2325 = ’C443’ 2350 = ’C700’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

447

Appendix: Codelists 2400 2402 2440 2442

= = = =

’D1785-PVC1120’ ’D2467-PVC1120’ ’F439-CPVC4120’ ’F441-CPVC4120’

Gaskets 3000-3999] 3051 = ’G51’ [Flat, 3052 = ’G52’ [Flat, 3076 = ’G76’ [Flat, 3077 = ’G77’ [Flat, 3078 = ’G78’ [Flat, 3079 = ’G79’ [Flat, 3101 = ’G101’ [Flat, 3102 = ’G102’ [Flat, 3103 = ’G103’ [Flat, 3111 = ’G111’ [Flat, 3112 = ’G112’ [Flat, 3154 = ’G154’ [Flat, 3171 = ’G171’ [Flat, 3175 = ’G175’ [Flat, 3189 = ’G189’ [Flat, 3195 = ’G195’ [Flat, 3204 = ’G204’ [Flat, 3210 = ’G210’ [Flat, 3231 = ’G231’ [Flat, 3234 = ’G234’ [Flat, 3236 = ’G236’ [Flat, 3241 = ’G241’ [Corr, 3244 = ’G244’ [Corr, 3246 = ’G246’ [Corr,

448

org fib, nitrile binder] org fib, nitrile binder, full face] graph] graph, full face] graph, 304 tang reinf] graph, 304 wire mesh reinf] asb] asb, full face] asb, wire mesh reinf] blue-asb] blue-asb, full face] Buna-N] Hypalon] Kel-F] neoprene] polyethylene] Teflon] Viton] soft-iron] 304] 321/347 soft-iron] 304] 321/347

3251 3256 3261 3262 3266 3267 3271 3272 3276 3277 3281 3282 3286

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

’G251’ ’G256’ ’G261’ ’G262’ ’G266’ ’G267’ ’G271’ ’G272’ ’G276’ ’G277’ ’G281’ ’G282’ ’G286’

[Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat [Flat

dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl

jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd,

PTFE-J, asb-F] Teflon-J, blue-asb-F] soft-iron-J, graph-F] soft-iron-J, asb-F] low-C-steel-J, graph-F] low-C-steel-J, asb-F] 304-J, graph-F] 304-J, asb-F] 321/347-J, graph-F] 321/347-J, asb-F] I600-J, graph-F] I600-J, asb-F] I800-J, graph-F

3306 3307 3311 3312 3316 3317 3321 3322 3326

= = = = = = = = =

’G306’ ’G307’ ’G311’ ’G312’ ’G316’ ’G317’ ’G321’ ’G322’ ’G326’

[Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr [Corr

dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl dbl

jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd, jktd,

soft-iron-J, graph-F] soft-iron-J, asb-F] low-C-steel-J, graph-F] low-C-steel-J, asb-F] 304-J, graph-F] 304-J, asb-F] 321/347-J, graph-F] 321/347-J, asb-F] I600-J, graph-F]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 3327 = ’G327’ 3331 = ’G331’

[Corr dbl jktd, I600-J, asb-F] [Corr dbl jktd, I800-J, graph-F

3356 = ’G356’ 3361 = ’G361’ 3366 = ’G366’

[Inlaid corr, soft-iron-J, asb-chords] [Inlaid corr, low-C-steel-J, asb-chords] [Inlaid corr, 304-J, asb-chords

3403 3404 3408 3429 3435 3436 3441

= = = = = = =

’G403’ ’G404’ ’G408’ ’G429’ ’G435’ ’G436’ ’G441’

[O [O [O [O [O [O [O

3451 3452 3463 3466 3468 3473

= = = = = =

’G451’ ’G452’ ’G463’ ’G466’ ’G468’ ’G473’

[BX [BX [BX [BX [BX [BX

ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring,

soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] I-X-750

3476 3477 3488 3491 3493 3498

= = = = = =

’G476’ ’G477’ ’G488’ ’G491’ ’G493’ ’G498’

[RX [RX [RX [RX [RX [RX

ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring,

soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] I-X-750

3551 3552 3556 3563 3566 3568 3569 3573

= = = = = = = =

’G551’ ’G552’ ’G556’ ’G563’ ’G566’ ’G568’ ’G569’ ’G573’

[Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag [Octag

3601 3602 3606 3608 3610 3613 3616 3618 3619 3623

= = = = = = = = = =

’G601’ ’G602’ ’G606’ ’G608’ ’G610’ ’G613’ ’G616’ ’G618’ ’G619’ ’G623’

[Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval [Oval

3651 3653 3655 3657 3659

= = = = =

’G651’ ’G653’ ’G655’ ’G657’ ’G659’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring,

Buna-N] butyl] EDPM] nitrile] Saran] synthetic rubber] Viton

ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring, ring,

soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] 347, 140 BHN max] I-X-750 soft-iron, 90 BHN max] lo-C, 120 BHN max] 5Cr-0.5Mo, 130 BHN max] 9Cr-1Mo, 130 BHN max] 410, 170 BHN max] 304, 140 BHN max] 316, 140 BHN max] 321, 140 BHN max] 347, 140 BHN max] I-X-750

304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] blue-asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

449

Appendix: Codelists

450

3661 3663 3665 3669

= = = =

’G661’ ’G663’ ’G665’ ’G669’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

304-W, 304-W, 304-W, 304-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 304-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 304-IR

3671 3673 3675 3677 3679 3681 3683 3685 3689

= = = = = = = = =

’G671’ ’G673’ ’G675’ ’G677’ ’G679’ ’G681’ ’G683’ ’G685’ ’G689’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W, 316-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] crodidolite asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 316-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316-IR

3691 3693 3695 3699 3701 3703 3705 3709

= = = = = = = =

’G691’ ’G693’ ’G695’ ’G699’ ’G701’ ’G703’ ’G705’ ’G709’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W, 316L-W,

3711 3713 3715 3719 3721 3723 3725 3729

= = = = = = = =

’G711’ ’G713’ ’G715’ ’G719’ ’G721’ ’G723’ ’G725’ ’G729’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W, 321-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 321-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 321-IR

3731 3733 3735 3739 3741 3743 3745 3749

= = = = = = = =

’G731’ ’G733’ ’G735’ ’G739’ ’G741’ ’G743’ ’G745’ ’G749’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W, 347-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 347-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 347-IR

3751 3753 3755 3761 3763 3765 3771 3773 3775 3781 3783 3785

= = = = = = = = = = = =

’G751’ ’G753’ ’G755’ ’G761’ ’G763’ ’G765’ ’G771’ ’G773’ ’G775’ ’G781’ ’G783’ ’G785’

[Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd, [Sprl-wnd,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] Teflon-F, CS-CR] mica/gra-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] graph-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] asb-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR] Teflon-F, CS-CR, 316L-IR

I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I600-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W, I800-W,

mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, I600-O&IR] graph-F, I600-O&IR] asb-F, I600-O&IR mica/graph-F, CS-CR] graph-F, CS-CR] asb-F, CS-CR] mica/graph-F, I800-O&IR] graph-F, I800-O&IR] asb-F, I800-O&IR

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists Bolting 4000-4999] 4011 = ’B11’ 4012 = ’B12’ 4014 = ’B14’ 4015 = ’B15’ 4021 = ’B21’ 4022 = ’B22’ 4031 = ’B31’ 4032 = ’B32’ 4033 = ’B33’ 4035 = ’B35’ 4038 = ’B38’ 4039 = ’B39’ 4041 = ’B41’ 4042 = ’B42’ 4044 = ’B44’ 4045 = ’B45’ 4046 = ’B46’ 4047 = ’B47’ 4048 = ’B48’ 4050 = ’B50’ 4051 = ’B51’ 4061 = ’B61’ 4062 = ’B62’ 4064 = ’B64’ 4065 = ’B65’ 4066 = ’B66’ 4067 = ’B67’ 4068 = ’B68’ 4069 = ’B69’ 4071 = ’B71’ 4074 = ’B74’ 4075 = ’B75’ 4076 = ’B76’ 4077 = ’B77’ 4078 = ’B78’ 4079 = ’B79’ 4080 = ’B80’ 4081 = ’B81’ 4082 = ’B82’ 4084 = ’B84’ 4085 = ’B85’

[A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3] [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-3] [A193-B5, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] [A193-B5, lub, w/A194-4] [A193-B6, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-6] [A193-B6, lub, w/A194-6] [A193-B7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H] [A193-B7, lub, w/A194-2H] [A193-B7 zinc coated w/A194-2H zinc coated] [A193-B7 galv w/A194-2H galv] [A193-B7M, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-2H] [A193-B7M, lub, w/A194-2H] [A193-B8 Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8] [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8] [A193-B8C Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8C] [A193-B8C Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8C] [A193-B8 Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8] [A193-B8M Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M] [A193-B8M Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8M [A193-B8T Cl.1, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8T] [A193-B8T Cl.1, lub, w/A194-8T] [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-3] [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-3] [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-4] [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-7] [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-7] [A193-B16, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8M] [A193-B16, lub, w/A194-8M] [A307-B w/A563-A] [A320-L7, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-4] [A320-L7, lub, w/A194-4] [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-8] [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-8] [A320-B8, >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8] [A320-B8, lub, w/A194-B8] [A320-B8T Cl.1 >=1.5" lub, w/A194-B8] [A320-B8T Cl.1 lub, w/A194-B8] [A325 w/A325] [A453-660, >=1.5" lub, w/A453-660] [A453-660, lub, w/A453-660

4500 = ’Undefined’ Materials for British Standards - Ranges used 6000-7999 carbon 6000 = 6001 = 6002 = 6003 = 6004 =

steel pipes and tubes BS3601 ’BS3601:BW320’ ’BS3601:ERW320’ ’BS3601:ERW360’ ’BS3601:ERW430’ ’BS3601:S360’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

451

Appendix: Codelists 6005 = ’BS3601:S430’ 6006 = ’BS3601:SAW430’ steel pipes and tubes BS3602 part 1 1987 6010 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 1’ 6011 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS360:Cat 2’ 6012 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 1’ 6013 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS430:Cat 2’ 6014 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 1’ 6015 = ’BS3602:PART 1:HFS500Nb:Cat 2’ 6016 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 1’ 6017 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS360:Cat 2’ 6018 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 1’ 6019 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS430:Cat 2’ 6020 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 1’ 6021 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CFS500Nb:Cat 2’ 6022 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 1’ 6023 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW360:Cat 2’ 6024 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 1’ 6025 = ’BS3602:PART 1:ERW430:Cat 2’ 6026 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 1’ 6027 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW360:Cat 2’ 6028 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 1’ 6029 = ’BS3602:PART 1:CEW430:Cat 2’ steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS3602 part 2 6030 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 1’ 6031 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW410:cat 2’ 6032 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 1’ 6033 = ’BS3602:PART 2:SAW460:cat 2’ steel pipes and tubes 6040 = ’BS3603 HFS410 6041 = ’BS3603 HFS410 6042 = ’BS3603 CFS410 6043 = ’BS3603 CFS410 6044 = ’BS3603 ERW410 6045 = ’BS3603 ERW410 6046 = ’BS3603 CEW410 6047 = ’BS3603 CEW410 6048 = ’BS3603 HFS503 6049 = ’BS3603 HFS503 6050 = ’BS3603 CFS503 6051 = ’BS3603 CFS503 6052 = ’BS3603 HFS509 6053 = ’BS3603 HFS509 6054 = ’BS3603 CFS509 6055 = ’BS3603 CFS509

low temp prop BS3603 1977 LT 50 Cat 1’ LT 50 Cat 2’ LT 50 Cat 1’ LT 50 Cat 2’ LT 50 Cat 1’ LT 50 Cat 2’ LT 50 Cat 1’ LT 50 Cat 2’ LT 100 Cat 1’ LT 100 Cat 2’ LT 100 Cat 1’ LT 100 Cat 2’ LT 196 Cat 1’ LT 196 Cat 2’ LT 196 Cat 1’ LT 196 Cat 2’

steel pipes and tubes elevated temp prop BS3604 6060 = ’BS3604:HFS620-460 Cat 1’ 6061 = ’BS3604:CFS620-460 Cat 1’ 6062 = ’BS3604:ERW620-460 Cat 1’ 6063 = ’BS3604:CEW620-460 Cat 1’

452

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 6064 6065 6066 6067 6068 6069 6070 6071 6072 6073 6074 6075 6076 6077 6078 6079 6080 6081 6082 6083 6084 6085 6086 6087 6088 6089 6090 6091 6092 6093 6094 6095 6096 6097 6098 6099 6100 6101 6102 6103 6104 6105 6106 6107

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS3604:HFS620-460 ’BS3604:CFS620-460 ’BS3604:ERW620-460 ’BS3604:CEW620-460 ’BS3604:HFS620-440 ’BS3604:CFS620-440 ’BS3604:ERW620-440 ’BS3604:CEW620-440 ’BS3604:HFS620-440 ’BS3604:CFS620-440 ’BS3604:ERW620-440 ’BS3604:CEW620-440 ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat ’BS3604:HFS621 Cat ’BS3604:CFS621 Cat ’BS3604:ERW621 Cat ’BS3604:CEW621 Cat ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat ’BS3604:HFS660 Cat ’BS3604:CFS660 Cat ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat ’BS3604:HFS622 Cat ’BS3604:CFS622 Cat ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat ’BS3604:HFS625 Cat ’BS3604:CFS625 Cat ’BS3604:HFS629-470 ’BS3604:CFS629-470 ’BS3604:HFS629-470 ’BS3604:CFS629-470 ’BS3604:HFS629-590 ’BS3604:CFS629-590 ’BS3604:HFS629-590 ’BS3604:CFS629-590 ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat ’BS3604:HFS762 Cat ’BS3604:CFS762 Cat

Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat 1’ 1’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat Cat 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’

2’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 2’ 2’

1’ 1’ 2’ 2’ 1’ 1’ 2’ 2’

SS pipes and tubes for pressure purposes BS3605:1973 6110 = ’BS3605 304S14’ 6111 = ’BS3605 304S18’ 6112 = ’BS3605 304S59’ 6113 = ’BS3605 304S22’ 6114 = ’BS3605 304S25’ 6115 = ’BS3605 316S14’ 6116 = ’BS3605 316S18’ 6117 = ’BS3605 316S59’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

453

Appendix: Codelists 6118 6119 6120 6121 6122 6123 6124 6125 6126

= = = = = = = = =

plates 6200 = 6201 = 6202 = 6203 = 6204 = 6205 = 6206 = 6207 = 6208 = 6209 = 6210 = 6211 = 6212 = 6213 = 6214 = 6215 = 6216 = 6217 = 6218 = 6219 = 6220 = 6221 = 6222 = 6223 = 6224 = 6225 = 6226 = 6227 = 6228 = 6229 = 6230 = 6231 = 6232 = 6233 = 6234 = 6235 = 6236 = 6237 = 6238 = 6239 = 6240 = 6241 = 6242 =

454

’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605 ’BS3605

316S22’ 316S26’ 321S18’ 321S59(1010)’ 321S59(1105)’ 321S22’ 347S18’ 347S59’ 347S17’

BS1501 part ’BS1501-141 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-151 ’BS1501-154 ’BS1501-154 ’BS1501-154 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-161 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-164 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-223

1 1980 360A’ 360A’ 400A’ 430A’ 360B’ 400B’ 430B’ 360A’ 400A’ 430A’ 360A’ 400A’ 430A’ 360B’ 400B’ 430B’ 360A RT’ 360A LT0’ 360A LT20’ 360B RT’ 360B LT0’ 360B LT20’ 400A RT’ 400A LT0’ 400A LT20’ 400B RT’ 400B LT0’ 400B LT20’ 460A RT’ 460A LT0’ 460A LT15’ 460A LT30’ 460B RT’ 460B LT0’ 460B LT15’ 460B LT30’ 490A RT’ 490A LT0’ 490A LT15’ 490A LT30’ 490B RT’ 490B LT0’ 490B LT15’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 6243 6244 6245 6246 6247 6248 6249 6250 6251 6252 6253 6254 6255 6256 6257 6258 6259 6260 6261 6262 6263 6264 6265 6266 6267 6268 6269 6270 6271 6272 6273 6274 6275 6276 6277 6278 6279 6280 6281 6282 6283 6284 6285 6286 6287 6288 6289 6290 6291 6292 6293 6294 6295 6296

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1501-223 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-224 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225

490B 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400A 400B 400B 400B 400B 400B 400B 430A 430A 430A 430A 430A 430A 430B 430B 430B 430B 430B 430B 460A 460A 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 490B 460A 460A 460A 460A 460B

LT30’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ RT’ LT0’ LT20’ LT30’ LT40’ LT50’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ LT60’ LT20’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

455

Appendix: Codelists 6297 6298 6299 6300 6301 6302 6303 6304 6305

= = = = = = = = =

’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225 ’BS1501-225

460B 460B 460B 490A 490A 490A 490B 490B 490B

LT30’ LT50’ LT60’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’ LT20’ LT30’ LT50’

steel plates BS1501 part 2 1988 6310 = ’BS1501-243’ 6311 = ’BS1501-271’ 6312 = ’BS1501-281’ 6313 = ’BS1501-620’ 6314 = ’BS1501-621’ 6315 = ’BS1501-622-515’ 6316 = ’BS1501-622-690’ 6317 = ’BS1501-660’ 6318 = ’BS1501-503’ 6319 = ’BS1501-510’ 6320 = ’BS1501-828’ steel plates BS1501 part 3 1973 6321 = ’BS1501-403S17A’ 6322 = ’BS1501-405S17A’ 6323 = ’BS1501-304S12A’ 6324 = ’BS1501-304S15A’ 6325 = ’BS1501-304S49A’ 6326 = ’BS1501-321S12A’ 6327 = ’BS1501-321S49A’ 6328 = ’BS1501-347S17A’ 6329 = ’BS1501-347S49A’ 6330 = ’BS1501-316S12A’ 6331 = ’BS1501-316S16A’ 6332 = ’BS1501-316S37A’ 6333 = ’BS1501-316S49A’ 6334 = ’BS1501-320S17A’ 6335 = ’BS1501-310S24A’ 6336 = ’BS1501-NA15A’ 6337 = ’BS1501-NA16A’ 6338 = ’BS1501-460S52A’ 6339 = ’BS1501-304S62A’ 6340 = ’BS1501-304S65A’ 6341 = ’BS1501-304S87A’ 6342 = ’BS1501-347S67A’ 6343 = ’BS1501-316S62A’ 6344 = ’BS1501-316S66A’ 6345 = ’BS1501-316S82A’ 6351 = ’BS1501-403S17B’ 6352 = ’BS1501-405S17B’ 6353 = ’BS1501-304S12B’ 6354 = ’BS1501-304S15B’ 6355 = ’BS1501-304S49B’

456

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 6356 6357 6358 6359 6360 6361 6362 6363 6364 6365 6366 6367 6368 6369 6370 6371 6372 6373 6374 6375 6376

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1501-351S12B’ ’BS1501-351S49B’ ’BS1501-347S17B’ ’BS1501-347S49B’ ’BS1501-316S12B’ ’BS1501-316S16B’ ’BS1501-316S37B’ ’BS1501-316S49B’ ’BS1501-320S17B’ ’BS1501-310S24B’ ’BS1501-NA15B’ ’BS1501-NA16B’ ’BS1501-460S52B’ ’BS1501-304S62B’ ’BS1501-304S65B’ ’BS1501-304S87B’ ’BS1501-377S67B’ ’BS1501-316S62B’ ’BS1501-316S66B’ ’BS1501-316S82B’ ’BS1501-460S52A LT70’

steel forgings 6380 = ’BS1503 6381 = ’BS1503 6382 = ’BS1503 6383 = ’BS1503 6384 = ’BS1503 6385 = ’BS1503 6386 = ’BS1503 6387 = ’BS1503 6388 = ’BS1503 6389 = ’BS1503 6390 = ’BS1503 6391 = ’BS1503 6392 = ’BS1503 6393 = ’BS1503 6394 = ’BS1503 6395 = ’BS1503 6396 = ’BS1503 6397 = ’BS1503 6398 = ’BS1503 6399 = ’BS1503 6400 = ’BS1503 6401 = ’BS1503 6402 = ’BS1503 6403 = ’BS1503 6404 = ’BS1503 6405 = ’BS1503 6406 = ’BS1503 6407 = ’BS1503 6408 = ’BS1503 6409 = ’BS1503 6410 = ’BS1503

to BS1503 1980 164-490’ 221-410’ 221-430’ 221-460’ 221-490’ 221-510’ 221-530’ 221-550’ 223-410’ 223-430’ 223-460’ 223-490’ 223-510’ 224-410’ 224-430’ 224-460’ 224-490’ 224-510’ 245-420’ 620-440’ 620-540’ 621-460’ 660-460’ 271-560’ 622-490’ 622-560’ 622-650’ 625-520’ 625-590’ 503-490’ 509-690’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

457

Appendix: Codelists

458

6411 6412 6413 6414

= = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

410S21’ 420S29’ 403S17’ 405S17’

6415 6416 6417 6418 6419 6420 6421 6422 6423 6424 6425 6426 6427 6428 6429

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

304S11’ 304S31’ 304S51’ 347S31’ 347S51’ 321S31’ 321S51-490’ 321S51-510’ 316S11’ 316S13’ 316S31’ 316S33’ 316S51’ 320S33’ 310S31’

6430 6431 6432 6433 6434 6435 6436 6437 6438 6439 6440 6441 6442 6443 6444 6445 6446

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

164-490E’ 221-430E’ 221-460E’ 221-490E’ 221-510E’ 221-530E’ 221-550E’ 223-410E’ 223-430E’ 223-460E’ 223-490E’ 223-510E’ 224-410E’ 224-430E’ 224-460E’ 224-490E’ 224-510E’

6447 6448 6449 6450 6451 6452 6453 6454 6455 6456 6457 6458 6459 6460 6461

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

245-420E’ 620-440E’ 620-540E’ 621-460E’ 660-460E’ 271-560E’ 622-490E’ 622-560E’ 622-650E’ 625-520E’ 625-590E’ 410S21E’ 420S29E’ 403S17E’ 405S17E’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 6462 6463 6464 6465 6466 6467 6468 6469 6470 6471 6472 6473 6474

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

304S11E’ 304S31E’ 304S51E’ 347S31E’ 347S51E’ 321S31E’ 321S51-490E’ 321S51-510E’ 316S11E’ 316S13E’ 316S31E’ 316S33E’ 316S51E’

6475 6476 6477 6478 6479 6480 6481 6482 6483 6484 6485 6486 6487 6488 6489 6490 6491 6492 6493 6494 6495 6496 6497 6498

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

223-410-LT10’ 223-410-LT20’ 223-410-LT50’ 223-430-LT10’ 223-430-LT15’ 223-430-LT40’ 223-460-LT0’ 223-460-LT10’ 223-460-LT20’ 223-490-LT0’ 223-490-LT10’ 223-510-LT0’ 224-410-LT10’ 224-410-LT20’ 224-410-LT50’ 224-430-LT10’ 224-430-LT15’ 224-430-LT40’ 224-460-LT0’ 224-460-LT10’ 224-460-LT20’ 224-490-LT0’ 224-490-LT10’ 224-510-LT0’

6499 = ’BS1503 503-490-LT80’ 6500 = ’BS1503 509-690-LT196’ 6501 6502 6503 6504 6505 6506 6507 6508 6509 6510

= = = = = = = = = =

’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503 ’BS1503

304S11-LT196’ 304S31-LT196’ 347S31-LT196’ 321S31-LT196’ 321S51-490’ 321S51-510’ 316S11-LT196’ 316S13-LT196’ 316S31-LT196’ 316S33-LT196’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

459

Appendix: Codelists steel casting to BS1504 1976 6520 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430A’ 6521 = ’BS1504-161 grade 480A’ 6522 = ’BS1504-161 grade 540A’ 6523 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430E’ 6524 = ’BS1504-161 grade 480E’ 6525 = ’BS1504-161 grade 430A-LT40’ 6526 = ’BS1504-245A’ 6527 = ’BS1504-245B’ 6528 = ’BS1504-245A-LT50’ 6529 = ’BS1504-503-LT60’ 6530 = ’BS1504-621A’ 6531 = ’BS1504-622A’ 6532 = ’BS1504-622E’ 6533 = ’BS1504-623A’ 6534 = ’BS1504-625A’ 6535 = ’BS1504-625E’ 6536 = ’BS1504-629A’ 6537 = ’BS1504-660A’ 6538 = ’BS1504-420C29A’ 6539 = ’BS1504-425C11A’ 6540 = ’BS1504-304C15A’ 6541 = ’BS1504-304C15A-LT196’ 6542 = ’BS1504-304C12A’ 6543 = ’BS1504-304C12A-LT196’ 6544 = ’BS1504-347C17A’ 6545 = ’BS1504-347C17A-LT196’ 6546 = ’BS1504-315C16A’ 6547 = ’BS1504-315C16A-LT196’ 6548 = ’BS1504-316C12A’ 6549 = ’BS1504-316C16A’ 6550 = ’BS1504-316C71A’ 6551 = ’BS1504-318C17A’ 6552 = ’BS1504-316C16E’ 6553 = ’BS1504-316C71E’ 6554 = ’BS1504-316C12A-LT196’ 6555 = ’BS1504-316C16A-LT196’ 6556 = ’BS1504-316C71A-LT196’ 6557 = ’BS1504-317C12A’ 6558 = ’BS1504-317C16A’ 6559 = ’BS1504-364C11A’ 6560 = ’BS1504-332C11A’ 6561 = ’BS1504-310C40A’ 6562 = ’BS1504-330C11A’ steel bars and billets for bolting BS1506 1986 6570 = ’BS1506-162’ 6571 = ’BS1506-253’ 6572 = ’BS1506-253-LT100’ 6573 = ’BS1506-509-650’ 6574 = ’BS1506-509-650-LT196’ 6575 = ’BS1506-509-690’ 6576 = ’BS1506-509-690-LT196’ 6577 = ’BS1506-630-790’

460

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 6578 6579 6580 6581 6582 6583 6584 6585 6586 6587 6588 6589 6590 6591 6592 6593 6594 6595 6596 6597 6598 6599 6600 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 6606 6607 6608 6609 6610 6611 6612 6613 6614 6615 6616 6617 6618 6619 6620 6621 6622 6623 6624

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS1506-630-790-LT100’ ’BS1506-630-790-LT75’ ’BS1506-630-860’ ’BS1506-630-860-LT100’ ’BS1506-630-690’ ’BS1506-630-690-LT100’ ’BS1506-631-850’ ’BS1506-670-860’ ’BS1506-671-850’ ’BS1506-681-820’ ’BS1506-410S21-690’ ’BS1506-410S21-720’ ’BS1506-410S21-760’ ’BS1506-410S21-750’ ’BS1506-410S21-770’ ’BS1506-416S29’ ’BS1506-286S31’ ’BS1506-286S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S31’ ’BS1506-304S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S51’ ’BS1506-304S61’ ’BS1506-304S61-LT196’ ’BS1506-304S71’ ’BS1506-304S71-LT196’ ’BS1506-303S22’ ’BS1506-316S31’ ’BS1506-316S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S33’ ’BS1506-316S33-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S51’ ’BS1506-316S53’ ’BS1506-316S61’ ’BS1506-316S61-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S63’ ’BS1506-316S63-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S65’ ’BS1506-316S65-LT196’ ’BS1506-316S67’ ’BS1506-316S67-LT196’ ’BS1506-321S31’ ’BS1506-321S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-321S51-490’ ’BS1506-321S51-520’ ’BS1506-347S31’ ’BS1506-347S31-LT196’ ’BS1506-347S51’

7999 = ’undefined’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

461

Appendix: Codelists

CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999) NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-7999 are reserved for values that apply to US practices. Codelist numbers 8000-31999 are reserved for values that apply to practices in other countries. 1 = [Blank] US Piping Material Class Descriptions, 2-7999 Irons, F 2 = [FAY1W8] [8F0002] ’Gravity Head, Gray CI’ 3 = [FDYLW8] [8F0003] ’Gravity Head, DI Cement Lined’ 6 = [FDYLU9] [9F0006] ’AWWA 150# MJ, DI Cement Lined’ Carbon Steels, C 14 = [CAA5UA] [AC0014] ’CL125 FFFE, CS, Brnz Trim’ 16 = [CAA5VA] [AC0016] ’CL125 FFFE, Brnz Trim’ 19 = [CAALV1] [1C0019] ’CL150 FFFE, CS Cement Lined’ 31 = [CAC5C1] [1C0031] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 32 = [CAC5C2] [2C0032] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 33 = [CAC5C4] [4C0033] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 35 = [CAC5G1] [1C0035] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 43 = [CAC5Q1] [1C0043] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’ 45 = [CAC5R1] [1C0045] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 48 = [CAC5U1] [1C0048] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 49 = [CAC7C1] [1C0049] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 50 = [CAC7C2] [2C0050] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 51 = [CAC7C4] [4C0051] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 65 = [CAC8C1] [1C0065] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 66 = [CAC8C2] [2C0066] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 73 = [CAC9C1] [1C0073] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 74 = [CAC9C2] [2C0074] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 75 = [CAC9C4] [4C0075] ’CL600 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 76 = [CAC9C5] [5C0076] ’CL900 RFFE, CS, Trim 8’ 105 = [CAD7K1] [1C0105] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 9’ 106 = [CAD7K2] [2C0106] ’CL300 RFFE, CS, Trim 9’ 146 = [CAF5S1] [1C0146] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, SS/TFE Trim’ 153 = [CAF7J1] [1C0153] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, Trim 13’ 171 = [CAFYC1] [1C0171] ’CL150 RFFE, CS, 316 Trim’ 176 = [CAH5C1] [1C0176] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 177 = [CAH5C2] [2C0177] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 182 = [CAH5G1] [1C0182] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 183 = [CAH5G2] [2C0183] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 185 = [CAH7C1] [1C0185] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 186 = [CAH7C2] [2C0186] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, Trim 8’ 320 = [CALYC2] [2C0320] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, CS, 316 Trim’ 389 = [CAU5P4] [4C0389] ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ASME-I)’ 390 = [CAU5P5] [5C0390] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’ 391 = [CAU5P6] [6C0391] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’ 394 = [CAU5Q2] [2C0394] ’CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’ 395 = [CAU5Q4] [4C0395] ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.1)’ 396 = [CAU5Q5] [5C0396] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)’

462

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 397 400 401 402 403 405 407 458 459 460 461 548 549 551 557 564 577 593 600 601 602 609 610 611 618 619 620 630 722 723 724 730 731 732 785 794 800 803 841 842

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

[CAU5Q6] [CAU5R2] [CAU5R4] [CAU5R5] [CAU5R6] [CAU5RF] [CAU7C6] [CAYYC1] [CAYYC2] [CDA1U1] [CDA5U1] [CJD7K1] [CJD7K2] [CJD7K5] [CJD8K2] [CJD9K1] [CJE7C2] [CJE9C2] [CJF5C1] [CJF5C2] [CJF5C4] [CJF7C1] [CJF7C2] [CJF7C4] [CJF9C1] [CJF9C2] [CJF9C4] [CJH7C4] [CJL7C2] [CJL7C4] [CJL7C5] [CJL9C2] [CJL9C4] [CJL9C5] [CJU7C6] [CJV5C6] [CJV7C6] [CJV7K6] [CPD5D1] [CPD5D2]

[6C0397] [2C0400] [4C0401] [5C0402] [6C0403] [FC0405] [6C0407] [1C0458] [2C0459] [1C0460] [1C0461] [1C0548] [2C0549] [5C0551] [2C0557] [1C0564] [2C0577] [2C0593] [1C0600] [2C0601] [4C0602] [1C0609] [2C0610] [4C0611] [1C0618] [2C0619] [4C0620] [4C0630] [2C0722] [4C0723] [5C0724] [2C0730] [4C0731] [5C0732] [6C0785] [6C0794] [6C0800] [6C0803] [1C0841] [2C0842]

’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1)’ ’CL300 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3)’ ’CL600 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 8, (ANSI-B31.3)’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’ ’CL800 BE/RFFE, CS, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3)’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, CS, Trim 8’ ’CL150 BE, CS’ ’CL300 BE, CS’ ’CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim’ ’CL150 FFFE, Galv CS, Brnz Trim’ ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 9’ ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL900 RFFE-SF, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 8’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, NACE, Trim 12’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, Killed CS, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2’ ’CL300 RFFE, Low Temp CS, Trim 2’

Low and Intermediate Alloy Steels, L 1669 = [LPFYG2] [2L1669] ’CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim’ 1670 = [LPTYG2] [2L1670] ’CL300 RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, 316 Trim’ 1671 = [LPH5B1] [1L1671] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1672 = [LPH5B2] [2L1672] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1673 = [LPH5B4] [4L1673] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1677 = [LPH7B1] [1L1677] ’CL150 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1678 = [LPH7B2] [2L1678] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1679 = [LPH7B4] [4L1679] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1691 = [LPH9B4] [4L1691] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1864 = [LPU5B6] [6L1864] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ 1868 = [LPU5P5] [5L1868] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’ 1869 = [LPU5P6] [6L1869] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ASME-I)’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

463

Appendix: Codelists 1874 1875 1882 1885 3013 3014 3027 3028 3029 3040 3041 3042 3048 3049 3193 3203 3204 3390 3725 3726 3746 3747 3748 3749

= [LPU5Q5] [5L1874] ’CL900 BE/RFFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1) = [LPU5Q6] [6L1875] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.1 = [LPU5R6] [6L1882] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 5, (ANSI-B31.3 = [LPU7B6] [6L1885] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 1.25Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC5B1] [1L3013] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC5B2] [2L3014] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC7B1] [1L3027] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC7B2] [2L3028] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC7B4] [4L3029] ’CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC8B1] [1L3040] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC8B2] [2L3041] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC8B4] [4L3042] ’CL600 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC9B1] [1L3048] ’CL150 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTC9B2] [2L3049] ’CL300 RFFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTH7B5] [5L3193] ’CL900 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LTH9B2] [2L3203] ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8’ = [LTH9B4] [4L3204] ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 5Cr-0.5Mo, NACE, Trim 8’ = [LTU7B6] [6L3390] ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 5Cr-0.5Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC7B1] [1L3725] ’CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC7B2] [2L3726] ’CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC9B1] [1L3746] ’CL150 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC9B2] [2L3747] ’CL300 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC9B4] [4L3748] ’CL600 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’ = [LVC9B5] [5L3749] ’CL900 RFFE, 9Cr-1Mo, Trim 8’

Stainless Steels, S 3977 = [SAC3T1] [1S3977] 3978 = [SAC3T2] [2S3978] 3979 = [SAC3T4] [4S3979] 3980 = [SAC3T5] [5S3980] 3984 = [SAD3C1] [1S3984] 3985 = [SAD3C2] [2S3985] 3988 = [SAD3E1] [1S3988] 3989 = [SAD3E2] [2S3989] 3991 = [SAD3F1] [1S3991] 4104 = [SAFYG1] [1S4104] 4218 = [SAM3T6] [6S4218] 4396 = [SBD3C2] [2S4396] 4488 = [SBF3U1] [1S4488] 5135 = [SED5C1] [1S5135] 5187 = [SEF3C1] [1S5187] 5188 = [SEF3C2] [2S5188] 5189 = [SEF3C4] [4S5189] 5197 = [SEF3G1] [1S5197] 6246 = [SHJ3B2] [2S6246] 6247 = [SHJ3B4] [4S6247] 6258 = [SHJ5B2] [2S6258] 6449 = [SHV3B5] [5S6449] 6450 = [SHV3B6] [6S6450] 6457 = [SHV5B6] [6S6457]

’CL150 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’ ’CL600 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’ ’CL900 RFFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’ ’CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’ ’CL300 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE, 304, Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE, 304, 316 Trim’ ’CL1500 RJFE, 304/CS Valves, Trim 8’ ’CL300 RFFE, 304L/316 Valves, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, 304/316 Valves, Trim 2’ ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’ ’CL600 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’ ’CL150 RFFE, 316, Trim 12’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’ ’CL600 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’ ’CL300 RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’ ’CL900 BE/RFFE-SF, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’ ’CL1500 BE/RJFE, 321/347 Valves, 347HF Trim’

Copper Alloys, K Nickel Alloys, N

464

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 7540 = [NGF5G1] [1N7540] ’CL150 RFFE, Inconel 600, Inconel Trim’ Aluminum Alloys, A Other Materials, X 7687 = [XCY1W8] [8X7687] ’Gravity Head, Vitrified Clay’ 7689 = [XEY1W8] [8X7689] ’Gravity Head, Reinforced Concrete’ 7733 = [XTY1U9] [9X7733] ’SCH-80, SE, PVC’ European Piping Material Class Descriptions, 8000-9999 8000 = ’Carbon steel’ 8001 = ’Stainless steel’ 8002 = ’Forged steel’ 8010 = ’Ferritic steel’ 8011 = ’Austenitic steel’ 8020 = ’Plastic’ 8021 = ’Fiber glass’ 8030 = ’Glass lined’ 8031 = ’Cement lined’ 8032 = ’Chloroprene (CR) lined’ 9999 = ’Undefined’ The names of Piping Materials Classes are determined as follows: o A list includes possible Piping Materials Classes. It consists of six character names which are established on the basis of the naming convention ABCDEF. The meaning of each of the characters in this code is defined below. Corresponding values are given in the lists included in subsequent pages. A.......materials group B.......materials type C.......detail features D.......corrosion allowance or type of lining E.......service description F.......pressure rating o The name of a Piping Materials Class is then determined from the convention FAXXX, where: F.......pressure rating A.......material group XXX.....sequence number from list in 2090-41-SN MATERIALS GROUP AND TYPE: (1st and 2nd character) Irons, F A= Gray iron D= Ductile iron G= Ferritic ductile iron J= Austenitic ductile iron Z= Other 1 Carbon Steels, C A= CS D= CS, galvanized

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

465

Appendix: Codelists G= J= M= P= X= Y= Z=

CS, jacketed CS, killed CS, killed, jacketed CS, low temp Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

Low and Intermediate Alloys, L A= 2Ni-1Cu C= 3.5Ni D= 5Ni G= 9Ni J= C-0.5Mo M= 0.75Cr-0.5Mo N= 1Cr-0.5Mo P= 1.25Cr-0.5Mo Q= 2Cr-0.5Mo R= 2.25Cr-1Mo S= 3Cr-1Mo T= 5Cr-0.5Mo U= 7Cr-0.5Mo V= 9Cr-1Mo X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Stainless Steels, S A= 304 B= 304L C= 304H D= 310 E= 316 F= 316L G= 316H H= 321 J= 321H K= 410S L= CHP10 M= CHP20 N= CPF10MC O= CPH8 P= CPK20 Q= UNS S31200 R= UNS S31250 S= UNS S31500 T= UNS S31803 U= UNS S32304 V= UNS S32550 W= Alloy 20 X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3

466

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists Copper Alloys, K A= Brass F= Bronze K= Copper P= 90Cu-10Ni R= 70Cu-30Ni X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Nickel Alloys, N A= Low C Ni D= Monel E= K-Monel F= R-Monel G= Inconel 600 H= Inconel 601 J= Inconel 625 L= Incoloy 800 M= Incoloy 800H N= Incoloy 801 P= Incoloy 802 Q= Incoloy 825 T= Hastelloy B U= Hastelloy C V= Hastelloy G X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Aluminum Alloys, A C= 3002 aluminum D= 3003 aluminum E= 3004 aluminum F= 5050 aluminum G= 5052 aluminum Q= 6061 aluminum R= 6063 aluminum S= Alclad X= Other 1 Y= Other 2 Z= Other 3 Other Materials, X A= Asbestos cement B= Borosilicate glass C= Clay, vitrified D= Concrete, prestressed E= Concrete, reinforced F= CPVC G= Epoxy/Glass fib J= Furan/Carbon K= Furan/Glass fib L= Kynar

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

467

Appendix: Codelists N= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z=

Nylon Polyester/Glass fib Polyethylene, high dens Polyethylene, low dens Polypropylene PVC Teflon Titanium Zirconium Other 1 Other 2 Other 3

MATERIALS CLASS DETAILS: (3rd character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= 0= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z=

Std FF, std trim Std FF, other Std RF, std trim Std RF, SS trim Std RF, Monel trim Std RF, other Std RF, other RFSF, std trim RFSF, SS trim RFSF, Monel trim RFSF, other RTJ, std trim RTJ, SS trim RTJ, Monel trim RTJ, other MJ, std trim MJ, SS trim MJ, Monel trim MJ, other BE, std trim BE, SS trim BE, Monel trim BE, other Other 1 Other 2

CA OR LINING TYPE: (4th character) 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= B=

468

None 0.020" 0.030" 0.050" 0.063" 0.10" 0.125" 0.188" 0.250" 405 clad 410S clad

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists C= D= E= F= G= H= J= L= M= N= O= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z=

304 clad 304L clad 316 clad 316L clad 317 clad 317L clad 321 clad Cement lined Epoxy lined Glass lined Kynar lined Polyester lined Polypropylene lined PTFE lined Saran lined Teflon lined TK31 lined R11 lined R15 lined R18 lined Other 1 Other 2

SERVICE: (5th character) A= B= C= D= E= F= G= H= J= K= L= P= Q= R= S= T= U= V= W= X= Y= Z=

Process, hottest (-20 to 1500+/- degF) Process, hotter (-20 to 1000+/- degF) Process, hot (-20 to 800 degF) Process, cold (-20 to -50 degF) Process, colder (-20 to -150 degF) Process, coldest (-20 to -425 degF) Process, other Category M Acid Caustic/Amine LPG Steam ASME-I Steam B31.1 Steam B31.3 Fuel gas, fuel oil Lube oil, seal oil Category D Firewater Sewer Instrument Other 1 Other 2

RATING: (6th character) 1= 2= 3= 4=

CL150 CL300 CL400 CL600

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

469

Appendix: Codelists 5= 6= 7= 8= 9= A= F= G= H= J= K= L= M= N= R= T= V=

CL900 CL1500 CL2500 GRAVHD OTHER CL125 CL800 CL2000 CL3000 CL4500 CL5000 CL6000 CL9000 CL10000 CL15000 CL20000 CL30000

CL160, Responsibility (25) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’By Contractor’ 3 = ’By Owner’ 4 = ’By A’ 5 = ’By B’ 6 = ’By C’ 7 = ’By D’ 8 = ’By E’ 9 = ’By Equip Vendor’ 10 = ’By Vendor’ 15 = ’By Piping’ 16 = ’By Instruments’ 25 = ’By Others’

CL180, Fabrication Category (99) NOTE: Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] 5 = ’CSSF, Contractor supplied, shop fabricated’ 7 = ’CSFF, Contractor supplied, field fabricated’ 15 = ’SSSF, Shop supplied, shop fabricated’ 17 = ’SSFF, Shop supplied, field fabricated’ 25 = ’FSSF, Field supplied, shop fabricated’ 27 = ’FSFF, Field supplied, field fabricated’ 35 = ’ASSF, A supplied, shop fabricated’ 37 = ’ASFF, A supplied, field fabricated’

470

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 45 47 95 97

= = = =

’BSSF, ’BSFF, ’OSSF, ’OSFF,

B supplied, shop fabricated’ B supplied, field fabricated’ Owner supplied, shop fabricated’ Owner supplied, field fabricated’

CL190, Coating Requirements (99) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’None’ 3 = ’Galv’ 4 = ’PS1.04’ 5 = ’PS1.07’ 6 = ’PS1.08’ 7 = ’PS1.09’ 8 = ’PS1.10’ 9 = ’PS1.11’ 10 = ’PS1.12’ 11 = ’PS1.13’ 12 = ’PS2.03’ 13 = ’PS2.05’ 14 = ’PS4.01’ 15 = ’PS4.02’ 16 = ’PS4.03’ 17 = ’PS4.04’ 18 = ’PS4.05’ 19 = ’PS8.01’ 20 = ’PS9.01’ 21 = ’PS10.01’ 22 = ’PS10.02’ 23 = ’PS11.01’ 24 = ’PS12.01’ 25 = ’PS13.01’ 26 = ’PS14.01’ 27 = ’PS16.01’ 28 = ’PS18.01’ 40 = ’Varies’

CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 2 3 4

= = = =

[Blank] ’NT’ [Not heat traced] ’HT’ [Heat traced] ’PHT’ [Partially heat traced]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

471

Appendix: Codelists

CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60) NOTE: Codelist numbers 3-39 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for non-jacketed pipe heat tracing. Codelist numbers 40-60 have been reserved for heat tracing media used for jacketed pipe heat tracing. It is important that this allocation be respected. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’N’ [None] For Non Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 3-39 3 = ’E’ [Electric] 10 = ’FA’ [Heat transfer fluid A] 11 = ’FB’ [Heat transfer fluid B] 12 = ’FC’ [Heat transfer fluid C] 16 = ’I’ [Impedance] 17 = ’MI’ [Magnetic induction] 18 = ’SKE’ [Skin effect] 20 = ’SH’ [Steam high pressure, CL900] 21 = ’SL’ [Steam low pressure, CL150] 22 = ’SM’ [Steam medium pressure, CL600] 23 = ’SN’ [Steam normal pressure, CL300] 24 = ’SS’ [Steam superheated] For Jacketed Pipe Heat Tracing, 40-60 40 = ’FAJ’ [Heat transfer fluid A] 41 = ’FBJ’ [Heat transfer fluid B] 42 = ’FCJ’ [Heat transfer fluid C] 50 = ’SHJ’ [Steam high pressure, CL900] 51 = ’SLJ’ [Steam low pressure, CL150] 52 = ’SMJ’ [Steam medium pressure, CL600] 53 = ’SNJ’ [Steam normal pressure, CL300] 54 = ’SSJ’ [Steam superheated]

CL220, Insulation Purpose (40) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’N’ 3 = ’P’ 4 = ’H’ 5 = ’HS’ 11 = ’HF’ 14 = ’AS’ 15 = ’C’ 16 = ’CV’ 17 = ’CS’ 18 = ’CH’ 20 = ’CF’ 21 = ’S’ 22 = ’SV’

472

[Not insulated] [Personnel protection insulated] [Hot insulated] [Hot insulated with sound attenuation] [Hot insulated with fire protection] [Anti-sweat insulated] [Cold insulated] [Cold insulated vacuum type] [Cold insulated with sound attenuation] [Cold and hot insulated] [Cold insulated with fire protection] [Sound attenuation insulated] [Sound attenuation insulation with vapor barrier]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 30 32 34 40

= = = =

’R11’ [Refractory lined, insulation] ’R15’ [Refractory lined, insulation/erosion] ’R18’ [Refractory lined, erosion] ’Varies’

CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’None’ 3 = ’CC1’ 4 = ’CC2’ 5 = ’CC3’ 6 = ’CC4’ 7 = ’CC5’ 15 = ’Varies’

CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999) NOTE: Use 2-199 for bolted types; 300-399 for male types and 400-599 for female types. Refer to Reference Data Manager (PD_DATA) Reference Guide for additional data. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’FE’

[Flanged end]

Use 11-15 for ends without integral integral gaskets. 10 = ’FFTP (11-19)’ [Flat-face 11 = ’FFFE’ [Flat-face 16 = ’FFFEWG’ [Flat-face

gaskets; 16-19 for ends with flanged termination type] flanged end] flanged end with integral gasket]

Use 21-25 for ends without integral gaskets; 26-29 for ends with integral gaskets. 20 = ’RFTP (21-29)’ [Raised-face flanged termination type] 21 = ’RFFE’ [Raised-face flanged end] 26 = ’RFFEWG’ [Raised-face flanged end with integral gasket] Use 31-35 for ends without integral gaskets; 36-39 for ends with integral gaskets. 30 = ’RJFTP (31-39)’ [RTJ-face flanged termination type] 31 = ’RJFE’ [RTJ-face flanged end] Use 41-45 for ends without integral gaskets; 46-49 for ends with integral gaskets. 40 = ’TMFTP (41-49)’ [Tongue/male-face flanged termination type] 41 = ’STFE’ [Small-tongue-face flanged end] 42 = ’LTFE’ [Large-tongue-face flanged end] 43 = ’SMFE’ [Small-male-face flanged end] 44 = ’LMFE’ [Large-male-face flanged end]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

473

Appendix: Codelists Use 51-55 for ends without integral gaskets; 56-59 for ends with integral gaskets. 50 = ’GFFTP (51-59)’ [Groove/female-face flanged termination type] 51 = ’SGFE’ [Small-groove-face flanged end] 52 = ’LGFE’ [Large-groove-face flanged end] 53 = ’SFFE’ [Small-female-face flanged end] 54 = ’LFFE’ [Large-female-face flanged end] Use 61-65 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 66-69 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 60 = ’FFLFTP (61-69)’ [Flat-face lap-flanged termination type] 61 = ’FFLFE [Flat-face lap-flanged end] Use 71-75 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 76-79 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 70 = ’RFLFTP (71-79)’ [Raised-face lap-flanged termination type] 71 = ’RFLFE’ [Raised-face lap-flanged end] Use 81-85 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 86-89 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 80 = ’RJFLFTP (81-89)’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged termination type] 81 = ’RJLFE’ [RTJ-face lap-flanged end] Use 91-95 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 96-99 for lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. 90 = ’TMFLFTP (91-99)’ [Tongue/male-face lap-flanged termination type] 91 = ’STLFE’ [Small-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 92 = ’LTLFE’ [Large-tongue-face lap-flanged end] 93 = ’SMLFE’ [Small-male-face lap-flanged end] 94 = ’LMLFE’ [Large-male-face lap-flanged end] Use for 100 101 102 103 104

101-105 for lap-flanged ends without integral gaskets; 106-109 lap-flanged ends with integral gaskets. = ’GFFLFTP (101-109)’[Groove/female-face lap-flanged termination type] = ’SGLFE’ [Small-groove-face lap-flanged end] = ’LGLFE’ [Large-groove-face lap-flanged end] = ’SFLFE’ [Small-female-face lap-flanged end] = ’LFLFE’ [Large-female-face lap-flanged end]

Use 111-115 for ends without integral gaskets; 116-119 for ends with integral gaskets. 110 = ’FFTBTP (111-119)’[Flat-face thru-bolted termination type] 111 = ’FFTBE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end] 116 = ’FFTBEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] Use 121-125 for ends without integral with integral gaskets. 120 = ’RFTBTP (121-129)’[Raised-face 121 = ’RFTBE’ [Raised-face 126 = ’RFTBEWG’ [Raised-face gasket]

gaskets; 126-129 for ends thru-bolted termination type] thru-bolted end] thru-bolted end with integral

Use 131-135 for ends without integral gaskets; 136-139 for ends

474

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists with integral gaskets. 130 = ’RJTBTP (131-139)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 131 = ’RJTBE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted end] Use 141-145 for ends without integral gaskets; 146-149 for ends with integral gaskets. 140 = ’MRJTBTP (141-149)’[Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type] 146 = ’MRJTBEWG’ [Male RTJ-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] Use 151-155 for ends without integral gaskets; 156-159 for ends with integral gaskets. 150 = ’FFTBCSTP (151-159)’[Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination ty 151 = ’FFTBCSE’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] 156 = ’FFTBCSEWG’ [Flat-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with integ Use 161-165 for ends without integral gaskets; 166-169 for ends with integral gaskets. 160 = ’RFTBCSTP (161-169)’[Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination 161 = ’RFTBCSE’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] 166 = ’RFTBCSEWG’ [Raised-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end with int Use 171-175 for ends without integral gaskets; 176-179 for ends with integral gaskets. 170 = ’RJTBCSTP (171-179)’[RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws termination typ 171 = ’RJTBCSE’ [RTJ-face thru-bolted-with-cap-screws end] Use 181-185 for ends without integral gaskets; 186-189 for ends with integral gaskets. 180 = ’FFFTBTP (181-189)’[Flat-full-face thru-bolted termination type] 181 = ’FFFTBE’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end] 186 = ’FFFTBEWG’ [Flat-full-face thru-bolted end with integral gasket] 190 = ’MJTP 191 = ’MJE’

(190-199)’[Mechanical joint termination type] [Mechanical joint end]

300 = ’MTP (301-399)’[Male termination type] Use 301-309 for welded ends only 301 = ’BE’ [Beveled end] 302 = ’OLET’ [Olet beveled end] Use 311 321 331 341 351

311-319 for welded ends only = ’TBE’ [Tapered and beveled end] = ’MFE’ [Male flared end] = ’MTE’ [Male threaded end] = ’MGE’ [Male grooved end] = ’MQCE’ [Male quick connect end]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

475

Appendix: Codelists 355 361 371 381

= = = =

’MCE’ ’MFRE’ ’MHE’ ’SPE’

[Male clamp end] [Male ferrule end] [Male hose end] [Spigot end]

Use 391 393 395

391-399 for welded ends = ’PE (391-399)’[Plain = ’3"FFPE’ [Plain = ’6"FFPE’ [Plain

only end] end, 3" field fit] end, 6" field fit]

400 = ’STP (401-409)’[Socket termination type] 401 = ’SE’ [Socket end] Use 421-429 for welded ends only 420 = ’SWTP (421-429)’[Socketwelded termination type] 421 = ’SWE’ [Socketwelded end] 440 = ’FTTP (441-449)’[Female threaded termination type] 441 = ’FTE’ [Female threaded end] 460 = ’FGTP (461-469)’[Female grooved termination type] 461 = ’FGE’ [Female grooved end] 470 = ’FCTP (471-479)’[Female clamp termination type] 471 = ’FCE’ [Female clamp end] 480 = ’FQCTP (481-489)’[Female quick connect termination type] 481 = ’FQCE’ [Female quick connect end] 500 = ’FFRTP (501-509)’[Female ferrule termination type] 501 = ’FFRE’ [Female ferrule end] 520 = ’FHTP (521-529)’[Female hose termination type] 521 = ’FHE’ [Female hose end] 540 = ’BLTP (541-549)’[Bell end termination type] 541 = ’BLE’ [Push-on bell end] 542 = ’MJBE’ [Mechanical joint bell end] 590 = ’HTP

(581-599)’[Hole end termination type]

Use 591-599 for welded ends only 591 = ’HCE’ [Circular hole end] 600 = ’NTP 601 = ’NE’

(600-605)’[Null termination type] [Null end]

650 = ’UDTP (651-659)’[User defined termination type] 651 = ’UD’ [User defined end] (When a "UD" preparation end is detected by the system in the piping materials class, it will prompt the User to define the actual CP preparation to use. The value provided by the User will be used

476

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists for initial placement of the component as well as for subsequent recreations of the piping system.)

CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override NOTE: Schedule/thickness override values for metric projects must have codelist values between 499 and 1000. 1 = [Blank] 10 = ’.0625’ 11 = ’.125’ 12 = ’.1875’ 13 = ’.25’ 14 = ’.3125’ 15 = ’.375’ 16 = ’.4375’ 17 = ’.5’ 18 = ’.5625’ 19 = ’.625’ 20 = ’.6875’ 21 = ’.75’ 22 = ’.8125’ 23 = ’.875’ 24 = ’.9375’ 25 = ’1’ 30 = ’1.0625’ 31 = ’1.125’ 32 = ’1.1875’ 33 = ’1.25’ 34 = ’1.3125’ 35 = ’1.375’ 36 = ’1.4375’ 37 = ’1.5’ 38 = ’1.5625’ 39 = ’1.625’ 40 = ’1.6875’ 41 = ’1.75’ 42 = ’1.8125’ 43 = ’1.875’ 44 = ’1.9375’ 45 = ’2’ 50 = ’2.0625’ 51 = ’2.125’ 52 = ’2.1875’ 53 = ’2.25’ 54 = ’2.3125’ 55 = ’2.375’ 56 = ’2.4375’ 57 = ’2.5’ 58 = ’2.5625’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

477

Appendix: Codelists 59 = ’2.625’ 60 = ’2.6875’ 61 = ’2.75’ 62 = ’2.8125’ 63 = ’2.875’ 64 = ’2.9375’ 65 = ’3’ 100 = ’S-5S’ 101 = ’S-10S’ 102 = ’S-40S’ 103 = ’S-80S’ 110 = ’S-10’ 111 = ’S-20’ 112 = ’S-30’ 113 = ’S-40’ 114 = ’S-60’ 115 = ’S-80’ 116 = ’S-100’ 117 = ’S-120’ 118 = ’S-140’ 119 = ’S-160’ 130 = ’S-STD’ 131 = ’S-XS’ 132 = ’S-XXS’

CL340, Safety Classification (99) 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’SC1’ 3 = ’SC2’ 4 = ’SC3’ 5 = ’SC4’ 6 = ’SC5’ 7 = ’SC6’ 8 = ’SC7’ 9 = ’SC8’ 10 = ’SC9’

CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’ANR =Analysis not required’ 3 = ’ATBP=Analysis to be performed’ 4 = ’AC =Analysis completed’

478

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists

CL365, Reporting Requirements (25) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = ’Reportable by MTO’ 2 = ’Not Reportable by MTO’

CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. Labels always require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 0 = ’None’ 1 = ’reconstruct’ 2 = ’re-calculate’

CL380, Piping Component Type (2500) 1 = [Blank] 2 3 4 5 6 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 31 33 34 35

= = = = = =

’Piping’ ’Piping’ ’Piping’ ’Piping’ ’Hose’ ’Tubing’ = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

[Primary single line] [Secondary single line] [Primary double line] [Double line]

’Gate valve’ ’Extended body gate valve’ ’Conduit gate valve’ ’Blank gate valve’ ’3-way valve’ ’Ball valve’ [2-way] ’2-way valve’ ’3-way ball valve’ ’Globe valve’ [2-way] ’Angle globe valve’ [2-way] ’3-way globe valve’ ’Y globe valve’ ’Plug valve’ [2-way] ’4-way valve’ ’3-way plug valve’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

479

Appendix: Codelists 36 39 43 47 49 50 51 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 67 68 70 71 73 74 75 79 86 89 90 93 97 98 99 117 119 120 122 124 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 135 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 148 151

480

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’4-way plug valve’ ’Needle valve’ ’Butterfly valve’ ’Diaphragm valve’ ’Knife gate valve’ ’Slide valve’ [2-way] ’3-way slide valve’ ’Angle valve’ ’Check valve’ ’Wafer check valve’ ’Angle check valve’ ’Stop check valve’ ’Angle stop check valve’ ’Y stop check valve’ ’Backflow preventer’ ’Automatic recirculation valve’ ’Angle blowdown valve’ ’Y blowdown valve’ ’Pinch valve’ ’Float valve’ ’Foot valve’ ’Tank drain valve’ ’Deluge valve’ ’Hose valve’ ’Angle hose valve’ ’Vent/drain valve’ ’Instrument root valve’ ’3-way instrument root valve’ ’4-way instrument root valve’ = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Flange’ ’Reducing flange’ ’Expander flange’ ’Orifice flange’ ’Blind flange’ ’Open spectacle blank’ ’Closed spectacle blank’ ’Blank disc’ ’Blind spacer’ ’Tapered spacer’ ’Open spacer’ ’End’ ’Head’ ’Plug’ ’Cap’ ’Diameter change’ ’Concentric diameter change’ ’Eccentric diameter change’ ’Coupling/connector’ ’Half coupling’ ’Concentric reducer’ ’Eccentric reducer’ ’Reducing coupling’ ’Concentric swage’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 152 155 156 157 159 160 162 163 165 167 169 171 172 173 175 176 177 179 181 182 184 189 191 192 193 195 196 198 200 202 204 206 207 209 210 216 218 220 222 223 224 229 231 233 237 239 240 242 243 246 249 251 253 260

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Eccentric swage’ ’Union’ ’Orifice union’ ’Dielectric union’ ’Hose connection’ ’Bushing’ ’Reducing insert’ ’Pipe bend’ ’5.625 deg elbow’ ’11.25 deg elbow’ ’22.5 deg elbow’ ’24"_API+/- thk varies] 7 = ’PDS-P2’ [BLSPC_>24"__API+/-_0.375"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_0.375"th 8 = ’PDS-P3’ [BLSPC_>24"_MSS+/- thk varies, BLSPO_>24"_MSS+/- thk vari 11 = ’PDS-I1’ [BLSPC_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk, BLSPO_>24"_API+/-_1.5"thk] 12 = ’PDS-I2’ [BLPAD_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk, BLSPA_>24"_MSS+/-_0.75"thk] 13 = ’PDS-I3’ 16 = ’PDS-Op1’ 17 = ’PDS-Op2’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

499

Appendix: Codelists 18 = ’PDS-Op3’ 31 = ’ANSI-B16.1’ 33 = ’ANSI-B16.3’ 34 = ’ANSI-B16.4’ 35 = ’ANSI-B16.5’ 39 = ’ANSI-B16.9’ 40 = ’ANSI-B16.10’ 41 = ’ANSI-B16.11’ 42 = ’ANSI-B16.12’ 44 = ’ANSI-B16.14’ 45 = ’ANSI-B16.15’ 50 = ’ANSI-B16.20’ 51 = ’ANSI-B16.21’ 52 = ’ANSI-B16.22’ 53 = ’ANSI-B16.23’ 54 = ’ANSI-B16.24’ 55 = ’ANSI-B16.25’ 56 = ’ANSI-B16.26’ 58 = ’ANSI-B16.28’ ||] 59 = ’ANSI-B16.29’ 64 = ’ANSI-B16.34’ 66 = ’ANSI-B16.36’ 69 = ’ANSI-B16.39’ 72 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ 73 = ’ANSI-B16.43’ Solvent

[Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ||] [Cast Iron Threaded Fittings ||] [Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Steel Beveled End Fittings ||] [Dimensions of Ferrous Valves ||] [Forged Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Fittings ||] [Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ||] [Ferrous Pipe Plugs and Bushings] [Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings ||] [RTJ Gaskets and Grooves ||] [Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges ||] [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Pressure Fittings ||] [Cast Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings ||] [Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ||] [Beveled End Preparation] [Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubing] [Steel Beveled End Short Radius Elbows and Returns [Wrought Copper Solder Joint Drainage Fittings] [Valves Flanged and Beveled Ends ||] [Steel Orifice Flanges ||] [Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions ||] [Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fitting ||] [Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Drainage Systems]

500

81 = ’ANSI-B18.2.1’ 82 = ’ANSI-B18.2.2’ 100 = ’ANSI-B36.10M’ 109 = ’ANSI-B36.19M’

[Square and Hex Bolts and Screws ||] [Square and Hex Nuts] [Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe ||] [Stainless Steel Pipe ||]

114 = ’API-5A’ 115 = ’API-5B’ 119 = ’API-5L’ 120 = ’API-5LE’ 122 = ’API-5LP’ 124 = ’API-5LS’ 126 = ’API-5LU’ 127 = ’API-5LX’ 131 = ’API-6A’ 132 = ’API-6AB’ 135 = ’API-6D’ Swivels] 141 = ’API-526’ 145 = ’API-590’ 146 = ’API-590Z1’ 147 = ’API-590Z2’ 153 = ’API-593’ 154 = ’API-594’ 155 = ’API-595’

[Casing, Tubing and Drill Pipe] [Casing, Tubing and Line Pipe Threads] [Line Pipe ||] [Polyethylene Line Pipe ||] [Thermoplastic Line Pipe ||] [Spiralweld Line Pipe ||] [Ultra High Test Heat Treated Line Pipe ||] [High Test Line Pipe] [Wellhead Equipment] [30,000 PSI Flanged Wellhead Equipment] [Pipeline Valves, End Closures, Connectors and [Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves] [Steel Line Blanks ||] [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.125" CA ||] [Steel Line Blanks - with 0.25" CA ||] [Ductile Iron Plug Valves] [Wafer Check Valves] [Cast Iron Gate Valves]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 157 159 160 161

= = = =

’API-597’ ’API-599’ ’API-600’ ’API-601’

[Steel Venturi Gate Valves] [Steel Plug Valves] [Steel Gate Valves ||] [Metallic Gaskets for Raised Face Pipe Flanges and Flanged Connections ||]

162 163 164 165 166 169

= = = = = =

’API-602’ ’API-603’ ’API-604’ ’API-605’ ’API-606’ ’API-609’

[Compact Steel Gate Valves] [Class 150 Cast Flanged End Gate Valves] [Ductile Iron Gate Valves] [Large Diameter Carbon Steel Flanges ||] [Compact Carbon Steel Gate Valves] [Butterfly Valves Lug and Wafer Type]

171 = ’ASTM-A74’ 172 = ’ASTM-C76’ Pipe] 173 = ’ASTM-C700’

[Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer

174 = ’ASTM-D2464’ 176 = ’ASTM-D2466’ ||] 177 = ’ASTM-D2467’ ||]

[Threaded PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80] [Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 40

179 181 184 186

[Cast Iron Pipe] [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3"-48" ||] [Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe] [Ductile Iron Pipe ||]

= = = =

’AWWA-C106’ ’AWWA-C110’ ’AWWA-C115’ ’AWWA-C151’

[Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Perforated Clay Pipe]

[Socket-Type PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings Schedule 80

190= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||] 191= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175 ||] 192= ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275 ||] 193 = 200 = 204 = 206 = 207 = 208 = 220 = 221 = Water 222 = Water 230 =

’AWWA-C208’ ’AWWA-C500’ ’AWWA-C504’ ’AWWA-C506’ ’AWWA-C507’ ’AWWA-C508’ ’AWWA-C900’ ’AWWA-C901’

[Steel Water Pipe Fittings] [Gate Valves 3"-48" for Water and Sewage Systems] [Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves] [Backflow Prevention Devices-Check Valves] [Ball Valves] [Swing Check Valves for Water Works Service 2"-24"] [PVC Pipe 4"-12" for Water] [Polyethylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for

’AWWA-C902’

[Polybutylene Pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2"-3" for

’AWWA-C950’

[Glass-Fiber Reinforced Pressure Pipe]

235 = ’PFI-ES-24’

[Pipe Bending Tolerances ||]

243 = ’ISA-S75.03’ 244 = ’ISA-S75.04’

[Face to Face Dimensions Globe Control Valves] [Face to Face Dimensions Flangeless Control Valves]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

501

Appendix: Codelists 252 253 254 255 268 277 278 282 285 288 289 290 291 293 ||] 295 297

= = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’MSS-SP-42’ ’MSS-SP-43’ ’MSS-SP-44’ ’MSS-SP-51’ ’MSS-SP-58’ ’MSS-SP-67’ ’MSS-SP-68’ ’MSS-SP-72’ ’MSS-SP-75’ ’MSS-SP-78’ ’MSS-SP-79’ ’MSS-SP-80’ ’MSS-SP-81’ ’MSS-SP-83’

= ’MSS-SP-88’ = ’MSS-SP-95’

[CL150 Valves ||] [Stainless Steel Buttwelding Fittings] [Steel Pipe Line Flanges ||] [CL150LW Cast Flanges and Flanged Fittings] [Pipe Hangers and Supports] [Butterfly Valves] [High Pressure-Offset Seat Butterfly Valves] [Ball Valves with Flanged or Beveled Ends] [Wrought Beveled End Fittings] [Cast Iron Plug Valves] [Socketwelding Reducing Inserts] [Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle & Check Valves] [Flanged, Wafer Knife Gate Valves] [Carbon Steel Socketwelded and Threaded Pipe Unions [Diaphragm Valves] [Swage Nipples and Bull Plugs ||]

298 = ’NFPA-1963’ [Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose connections] 300 = ’ASME BPE-97’ [Geometry standards that follow apply to specific manufacturers. If one of these standards is used to define a component, the following information will be shown in brackets to the right of the geometry standard: o For valves: the applicable model codes and vendor’s designations o For fittings: the applicable model codes will be shown unless the vendor’s designation is required to differentiate between components requiring a different geometry standard to assign them to the proper data table. 1000 = ’Adamson 1’ 1001 = ’Adams 1’ 1025 = ’Aitken 1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA; TDRA; TDRB; TDRBW ||] 1026 = ’Aitken Z1’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.125" CA ||] 1027 = ’Aitken Z2’ [BLPAD; BLSPA - with 0.25" CA ||] 1050 = ’Allied Pipe Products 1’ 1075 = ’Aldo Colombo 1’ 1100 = ’Aloyco 1’ [GATR-Fig_114; GATR-Fig_114DB; GATR-Fig_114EB; GATR-Fig_124; GATR-Fig_2214A; GLOR-Fig_2310A; GLOR-Fig_2314A; GLOR-Fig_314; GLOR-Fig_31 GLOR-Fig_314EB; GLOR-Fig_504; CKLR-Fig_554; CKLR-Fig_2554A; CKSR-Fig_2374 CKSR-Fig_374; TKDR-Fig_751 ||] 1101 = ’Aloyco 2’ [GATR-Fig_2110; GATR-Fig_2114 ||] 1125 = ’American Darling 1’ [H3W1-Fig_B-50-B ||] 1130 = ’American DI Pipe’ [PIPE; L; LRB ||] 1150 = ’American Valve 1’ 1175 = ’Amri 1’ 1200 = ’Anaconda 1’ 1225 = ’Anderson Greenwood 1’ 1250 = ’Anvil 1’ 1275 = ’A.O.Smith 1’ 1300 = ’Apollo 1’

502

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 1325 = ’Argus 1’ 1350 = ’Armstrong 1’ S70BC-Fig_2011 ||] 1375 = ’Asahi/American 1’ 1400 1425 1450 1475

= = = =

[S51AC-Fig_K1SC; S70AC-Fig_2011;

’Babbitt 1’ ’Babcock and Wilcox 1’ ’Badger Meters 1’ ’Bailey Co 1’

1500 = ’Balon 1’ 1525 = ’Basic Engineering 1’ 1550 = ’Bestobel 1’ 1560 = ’Bete 1’ [SSP1-Series_N ||] 1575 = ’Bonney Forge 1’ [GAT-Fig_9HLF-10; GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_9W-10; GATEXB-Fig_VLL-10; GATEXB-Fig_VOLL-10; GLOR-Fig_HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HLF-40; CKLRY-Fig_9Y-40; CKLRY-Fig_25Y-40; CAPOT; UN; L; LRB; SWOL; WOL; SOL; TOL; NOL; EOLLR; EOLSR; LOL ||] 1576 = ’Bonney Forge 2’ [GATR-Fig_9H-10; GATR-Fig_25W-10; GLOR-Fig_9HL-30; GLOR-Fig_9WL-30; GLOR-Fig_25W-30; GLOY-Fig_25Y-30; CKLR-Fig_9HL-40; CKLR-Fig_9HL-50; CKLR-Fig_9HL-60; CKLR-Fig_9WL-40; CKLR-Fig_9WL-50; CKLR-Fig_9WL-60 ||] 1577 = ’Bonney Forge 3’ [GATF-Fig_H-10; GATF-Fig_W-10; GATR-Fig_HL-10; GATR-Fig_WL-10; CKLR-Fig_HL-40; CKLR-Fig_WL-40 ||] 1585 = ’Boots & Coots 1’ [MN1-Spectrum_Allpha_6235 ||] 1590 = ’Bray 1’ 1600 = ’Brooks Meters 1’ 1625 = ’Cameron 1’ 1650 = ’Carbone 1’ 1675 = ’Ciba-Geigy 1’ 1700 = ’Clark Reliance 1’ 1725 = ’Clayton Automatic Valves 1’ [CKBP-Model_D; FLO-Series_427-01 ||] 1750 = ’Clayton Mark 1’ 1775 = ’Clow 1’ 1800 = ’Cochrane 1’ 1825 = ’Condren 1’ 1850 = ’Continental Emsco 1’ 1875 = ’Cooper Valve 1’ 1900 = ’Crane 1’ [GATF-Fig_3904U; GATR-Fig_424; GATR-Fig_431UB; BALR-Fig_9302; GLOF-Fig_3944U; GLOR-Fig_14 1/2P; GLOR-Fig_70; GLOY-Fig_7189; NEE-Fig_88; CKS-Fig_373;CKLF-Fig_3973U; CKSR-Fig_36; CKSR-Fig_137; FOOT-Fig_394; FOOT-Fig_395; FLWN; FSO; L; LRB ||] 1925 = ’Crosby 1’ 1950 = ’Daniel 1’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

503

Appendix: Codelists 1975 2000 2025 2050 2075 2100 2150 2155 2175

= = = = = = = = =

’Demco 1’ ’Dezurik 1’ ’Dixon 1’ ’Dresser 1’ ’Dover 1’ ’DOW 1’ [TRI-Lining_SL; TRI-Lining_PPL, TRI-Lining_KL ||] ’Duo Seal 1’ ’Dur-O-Lock 1’ [CPL ||] ’Durco 1’

2200 2225 2250 2275

= = = =

’Elkhart 1’ ’Enpro 1’ ’Epsco 1’ ’Everest 1’

2300 2325 2350 2375 2400 2425 2450 2475 2500 2525 2550 2575 2600 2625 2650 2660 2675 2700 ||] 2715 2725 2750

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Fabri-Valve 1’ [KNF-Fig_36 ||] ’Fairbanks 1’ ’Fasani 1’ ’Fetterolf 1’ ’Fibercast 1’ ’Fike 1’ ’Fisher 1’ ’Flexitallic 1’ ’Flowline 1’ ’FMC 1’ ’Foxboro 1’ ’Garlok 1’ ’General 1’ ’Geosource 1’ ’Gestra 1’ ’Gladding McBean 1’ [REDC; E45; E90; M451; M452; L ||] ’Graylock 1’ ’Grinnell 1’ [BALR-Fig_3022; CAPOT; UNO; E45U; E90RST; TOUB; TOUR

= ’Grinnell Fire Prot 1’ [DEL-Model_A-4; SSP-Mulsifyre-Projector ||] = ’Grove 1’ = ’Gulf 1’

2775 2800 2825 2850 2860 2875 2900 2915 2925

= = = = = = = = =

’Hammond 1’ ’Hancock 1’ [BDA-Fig_5505W ||] ’Haws 1’ [SSEW1-Fig_8309; SSEW1-Fig 8309CRP ||] ’Heaton 1’ ’Hex 1’ ’Hindle-Hamer 1’ ’Hitachi 1’ ’Hoke 1’ ’Hydril 1’

2950 = ’Imperial Eastman 1’ 2975 = ’Ishida 1’ 2980 = ’ITT 1’ 3000 = ’Jacoby Tarbox 1’ 3025 = ’Jamesbury 1’ [BALR-Style_B; BALSP-Type_530S; BAL3W-Style_AM150FD;

504

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 3026 3027 3028 3050 3075 3100

BAL3W-Style_DM150FD ||] = ’Jamesbury 2’ [BALR-Style_A ||] = ’Jamesbury 3’ [BALR-Type_2000_Brass ||] = ’Jamesbury 4’ [BALF-Type_4000; BALR-Type_4000 ||] = ’Jenkins 1’ = ’Jerguson 1’ = ’Judd Valve 1’

3125 3150 3175 3200 3225 3250 3275 3300

= = = = = = = =

’Kamyr-Neles 1’ ’Kemp 1’ ’Kennedy 1’ ’Keystone 1’ ’Kinka Kikai 1’ ’Kitz 1’ ’KTM 1’ ’Kubota 1’

3325 3350 3375 3400 3425

= = = = =

’L & M Valve 1’ ’Ladish 1’ [CAPOT; L; LRB ||] ’Lamons 1’ ’Lukens 1’ ’Lunkenheimer 1’

3445 3450 3475 3500 3525

= ’Mac-Iron 1’ = ’Magnetrol 1’ = ’Malbranque 1’ = ’Maloney 1’ = ’Mark Controls/Centerline 1’ [BFYLP-Series_A; BFYLP-Series_LT; BYFLP-Series_504 ||] 3550 = ’Mark Controls/Flowseal 1’ [BFYHP-Style_1LB ||] 3575 = ’Mark Controls/Marpac 1’ 3600 = ’Mark Controls/Pacific 1’ [GATSP-Fig_21555; GATSP-Fig_55509; GATSP-Fig_5 GLOSP-Fig_56009; GLOSP-Fig_56015; CKSSP-Fig_58809-5-WE; CKSSP-Fig_58815-7-WE; CKST-Fig_160S ||] 3625 = ’Marlin 1’ 3650 = ’Marwin 1’ 3675 = ’Masoneilan 1’ 3700 = ’Media 1’ [BFYLP] 3725 = ’Milwaukee 1’ 3750 = ’Mueller/Muessco Brass 1’ 3775 = ’Mueller/Muessco Steam Specialty 1’ [S51AC-Fig_761WE; S51AC-Fig_862BC; S51AC-Fig_762 ||] 3800 3825 3850 3860 3875 3900 3925

= = = = = = =

’Navco 1’ ’Nells 1’ ’Newco 1’ ’Nibco 1’ ’Nicholson 1’ [S78AC-Fig_N302L ||] ’Nippon-Benkan 1’ [BW fittings above 48" ||] ’Nupro 1’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

505

Appendix: Codelists 3950 = ’OPW 1’ 3975 = ’Orbit 1’ 4000 = ’Oseco 1’ 4025 4030 4050 4075 4100 4125 4150 4175 4200 4225 4250 4275 4300 4325

= ’Pan Korea 1’ = ’Parker CPI 1’ = ’Parks Cramer 1’ = ’Peabody Dore 1’ = ’Penberthy 1’ = ’Penn-AirCheck 1’ = ’Persta 1’ = ’Petrolvalves 1’ = ’Posi-Seal 1’ [BFYHP-Model A31; BFYHP-Model A21; BFYHP-Model A11 ||] = ’Powhatan 1’ [HOS-No_18-217; HOSA-No_18-157; HRST1-No_30-333 ||] = ’Powell 1’ = ’Pratt 1’ [BFYLP-Model_PIVA & IBV-FM4; Groundhog ||] = ’Premafu 1’ = ’Protectoseal 1’

4335 4350 4375 4400 4425

= = = = =

’R & G Sloane’ [BALF-Fig_1081; CAPOT; FS; INSR1] ’Resistoflex 1’ [PIN-Code_R6000D1 ||] ’Ring-O 1’ ’Rockwell 1’ [DIA-Type_STD_Unlined ||] ’Rockwell/Edwards 1’ [GLOA-Fig_849; GLOA-Fig_849Y; GLOYR-Fig_848; GLOYR-Fig_848Y; GLOYR-Fig_1048; GLOYR-Fig_1048Y; CKLRY-Fig_36178; CKLRY-Fig_36278; NEE-Fig_4152; CKST-Fig_302; CKST-Fig_302Y; CKAST-Fig_303 CKAST-Fig_303Y; CKAST-Fig_869; CKAST-Fig_869Y; CKYST-Fig_302; CKYST-Fig_6 BDY-Fig_1641; ||] 4426 = ’Rockwell/Edwards 2’ [CKLRY-Fig_832Y; GLOY-Fig_36124; GLOY-Fig_36128; CKLRY-Fig_1032Y; CKAST-Fig_605Y; CKAST-Fig_607Y; BDA-Fig_1643Y ||] 4427 = ’Rockwell/Edwards 3’ [GLOY-Fig_7514Y ||] 4450 = ’Rockwell/McCanna 1’ [BAL3W-Type_500-3WAY ||] 4475 = ’Rockwell/Nordstorm 1’ [PLUVP-Fig_4169; PLU3W-Fig_3813; PLU3W-Fig_4812; PLU3W-Fig_4813; PLU3W-Fig_5115; PLU3W-Fig_5119; PLU3W-Fig_5215; PLU3W-Fig_5219; PLU4W-Fig_3823; PLU4W-Fig_4822; PLU4W-Fig_5125; PLU4W-Fig_5129 ||] 4500 = ’R P & C 1’ 4520 = ’Sarco 1’ 4522 = ’Saunders 1’ 4525 = ’Sella 1’ 4550 = ’Serck Audco 1’ 4575 = ’Serfilco 1’ 4600 = ’Shoritsu 1’ 4625 = ’Smith 1’ [GATF-Fig_888; GATF-Fig_5870; GATR-Fig_800; GATR-Fig_870; GATR-Fig_1500; GATR-Fig_1570; GATEX-Fig_811 & 812 MPE/THD; GATEX-Fig_876 & 877 MPE/THD; GATEXB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GATXBA-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/S

506

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists GATXBB-Fig_874 & 875 OLET/THD; GLOR-Fig_G80; GLOR-Fig_G87; GLOR-Fig_G150; GLOR-Fig_G157; CKLR-Fig_B80; CKLR-Fig_C80; CKLR-Fig_C150; CKLR-Fig_SB80; CKLR-Fig_SC80 ||] 4626 = ’Smith 2’ [GATEX-Fig_813 & 814 MPE/SW; GATEX-Fig_878 & 879 MPE/SW ||] 4650 = ’Spraying Systems 1’ 4675 = ’Spirax Sarco 1’ 4700 = ’Stanco 1’ 4725 = ’Standard Fittings 1’ [CAPOT; SWGC; SWGE ||] 4750 = ’Stang Hydronics 1’ [M1-Fig BB0309-21 w/shapertip nozzle; ME1-Fig BB3561 4751 = ’Stang Hydronics 2’ [M1-Fig_BB0309-21 w/fog nozzle; ME1-Fig B22999 ||] 4752 = ’Stang Hydronics 3’ [ME1-Fig_BB3561 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||] 4753 = ’Stang Hydronics 4’ [ME1-Fig_BB3377 composite, w/monitor nozzle ||] 4775 = ’Stockham 1’ 4800 = ’Strahman 1’ 4825 = ’Swagelok 1’ 4850 = 4875 = 4900 = 4901 = 4925 = 4950 = 4975 = 5000 = 5025 = 5050 = 5060 = 5075 = 5085 = 5100 = 5125 = 5150 = L; SA 5175 = 5200 =

’Tapco 1’ ’Taylor 1’ ’Taylor Forge 1’ ’Taylor Forge 2, Rev 1957’ [L; S-STD WT ||] ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’Texas Bolt 1’ ’Thevignot 1’ ’Titeflex 1’ ’TK 1’ ’TKM 1’ [GAT-Fig_100 ||] ’Top Line 1’ ’Triangle 1’ ’Tri-Clover 1’ ’Truflo 1’ ’TRW/Mission 1’ [||] ’Tubeturn 1’ [FWN; FEWN; FOWNA; FOWNB; CAPBV; E453D; E90LT; E903D; ’Tufline 1’ ’Tyler 1’ [CPL; REDC; E45LT; E90LT; L ||]

5225 5250 5275 5300 5325 5350 5375

= ’Valvotecnic 1’ = ’Vanessa 1’ = ’Velan 1’ [S3AC-Fig_N675 ||] = ’Victaulic 1’ = ’Viking 1’ = ’Vitas 1’ = ’Vogt 1’ [GATR-Series_15373; GLOR-Series_15141; CKLR-Series_15701; NEE-Series_22461; NEE-Series_SW22461; CAPOT; UN; E90U; E90ST; L ||]

5400 5425 5450 5475

= = = =

’Wada 1’ ’Wallworth 1’ ’Watts Regulator 1’ ’Weco 1’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

507

Appendix: Codelists 5500 = ’WFI 1’ 5525 = ’Winston 1’ [S49AC-T-Strainer Type-59 W/flg’d cover; S53AC-Basket-Strain Fig 51-WIP W/CL150 flg’d cover & 3/4" SWE drain||] 5535 = ’Wirt & Knox 1’ 5550 = ’WKM 1’ 5575 = ’Worcester 1’ 5600 = ’Yarway 1’ [CKAR-Fig_5301; CKAR-Fig_5302; BDA-Fig_6909-C; BDY-Fig_6911-C TKDR-Fig_8106 ||] 5625 = ’Yoneki 1’ 5650 = ’Zurn 1’ o European practices 1 (DIN) 7000-11999 General Specifications 7000 = ’DIN 2401-1 Pressure, nominal’ 7001 = ’DIN 2401-2 Pressure, nominal’ 7002 = ’DIN 2402 Diameter,nominal’ Pipes 7010 = 7011 = 7012 = 7013 = 7014 = 7015 = 7016 = 7017 = 7018 = 7019 = 7020 =

508

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2448’ 2458’ 2440’ 2441’ 2442’ 2445’ 2460’ 2462’ 2463’ 2391’ 2393’

;Steel pipes, seamless ;Steel pipes, welded ;Threaded pipes, medium weight ;Threaded pipes, heavy weight ;Threaded pipes, spec. qualty ;Seamless steel pipes,dyn. load ;Steel pipes for water ;Seamless ferritic steel pipes ;Seamless austenitic steel pipes ;Seamless precision steel tubes ;Welded precision steel tubes

7025 = ’DIN 2848’ 7026 = ’DIN 2873’

;Flanged lined pipes ;Flanged lined enamelled pipes

7030 = ’DIN 2462’ 7031 = ’DIN 2463’

;Seamless stainless steel tubes ;Welded austenitic steel pipes and tubes

7040 = ’DIN 8062’ 7041 = ’DIN 8077’

;Pipes of unplasticized polyvinyl chlor. ;Polypropylen (PP) pipes

Flanges 7100 = ’DIN 7101 = ’DIN 7102 = ’DIN 7103 = ’DIN 7104 = ’DIN 7105 = ’DIN 7106 = ’DIN 7107 = ’DIN 7108 = ’DIN 7109 = ’DIN

;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast ;Cast

2530’ 2531’ 2532’ 2533’ 2534’ 2535’ 2543’ 2544’ 2545’ 2546’

iron flanges, PN 2,5 iron flanges, PN 6 iron flanges, PN 10 iron flanges, PN 16 iron flanges, PN 25 iron flanges, PN 40 steel flanges, PN 16 steel flanges, PN 25 steel flanges, PN 40 steel flanges, PN 64

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 7110 7111 7112 7113 7114 7115 7116 7117 7118 7119 7120 7121 7122 7123 7124 7125 7126 7127 7128 7129 7130 7131 7132 7133 7134 7135 7136 7137 7138 7139 7140 7141 7142 7143 7144 7145 7146 7147 7148 7149 7150 7160 7161 7162

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2547’ 2548’ 2549’ 2550’ 2551’ 2558’ 2561’ 2565’ 2566’ 2567’ 2568’ 2569’ 2630’ 2631’ 2632’ 2633’ 2634’ 2635’ 2636’ 2637’ 2638’ 2628’ 2629’ 2627’ 2673’ 2667’ 2668’ 2669’ 2573’ 2576’ 2641’ 2642’ 2652’ 2653’ 2655’ 2656’ 2501’ 2512’ 2512’ 2513’ 2514’ 2527’ 2848’ 2873’

;Cast steel flanges, PN 100 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 160 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 250 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 320 ;Cast steel flanges, PN 400 ;Plain face oval screwed flange PN 6 ;Oval screwed flange w/ socket PN 10,16 ;Screwed flange PN 6 rund ;Screwed flange PN 10,16 ;Screwed flange PN 25,40 ;Screwed flange PN 64 ;Screwed flange PN 100 ;Welding neck flange PN 1 ;Welding neck flange PN 6 ;Welding neck flange PN 10 ;Welding neck flange PN 16 ;Welding neck flange PN 25 ;Welding neck flange PN 40 ;Welding neck flange PN 64 ;Welding neck flange PN 100 ;Welding neck flange PN 160 ;Welding neck flange PN 250 ;Welding neck flange PN 320 ;Welding neck flange PN 400 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 10 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 160 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 250 ;Loose flange w/ wldg neck PN 320 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 6 ;Flange, soldering or wldg PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 6 ;Slip-on flange, upturned wldg PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 6 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 10 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 25 ;Flange, lapped, plain collar PN 40 ;Flanges, Dimensions ;Flanges, tongue & groove ;Rings ;Flanges, projection & recess ;Projection w/ groove & recess ;Flange, blind PN 6,10,16,25,40,64,100 ;Reducing flanges, lined ;Reducing and blind flanges, enamelled

Elbows 7200 = 7201 = 7202 = 7203 = 7204 = 7205 = 7206 =

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2605’ 2606’ 2916’ 2983’ 2987’ 2987’ 2950’

;Tube bends f. butt wldg ;Tube bends, steel 5d ;Bending radii, seaml.& wld pipes ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, bends ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, elbows, reduced ;Malleable cast iron fittings, elbows

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

509

Appendix: Codelists 7210 7211 7212 7213 7214 7215 7216 7217 7218 7219

= = = = = = = = = =

’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-1’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’ 2605-2’

7230 = ’DIN 2848’ 7231 = ’DIN 2873’

bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend bend

radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius radius

1d, standard 12.85 1.5d, standard 12.85 2.5d, standard 12.85 5d, standard 12.85 10d, standard 12.85 1d, standard 12.85 1.5d, standard 12.85 2.5d, standard 12.85 5d, standard 12.85 10d, standard 12.85

;Flanged lined steel fittings, Bends ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Bends

7240 = ’DIN 16962’ 7241 = ’DIN 16962’ 7242 = ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Pipe bends B1,B2 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb. W1,W2,part 6 ;Polypropylen (PP) components,Elb.W3,W4,part 10

Reducers 7300 = ’DIN 2616’ 7301 = ’DIN 2990’ 7302 = ’DIN 2988’ 7303 = ’DIN 2950’ 7304 = ’DIN 2950’

;Steel fittings, reducers ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Bushings ;Threaded steel pipe fittings, Reducing sockets ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Reducing sockets ; - " - , male and female connections, Bushings

7310 = ’DIN 2848’ 7311 = ’DIN 2873’

;Flanged lined steel fittings, Reducers ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, Reducers

7320 7321 9 7322 7323

= ’DIN 16962’ = ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R1, part 9 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. NRGI, part

= ’DIN 16962’ = ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R2, part 10 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Red. R3, part 11

Branches 7400 = ’DIN 7401 = ’DIN 7402 = ’DIN 7403 = ’DIN 7404 = ’DIN 7405 = ’DIN 7406 = ’DIN

2615’ 2618’ 2618’ 2619’ 2987’ 2987’ 2950’

;Butt wldg steel fittings;T ;Welding saddles, short ;Welding saddles, long ;Bends for welding ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T ;Threaded steel fittings;cross;T;redcd ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Tees, Crosses

7410 = ’DIN 2848’ 7411 = ’DIN 2873’

;Flanged lined steel fittings, T ;Flanged steel fittings enamelled, T

7420 2 7421 7422 7423

= ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T1,T5 part

= ’DIN 16962’ = ’DIN 16962’ = ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2, part 7 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T2G, part 7 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Tee, T3, part 10

Caps 7500 = ’DIN 2617’

510

;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows, ;Elbows,

;Butt wldg steel fittings, Caps

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 7501 = ’DIN 2991’ 7502 = ’DIN 2950’

;Threaded steel fittings, Caps ;Malleable cast iron fittings, Caps

7510 = ’DIN 16962’ 7511 = ’DIN 16962’

;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K1, part 8 ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Cap K2, part 10

Other fittings 7600 = ’DIN 2981’ 7601 = ’DIN 2982’ 7602 = ’DIN 2982’ 7603 = ’DIN 2986’ 7604 = ’DIN 2990’ 7605 = ’DIN 2991’ 7606 = ’DIN 2993’

;Threaded steel fittings with long screw thread ;Threaded steel fittings, Parallel Nipples ;Threaded steel fittings, Taper Nipples ;Threaded steel fittings, Sockets ;Threaded steel fittings, Hexagon Nipples ;Threaded steel fittings, Plain plugs ;Threaded steel fittings, Pipe unions

7610 = ’DIN 2950’

;Malleable cast iron fittings, Sockets, Unions, ;Nipples, Plugs etc.

7620 = ’DIN 16962’ ;Polypropylen (PP) components, Soc. M1,MGI, p. 8 7630 = ’DIN 2848’ 7631 = ’DIN 2873’

;Flanged lined steel fittings, spacers ;Flanged lined steel fittings enamelled, spacers

Bolts and Nuts 8000 = ’DIN 934’ 8001 = ’DIN 931’ Gaskets 8100 = ’DIN 8101 = ’DIN 8102 = ’DIN 8103 = ’DIN 8104 = ’DIN 8105 = ’DIN 8106 = ’DIN 8107 = ’DIN

2690’ 2691’ 2692’ 2693’ 2695’ 2696’ 2697’ 2698’

Valves 9000 = 9010 = 9020 = 9030 = 9040 = 9050 =

conform DIN 3202’ 3202-F’ ; Teil 3202-S’ ; Teil 3202-K’ ; Teil 3202-M’ ; Teil 3202-F’ ; Teil

’Non ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN ’DIN

;Gasket for plain face C ;Gasket for tongue & groove ;Gasket for recessed faces ;Rings for grooved faces ;Diaphragm ;Lenticular gaskets ;Grooved O- rings ;Corrugated steel sheet

1 2 3 4 5

Dummy standard 9999 = ’Dummy DIN Std’ ; Used for engineered items and instruments British Standards geometry standards 12000-16999 sub ranges (provisional) :12000-12099 pipes 12100-12199 flanges

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

511

Appendix: Codelists 12200-12599 12600-12999 13000-13199 13200-13499 PIPES 12000 12001 12002 12003 12004

= = = = =

fittings valves bolts gaskets

’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600 ’BS3600

table table table table table

1 2 3 4 5

carbon and low alloy steel tubes’ austenitic stainless steel tubes’ high alloy ferritic steel tubes’ cs tubes for compression fitting - tbi’ ss tubes for compression fitting - tbi’

12010 = ’BS1387 tables 3,4 and 5 light,medium and heavy’ 12015 = ’BS1600 part 2 steel pipe for petroleum industry’ FLANGES 12100 = ’BS4504 p1 steel flanges for pipe,valves and fittings’ 12101 = ’BS4504 p1 iron flanges for pipe,valves and fittings - tbi’ 12110 = ’BS1560 p2 steel pipe flanges Metric dimensions’ FITTINGS 12200 = ’BS1740 12210 = ’BS1965 12220 = ’BS3799 12221 = ’BS3799 12230 = ’BS1640

part 1 screwed wrought steel pipe fittings ’ part 1 butt welding pipe fittings - CS’ steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (mm)’ steel pipe fittings screwed and socket welding (in)’ part 3/4 steel butt-welding pipe fittings ’

VALVES 12600 12620 12625 12630 12635 12640 12645 12646 12650 12651 12655 12656 12660 12661 12665 12666 12670 12671

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’BS2080 flanged ’BS5150’ ’BS5151’ ’BS5152’ ’BS5153’ ’BS5154’ ’BS5155’ ’BS5155 and app ’BS5156’ ’BS5156 and app ’BS5157’ ’BS5157 and app ’BS5158’ ’BS5158 and app ’BS5159’ ’BS5159 and app ’BS5160’ ’BS5160 and app

and butt-welded steel valves’

A’ A’ A’ A’ A’ A’

gaskets 13001 = ’BS4865:part 1 - non-metallic for BS4504 flanges’

512

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 13002 = ’BS4865:part 2 - spiral wound for BS4504 flanges’ 13010 = ’BS3381 - spiral wound for BS1560 flanges’ bolting 13200 = ’BS4882 metric series bolting’ 13210 = ’BS4882 inch series bolting’ dummy 13999 = ’dummy BS code’

CL576, Table Suffix/End Standard - Green (999) NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows: o US practices 2-99 o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 o European practices 2 (British) 200-299 o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 300-399 o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499 o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 500-599 o Company practices 900-999 1 = [Blank] US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-99 5 = ’Default’ [See below for definition] 6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details] 7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details] 8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details] 10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter] 12 15 22 23 24 29 30 33 37

= = = = = = = = =

’ANSI-B16.12’ ’ANSI-B16.15’ ’ANSI-B16.22’ ’ANSI-B16.23’ ’ANSI-B16.24’ ’ANSI-B16.36’ ’ANSI-B16.42’ ’ANSI-B1.20.3’ ’ANSI-B1.20.7’

[Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges] [Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads]

40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’ 41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’ 45 = ’ASTM-A74’ 46 = ’ASTM-C76’ Pipe] 47 = ’ASTM-C700’ Perfor 49 = ’AWWA-C110’ 50 = ’AWWA-C115’

[Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Clay Pipe] [Iron fittings] [Iron pipe and fittings]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

513

Appendix: Codelists 55 = ’AWWA-C151’ [Ductile iron pipe] 60 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] 61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] 62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] 70 = ’API-5LE’ [Polyethylene fittings] 75 = ’API-6A’ [Wellhead flanges and fittings] 79 = ’API-605-B’ [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605 flange bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses] 80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ [MSS non-blind flanges] 81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ [MSS blind flanges] 85 86 87 88 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

= = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Crosby’ ’Consolidated’ ’Lonergan’ ’Top Line’ ’Tube-Turn’ ’Dow’ ’Aloyco’ ’Yarway’ ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’R & G Sloane’ ’American DI Pipe’ ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] ’Taylor Forge’ ’Vendor 4’

CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", which represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables for dimensional parameters will be defined. The system will default to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type table are required in defining the component but the component ends are other than male termination. The basis for this table suffix will be as follows: End Termination Type Basis for Table Values Flat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5 Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in this order of precedence RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5 Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5 Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5 Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored.

514

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. All thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applie the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from API-590. For sizes and ratings for which APIdoes not apply, the bolt circle diameter from ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in th order of precedence, less one bolt diameter l 1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P". Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws....................None Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws......................None RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws.........................None Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE, API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467 Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis defined in the applicable generic tables; for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5. Female threaded thread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 ..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s,

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

515

Appendix: Codelists defined in the applicable generic tables; for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI and ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engagement will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 descriptions in the applicable generic tables. In all cases, thread engagement will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E Female quick connect.............. Female ferrule.................... Female hose....................... Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110 Gasket............................Not applicable Bolt..............................Not applicable Nut...............................Not applicable User defined......................None o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice Generic dimension data select flag access starts here 105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’ 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

= = = = = = = = =

’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt

dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim

for for for for for for lap for for

cast steel flanges’ cast iron flanges’ oval screwed flanges’ screwed flanges’ sold & weld flanges’ lap flanges’ flanges w/ plain collars’ loose flanges w/ weld neck’ loose flanges in enamelled components’

125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’ 126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’ 129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’ 130 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 100’ 131 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 160’

516

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 132 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 250’ 133 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 320’ 134 = ’OD acc to DIN 2445-1 PN 400’ 140 141 142 143 144

= = = = =

’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD

acc acc acc acc acc

to to to to to

DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN

2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2

PN PN PN PN PN

64-100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’

150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’ 160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’ 170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’ 171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’ 179 = ’OD for threaded components’ British Standards 205 = ’default metric’ 206 = ’default converted imperial’ 210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’

CL577, Table Suffix/End Standard - Red (999) NOTE: Codelist numbers have been reserved as follows: o US practices 2-99 o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 o European practices 2 (British) 200-299 o European practices 3 (Finnish, French, etc. 300-399 o International practices 1 (JIS) 400-499 o International practices 2 (Australian, etc.) 500-599 o Company practices 900-999 1 = [Blank] US Practice Table Suffixes, 2-99 5 = ’Default’ [See below for definition] 6 = ’PDS-1’ [See specific table for details] 7 = ’PDS-2’ [See specific table for details] 8 = ’PDS-3’ [See specific table for details] 10 = ’ID Duct’ [Nominal diameter based on inside diameter] 12 15 22 23 24 29

= = = = = =

’ANSI-B16.12’ ’ANSI-B16.15’ ’ANSI-B16.22’ ’ANSI-B16.23’ ’ANSI-B16.24’ ’ANSI-B16.36’

[Cast iron drainage fittings] [Cast bronze fittings] [Copper solder joint pressure fittings] [Copper solder joint drainage fittings] [Bronze flanges] [Orifice flanges]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

517

Appendix: Codelists 30 = ’ANSI-B16.42’ 33 = ’ANSI-B1.20.3’ 37 = ’ANSI-B1.20.7’

[Ductile iron flanges and fittings] [Dryseal pipe threads] [Hose coupling screw threads]

40 = ’ASME BPE-97 (PE)’ 41 = ’ASME BPE-97 (MCE)’ 45 = ’ASTM-A74’ 46 = ’ASTM-C76’ Pipe] 47 = ’ASTM-C700’ Perfor

[Cast iron S-XH soil pipe and fittings] [Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer [Extra Strength and Standard Strength Clay Pipe and Clay Pipe]

49 50 55 60

= = = =

’AWWA-C110’ ’AWWA-C115’ ’AWWA-C151’ ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B &

[Iron fittings] [Iron pipe and fittings] [Ductile iron pipe] D, ring’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] 61 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.B & D, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL86, CL150, CL175] 62 = ’AWWA-C207 Cl.E, hub’ [Steel slip-on flanges CL275] 70 = ’API-5LE’ 75 = ’API-6A’ 79 = ’API-605-B’ flange

[Polyethylene fittings] [Wellhead flanges and fittings] [API-605 blind flanges. These are based on API-605

80 = ’MSS-SP-44-NB’ 81 = ’MSS-SP-44-B’ 85 86 87 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99

= = = = = = = = = = = = =

bolt diameters and MSS-SP44 flange thicknesses] [MSS non-blind flanges] [MSS blind flanges]

’Crosby’ ’Consolidated’ ’Lonergan’ ’Tube-Turn’ ’Dow’ ’Aloyco’ ’Yarway’ ’Teledyne Farris 1’ ’R & G Sloane’ ’American DI Pipe’ ’Gladding McBean’ [Vitrified clay S-XS pipe and fittings] ’Taylor Forge’ ’Vendor 4’

CL No. 5 is used to define the "Default for end type", which represents the basis on which most US-practice generic piping tables for dimensional parameters will be defined. The system will default to table suffix "5" when dimensions from a male termination type table are required in defining the component but the component ends are other than male termination. The basis for this table suffix will be as follows:

518

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists End Termination Type Basis for Table Values Flat-face flanged.................ANSI-B16.1 or B16.5 Raised-face flanged...............ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in this order of precedence RTJ-face flanged..................ANSI-B16.5 Tongue/male-face flanged..........ANSI-B16.5 Groove/female-face flanged........ANSI-B16.5 Flat-face lap-flanged.............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. Raised-face lap-flanged...........ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. RTJ-face lap-flanged..............ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. Tongue/male-face lap-flanged......ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. Groove/female-face lap-flanged....ANSI-B16.5 with stub end thickness ignored. A ll thru-bolted...................For sizes and ratings for which API-590 applies the value of parameter "P" shall be taken from API-590. For sizes and ratings for which API does not apply, the bolt circle diameter from ANSI-B16.1, B16.5, API-605 or MSS-SP-42, in th order of precedence, less one bolt diameter l 1/8 inch will be used for parameter "P". Male RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None Flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None Raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws........................None Flat-full-face thru-bolted........DOW

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

519

Appendix: Codelists Male..............................ANSI-B36.10M, ANSI-B36-19M, API-5L, API-5LE, API-5LP, API-5LS or API-5LU PVC & CPVC socket.................API-5LP, ASTM-D2466 or ASTM-D2467 Socketwelded......................For pressure ratings XXXX#s, per basis defined in the applicable generic tables; for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B16.5. Female threaded thread engagement per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 ..................................Forged steel.For pressure ratings XXXX#s, defined in the applicable generic tables; for pressure ratings CLXXXXs and OTXXXXs, per ANSI and ANSI-B16.5. In all cases, thread engagement will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 descriptions in the applicable generic tables. In all cases, thread engagement will be per Table 2.4 of 2630-33 Female grooved....................Victaulic catalog G100E Female quick connect.............. Female ferrule.................... Female hose....................... Mechanical joint bell.............AWWA-C110 Gasket............................Not applicable Bolt..............................Not applicable Nut...............................Not applicable User defined......................None o European practices 1 (DIN) 100-199 Codelist numbers used for DIN European practice Generic dimension data select flag access starts here

520

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 105 = ’Gen blt & fem end prep dim’ 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

= = = = = = = = =

’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt ’Blt

dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim dim

for for for for for for lap for for

cast steel flanges’ cast iron flanges’ oval screwed flanges’ screwed flanges’ sold & weld flanges’ lap flanges’ flanges w/ plain collars’ loose flanges w/ weld neck’ loose flanges in enamelled components’

125 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 1’ 126 = ’OD acc to DIN 2631 Reihe 2’ 129 = ’OD for plastic pipes’ 130 131 132 133 134

= = = = =

’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD

acc acc acc acc acc

to to to to to

DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN

2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1 2445-1

PN PN PN PN PN

100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’

140 141 142 143 144

= = = = =

’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD ’OD

acc acc acc acc acc

to to to to to

DIN DIN DIN DIN DIN

2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2 2445-2

PN PN PN PN PN

64-100’ 160’ 250’ 320’ 400’

150 = ’OD acc to DIN 2391’ 160 = ’OD acc to DIN 2393’ 170 = ’OD acc to DIN 2440’ 171 = ’OD acc to DIN 2441’ 179 = ’OD for threaded components’ 181 182 183 184 185

= = = = =

’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness

Reihe Reihe Reihe Reihe Reihe

1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’

191 192 193 194 195

= = = = =

’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness ’Wallthickness

selection selection selection selection selection

1’ 2’ 3’ 4’ 5’

British Standards 205 = ’default metric’ 206 = ’default converted imperial’ 210 = ’plate flanges BS4504’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

521

Appendix: Codelists

CL578, Weight Code (399) NOTE: Codelist numbers 2-99 have been reserved for values that apply to US practices. Codelist numbers 100-399 have been reserved for values that apply to practices in other countries. 1 = [Blank] US Practice Weight Codes, 2-99 9 = ’35 pcf’ [Vitrified clay] 10 = ’57 pcf’ [Polypropylene] 16 = ’88 pcf’ [PVC] 22 = ’97 pcf’ [CPVC] 28 = ’111 pcf’ [FRP, Kynar] 30 = ’150 pcf’ [Reinforced concrete pipe] 34 = ’165 pcf’ [Aluminum] 40 = ’260 pcf’ [Titanium] 46 = ’450 pcf’ [Iron] 47 = ’450 pcf’ [Standard thk cement linin, ductile iron] 48 = ’450 pcf’ [Double thk cement lining ductile iron] 52 = ’490 pcf’ [Carbon steel, low Cr alloy steel, stainless steel] 58 = ’490 pcf’ [Cement lined carbon steel] 64 = ’525 pcf’ [Brass, Inconel] 70 = ’555 pcf’ [Bronze, copper, Monel, nickel] 76 = ’570 pcf’ [Hastelloy] European Practice Weight Codes, 101-199 101 = [Blank] 111 112 113 114 115 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146

522

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Weight ’Weight ’Weight ’Weight ’Weight ’1’ ’2’ ’3’ ’4’ ’5’ ’6’ ’7’ ’8’ ’9’ ’10’ ’11’ ’12’ ’13’ ’14’ ’15’ ’16’

selection flag 1’ selection flag 2’ selection flag 3’ selection flag 4’ selection flag 5’ [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN [Acc. to DIN

3202-F1/K1/V1] 3202-F2/S2/K2/M2/V2] 3202-F3/S3/K3/M3] 3202-F4/K4/M4] 3202-F5/S5/K5/M5] 3202-F6/M6] 3202-F7/S7] 3202-F8/S8/M8] 3202-F9/S9/M9] 3202-S10/M10] 3202-F11/M11] 3202-S12] 3202-S13] 3202-S14/M14] 3202-F15/M15] 3202-F16]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’17’ ’18’ ’19’ ’-’ ’21’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’ ’31’ ’32’ ’33’ ’34’ ’-’ ’36’ ’-’ ’-’ ’-’

[Acc. to DIN 3202-F17] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F18] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F19] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc. to DIN 3202-V21] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc. to DIN 3202-S31] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F32/M32] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F33/M33] [Acc. to DIN 3202-F34] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Acc. to DIN 3202-M36] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202] [Not existent under DIN 3202]

British Standards numbers (200-299) units kg per cubic metre 201 = [Blank] 209 210 216 222 228 230 234 240 246 247 248 252 253 254 258 264 270 276

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’561 km3’ ’913 km3’ ’1410 km3’ ’1554 km3’ ’1778 km3’ ’2403 km3’ ’2643 km3’ ’4165 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7208 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’7849 km3’ ’8410 km3’ ’8890 km3’ ’9130 km3’

[polypropylene] [pvc] [cpvc] [FRP, Kynar] [Aluminium] [Titanium] [Iron] [CS] [low alloy st] [SS] [8mm thk cement lined CS] [Brass, Inconel] [Bronze, copper, Monel, Nickel] [Hastelloy]

CL990, Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms 1 = ’General Fittings’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

523

Appendix: Codelists 2 = ’Pipe Bends ’ 3 = ’Orifice Flanges ’ 4 = ’Branch Nipples ’ 5 = ’Branch Reinforcement’ 21 = ’Valves ’ 41 = ’Piping ’ 42 = ’Tubing ’ 61 = ’Gaskets ’ 62 = ’Bolts ’ 63 = ’Nuts ’ 100 100 150 200 250

-

299 149 199 249 299

values are for Piping Specialties range of values are for specific specialties range of values are for typical specialties range of values are for specific valves range of values are for typical valves

100 150 200 250

= = = =

’Specific - General ’Typical - General ’Specific - Valve ’Typical - Valve

300 300 350 400 450

-

499 349 399 449 499

300 350 400 450

= = = =

’Specific - General ’Typical - General ’Specific - Valve ’Typical - Valve

’ ’ ’ ’

values are for Instruments range of values are for specific instruments range of values are for typical instruments range of values are for specific valves range of values are for typical values ’ ’ ’ ’

CL999, Standard Note Title (2000) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = [Blank] 31 = ’Object Types for Mass Annotation’ 35 = ’Approval Status’ 36 = ’Structural Approval Status’ 37 = ’HVAC Approval Status’ 50 = ’Hold Status’ 69 = ’Equipment Division’ 125 = ’Fluid Code’ 130 = ’Construction Status’ 145 = ’Materials Grade’ 148 = ’Materials Description’ 160 = ’Responsibility’ 180 = ’Fabrication Category’ 190 = ’Coating Requirements’

524

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 200 = ’Heat Tracing Requirements’ 210 = ’Heat Tracing Media’ 220 = ’Insulation Purpose’ 230 = ’Cleaning Requirements’ 330 = ’End Preparation’ 332 = ’Schedule / Thickness Override’ 340 = ’Safety Classification’ 360 = ’Stress Analysis Requirements’ 365 = ’Reporting Requirements’ 366 = ’Requirement to Reconstruct’ 380 = ’Piping Component Type’ 390 = ’Action’ 400 = ’Commodity Option’ 420 = ’Piping Component Data Source’ 425 = ’Piping/Tubing Type/Source’ 430 = ’Instrument Component Data Source’ 499 = ’Piping Notes’ 530 = ’Accessory / Item Type’ 550 = ’Operator / Actuator Type’ 570 = ’Design Standard’ 572 = ’Wall Thickness Equation’ 575 = ’Geometry Standard’ 576 = ’Table Suffix / End Standard - Green’ 577 = ’Table Suffix / End Standard - Red’ 578 = ’Weight Code’ 990 = ’Spec Writer Data Form Type’ 999 = ’Standard Note Title’ 1010 = ’Area Units’ 1028 = ’Weight Units’ 1056 = ’Temperature Units’ 1064 = ’Pressure Units’ 1074 = ’Density Units’ 1100 = ’Weld Type’ 1162 = ’Force Units’ 1201 = ’Drawing Scale’ 1202 = ’Drawing Size’ 1203 = ’Interference Manager Approval Status’ 1204 = ’Interference Clash Type’ 1205 = ’Interference Manager Action’ 1207 = ’Interference Manager Approval Method’ 1208 = ’Clash Checking Option’ 1209 = ’Clash Checking Volume Filter Option’ 1310 = ’Report Source’ 1312 = ’Report Type’ 1410 = ’Design Review Type’ 1605 = ’Model Status’ 1610 = ’Force Units for FrameWorks Plus’ 1620 = ’Drawing View Direction’ 1630 = ’Drawing View Composition Status’ 1710 = ’Document Type’ 1720 = ’Document Sub-Type’ 1900 = ’Isometric Drawing Type’ 2000 = ’Orthographic Drawing Type’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

525

Appendix: Codelists

CL1010, Area Units (25) Convert to Destination Unit in CL No Unit Name 1 ftˆ2 1.0* E+00 3 inˆ2 6.944 444 E-03 5 ydˆ2 9.0* E+00 7 miˆ2 2.787 840 E+07 10 mmˆ2 1.076 391 E-05 12 cmˆ2 1.076 391 E-03 14 mˆ2 1.076 391 E+01 16 kmˆ2 1.076 391 E+07 25 [Blank] -9999.

526

Convert To First Unit

Dest. Unit mˆ2

Factor 9.290 304* E-02

A 0.0

cmˆ2

6.451 6* E+00

0.0

mˆ2

8.361 274 E-01

0.0

kmˆ2

2.589 988 E+00

0.0

mmˆ2

1

0.0

mmˆ2

1.0* E+02

0.0

cmˆ2

1.0* E+04

0.0

mˆ2

1.0* E+06

0.0

—

—

-9999.

B

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists

CL1028, Mass Units (40) Convert to Destination Unit in CL No Unit Name 1 lb 1.0* E+00 3 grain 1.428 571 E-04 9 USton 2.0* E+03 11 UKton 2.24* E+03 20 (Mu)g 2.204 622 E-09 22 mg 2.204 622 E-06 24 g 2.204 622 E-03 26 kg 2.204 622 E+00 28 Mg 2.204 622 E+03 40 [Blank] -9999.

Convert To First Unit

Dest. Unit kg

Factor 4.535 924 E-01

A 0.0

mg

6.479 891 E+01

0.0

Mg

9.071 847 E-01

0.0

Mg

1.016 047 E+00

0.0

(Mu)g

1

0.0

mg

1

0.0

g

1

0.0

kg

1

0.0

Mg

1

0.0

—

—

-9999.

B

CL1056, Temperature Units (15) Convert to Destination Unit in CL No Unit Name 1 degF 1.0* E+00 2 degC 1.8* E+00 3 degR 0.0* E+00 4 K 1.8* E+00 15 [Blank] -9999.

Convert To First Unit

Dest. Unit degC

Factor (degF - 32)/1.8

A 0.0

B

degC

1

+3.2* E+01

K

5/9

-4.596 900 E+02

K

1

-4.596 900 E+02

—

—

-9999.

CL1064, Pressure Units (40) NOTE: New entries in this codelist cannot be added by the user. Changes will NOT be recognized unless the software is changed to use them.

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

527

Appendix: Codelists Convert in CL No Unit Name B 1 psig [gage] 1.0* E+ 2 psi [absolute] E+01 1.0* E+00 4 inH2O [absolute] E+01 3.609 119 E-02 6 inH2O @ 32degF E+01 3.613 010 E-02 7 inHg [absolute] E+01 4.897 707 E-01 8 mmHg [absolute] E+01 1.933 672 E-02 9 atm [absolute] E+01 1.469 595 E+01 10 bar [absolute] E+01 1.450 377 E+01 11 bar (gage) [gage] 1.450 377 E+01 13 dyn/cmˆ2 [absolute] E+01 1.450 377 E-05 15 mmH2O [absolute] E+01 1.422 295 E-03 16 inHg @ 32degF E+01 4.911 054 E-01 17 kPa [absolute] E+01 1.450 377 E-01 18 MPa [absolute] E+01 1.450 377 E+02 19 Pa [absolute] E+01 1.450 377 E-04 20 kg/cm*2 (gage) [gage] 1.422 334 E+01 21 kg/cm*2 [absolute] E+01 1.422 334 E+01 22 Mpa_g 1.450 377 E+02 40 [Blank] -9999. 67 kPa_g 1.450 377 E-01

to Destination Unit Dest. Unit

Convert To First Unit

Factor

A

kPa

0.0

kPa

6.894 757 E+00

-1.469 595

kPa

2.488 4 E-01

-1.469 595

kPa

2.491 14 E-01

-1.469 595

kPa

3.376 85 E+00

-1.469 595

kPa

1.333 22 E-01

-1.469 595

kPa

1.013 250* E+02 -1.469 595

kPa

1.0* E+02

psig

1.450 377 E+01

Pa

1.0* E-01

-1.469 595

kPa

9.806 38 E-03

-1.469 595

kPa

3.386 38 E+00

-1.469 595

kPa

1

-1.469 595

kPa

1.0* E+03

-1.469 595

Pa

1

-1.469 595

psig

1.422 334 E+01

kPa

9.806 65 E+01

psig

1.450 377 E+02

—

—

psig

1.450 377 E-01

-1.469 595 0.0

0.0 -1.469 595 0.0 -9999. 0.0

CL1074, Density Units (35) Convert to Destination Unit

Convert To First

Unit in CL

528

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists No B 1 1.0* E+00 3 6.228 834 5 7.480 519 7 1.0* E+03 9 1.728 000 11 2.0* E+03 17 -9999. 20 6.242 797 22 6.242 797 24 6.242 797 26 6.242 797 35 -9999.

Unit Name

Dest. Unit

Factor

A

lb/ftˆ3

kg/mˆ3

1.601 846 E+01

0.0

lb/UKgal E+00 lb/USgal E+00 kip/ftˆ3

kg/mˆ3

9.977 633 E+01

0.0

kg/mˆ3

1.198 264 E+02

0.0

kg/mˆ3

1.601 846 E+04

0.0

lb/inˆ3 kg/mˆ3 E+03 USton/ftˆ3 kg/mˆ3

2.767 990 E+04

0.0

3.203 692 E+04

0.0

degAPI

kg/mˆ3

Use API2564 Tbl -9999.

kg/mˆ3 E-02 g/cmˆ3 E+01 kg/L E+01 kg/dmˆ3 E+01 [Blank]

kg/mˆ3

1

0.0

kg/dmˆ3

1

0.0

kg/mˆ3

1.0* E+03

0.0

kg/mˆ3

1 E+03

0.0

—

—

-9999.

CL1100, Weld Type (100) NOTE: Codelist numbers 0-19 have been reserved for shop welds, numbers 20-29 have been reserved for field welds, and 30-39 have been reserved for offshore welds. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = [Blank] 2 = ’Pipe connector’ 11 = ’Shop weld’ 21 = ’Field weld at assembly site’ 22 = ’Field weld at job site’ 23 = ’Field weld at job site for loose flange’ 24 = ’Field fit weld at job site’

CL1162, Force Units (40) 1 = ’lbf’ 3 = ’kipf’ 5 = ’UStonf’ 7 = ’UKtonf’ 20 = ’dyn’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

529

Appendix: Codelists 22 24 26 28 40

= = = = =

’mN’ ’N’ ’kgf’ ’kN’ [Blank]

CL1201, Drawing Scale (540) (1-499) English System of Units 1 = [Blank] 104 = ’=1/8"= 1’ 0"’ 108 = ’=1/4"= 1’ 0"’ 112 = ’=3/8"= 1’ 0"’ 116 = ’=1/2"= 1’ 0"’ 124 = ’=3/4"= 1’ 0"’ 132 = ’=1"= 1’ 0"’ 164 = ’=2"= 1’ 0"’ (500-599) Metric System of Units 500 = ’1:10’ 510 = ’1:4’ 530 = ’1:2’ 540 = ’1:1’

CL1202, Drawing Size (199) (1-99) English System of Units 1 = ’A’ 2 = ’B’ 3 = ’C’ 4 = ’D’ 5 = ’E’ 6 = ’F’ (100-199) Metric System of Units 101 = ’A0’ 102 = ’A1’ 103 = ’A2’ 104 = ’A3’ 105 = ’A4’

CL1203, Interference Manager Approval Status (99) 1 = ’Unapproved’ 2 = ’Approved’ 99 = ’Cleared’

530

[User has approved clash] [Software detected that clash has been fixed]

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists

CL1204, Interference Clash Type (10) 1 = ' Hard versus Hard' ; 2 = ' Hard versus Soft' ; 3 = ' Hard versus Construction' ; 4 = ' Soft versus Soft' ; 5 = ' Soft versus Construction' ; 6 = ' Construct vs Construct=Construction versus Construction' ; 105 = ' Hard vs Fproof' ; 106 = ' Hard vs Insul' ; 110 = ' Hard vs HardMaint' ; 111 = ' Hard vs HardAccess' ; 112 = ' Hard vs HardSafety' ; 113 = ' Hard vs HardOperating' ; 120 = ' Hard vs SoftMaint' ; 121 = ' Hard vs SoftAccess' ; 122 = ' Hard vs SoftSafety' ; 123 = ' Hard vs SoftOperating' ; 206 = ' Soft vs Insul' ; 220 = ' Soft vs SoftMaint' ; 221 = ' Soft vs SoftAccess' ; 222 = ' Soft vs SoftSafety' ; 223 = ' Soft vs SoftOperating' ; 501 = ' Fproof vs Hard' ; 502 = ' Fproof vs Soft' ; 504 = ' Fproof vs CT' ; 505 = ' Fproof vs Fproof' ; 506 = ' Fproof vs Insul' ; 510 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ; 511 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ; 512 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ; 513 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ; 520 = ' Fproof vs HardMain' ; 521 = ' Fproof vs HardAccess' ; 522 = ' Fproof vs HardSafety' ; 523 = ' Fproof vs HardOperat' ; 602 = ' Insul vs Soft' ; 604 = ' Insul vs CT' ; 606 = ' Insul vs Insul' ; 620 = ' Insul vs SoftMain' ; 621 = ' Insul vs SoftAccess' ; 622 = ' Insul vs SoftSafety' ; 623 = ' Insul vs SoftOperat' ; 1001 = ' HardMain vs Hard' ; 1002 = ' HardMain vs Soft' ; 1004 = ' HardMain vs CT' ; 1005 = ' HardMain vs Fproof' ; 1006 = ' HardMain vs Insul' ; 1010 = ' HardMain vs HardMain' ; 1012 = ' HardMain vs HardSafety' ; 1013 = ' HardMain vs HardOperat' ;

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

531

Appendix: Codelists 1020 1021 1022 1023 1101 1102 1104 1105 1106 1110 1111 1112 1113 1120 1121 1122 1123 1201 1202 1204 1205 1206 1210 1211 1212 1213 1220 1221 1222 1223 1301 1302 1304 1305 1306 1310 1311 1312 1313 1320 1321 1322 1323 2002 2004 2006 2020 2021 2022 2023 2102 2104 2106 2120

532

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '

HardMain vs SoftMain' ; HardMain vs SoftAccess' ; HardMain vs SoftSafety' ; HardMain vs SoftOperat' ; HardAcc vs Hard' ; HardAcc vs Soft' ; HardAcc vs CT' ; HardAccess vs Fproof' ; HardAccess vs Insul' ; HardAcc vs HardMain' ; HardAcc vs HardAcc' ; HardAcc vs HardSafety' ; HardAcc vs HardOperat' ; HardAcc vs SoftMain' ; HardAcc vs SoftAcc' ; HardAcc vs SoftSafety' ; HardAcc vs SoftOperat' ; HardSafety vs Hard' ; HardSafety vs Soft' ; HardSafety vs CT' ; HardSafety vs Fproof' ; HardSafety vs Insul' ; HardSafety vs HardMain' ; HardSafety vs HardAcc' ; HardSafety vs HardSafety' HardSafety vs HardOperat' HardSafety vs SoftMain' ; HardSafety vs SoftAccess' HardSafety vs SoftSafety' HardSafety vs SoftOperat' HardOperat vs Hard' ; HardOperat vs Soft' ; HardOperat vs CT' ; HardOperat vs Fproof' ; HardOperat vs Insul' ; HardOperat vs HardMain' ; HardOperat vs HardAccess' HardOperat vs HardSafety' HardOperat vs HardOperat' HardOperat vs SoftMain' ; HardOperat vs SoftAccess' HardOperat vs SoftSafety' HardOperat vs SoftOperat' SoftMain vs Soft' ; SoftMain vs CT' ; SoftMain vs Insul' ; SoftMain vs SoftMain' ; SoftMain vs SoftAccess' ; SoftMain vs SoftSafety' ; SoftMain vs SoftOperat' ; SoftAccess vs Soft' ; SoftAccess vs CT' ; SoftAccess vs Insul' ; SoftAccess vs SoftMain' ;

; ; ; ; ;

; ; ; ; ; ;

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 2121 2122 2123 2202 2204 2206 2220 2221 2222 2223 2302 2304 2306 2320 2321 2322 2323

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '

SoftAccess SoftAccess SoftAccess SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftSafety SoftOperat SoftOperat SoftOperat SoftOperat SoftOperat SoftOperat SoftOperat

vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs vs

SoftAccess' SoftSafety' SoftOperat' Soft' ; CT' ; Insul' ; SoftMain' ; SoftAccess' SoftSafety' SoftOperat' Soft' ; CT' ; Insul' ; SoftMain' ; SoftAccess' SoftSafety' SoftOperat'

; ; ;

; ; ;

; ; ;

CL1205, Interference Manager Action (10) 1 2 3 4

= = = =

’No Action by user’ ’Approve Real Clash’ ’Approve False Clash’ ’Transfer Responsibility’

CL1207, Interference Manager Approval Method(10) 1 = ’Not Approved’ 2 = ’Accepted by Graphical Review’ 3 = ’Accepted from List’

CL1208, Clash Checking Option 1 2 3 4

= = = =

’Unknown’ ’Project Mode’ ’Design Area Mode’ ’Pre-defined Volume Mode’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

533

Appendix: Codelists

CL1209, Clash Checking Volume Filter Option 1 = ’Volume Filter Is Inactive’ 2 = ’Volume Filter Is Active’

CL1310, Report Source (99) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Codelist values are reserved as follows: 0-10 from design data, 11-20 from project data, 21-30 reference data. 1 = ’ MTO Report 2 = ’ Drawing Report 3 = ’ PID Report Header 11 = ’ Project Control Report 12 = ’ Clash Management Report 21 = ’ Piping Job Spec Report 22 = ’ Table Checker Report

’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’

CL1312, Report Type (999) NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical to those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers used must not exceed ’999’. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 601 682 685 687 689 690 692 696

= = = = = = = =

’Piping RDB Reports’ ’Equipment List’ ’Piping Line List’ ’Piping Segments Report’ ’Piping Components MTO Report’ ’Pipe Supports Report’ ’Instrument List’ ’Piping Release Report’

CL1410, Design Review Type (10) NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = ’Client Review’ 2 = ’Informal Review’

534

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists

CL1605, Model Status 1 = ’Undefined’ 11 = ’Preliminary’ 12 = ’Temporary’ 21 = ’Permanent’

CL1610, Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40) 1 2 3 4

= = = =

’LBS’ ’KIPS’ ’N’ ’kN’

CL1620, Drawing View Directions (7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

= = = = = = =

’Plan’ ’East Elevation’ ’North Elevation’ ’Isometric’ ’West Elevation’ ’South Elevation’ ’Plan (Vertical)’

CL1630, Drawing View Composition Status (4) 1 2 3 4

= = = =

’Drawing View Not Composed’ ’Drawing View Composed’ ’Composite Drawing View Not Composed’ ’Composite Drawing View Composed’

CL1710, Document Source (99) NOTE: Do not make any new entries to this codelist. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 1 = ’Process RDB report’ 2 = ’Process TDB report’ 5 = ’Process TDB drawing’ 11 = ’P&I RDB report’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

535

Appendix: Codelists 12 = ’P&I TDB report’ 15 = ’P&I TDB drawing’ 21 = ’Vessel RDB report’ 22 = ’Vessel TDB report’ 25 = ’Vessel TDB drawing’ 31 = ’Heat Transfer RDB report’ 32 = ’Heat Transfer TDB report’ 35 = ’Heat Transfer TDB drawing’ 41 = ’Mechanical RDB report’ 42 = ’Mechanical TDB report’ 45 = ’Mechanical TDB drawing’ 46 = ’Piping Specialty RDB report’ 47 = ’Piping Specialty TDB report’ 51 = ’Civil/Structural RDB report’ 52 = ’Civil/Structural TDB report’ 55 = ’Civil/Structural TDB drawing’ 61 62 65 67

= = = =

’Piping ’Piping ’Piping ’Piping

RDB report’ TDB report (PD_Report)’ TDB drawing (PD_Draw)’ isometric TDB drawing’

71 = ’Instrument RDB report’ 72 = ’Instrument TDB report’ 75 = ’Instrument TDB drawing’ 81 = ’Electrical RDB report’ 82 = ’Electrical TDB report’ 85 = ’Electrical TDB drawing’ 91 = ’HVAC RDB report’ 92 = ’HVAC TDB report’ 95 = ’HVAC TDB drawing’ 99 = ’No planned PDS source’

CL1720, Document Type (999) NOTE: The PDS source of each document type is shown to the right of the document type separated from it by the character ’|’ on the basis of codelist numbers defined in CL1710, Document Source. In editing this codelist set, respect the number ranges identified below. (100-199) Process Documents 101 = ’Process RDB Reports | 1’ 121 = ’Process Flow Diagrams | 5’

536

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 125 127 131 133 199

= = = = =

’Materials of Construction Drawings | 5’ ’Temperature/Pressure Diagrams | 5’ ’Equipment Process Datasheets | 2’ ’Instrument Process Datasheets | 2’ ’Other Process Documents | 99’

(200-299) Vessel Documents 201 = ’Vessel RDB Reports | 21’ 205 = ’Vessel Job Specifications | 99’ 211 = ’Vessel Requisitions | 22’ 231 = ’Reactor Drawings | 25’ 233 = ’Regenerator Drawings | 25’ 235 = ’Cyclone Drawings | 25’ 237 = ’Transfer Line Drawings | 25’ 239 = ’Tower Drawings | 25’ 241 = ’Drum Drawings | 25’ 243 = ’Tank Drawings | 25’ 245 = ’Silo Drawings | 25’ 247 = ’Stack Drawings | 25’ 299 = ’Other Vessel Documents | 99’ (300-399) Heat Transfer Documents 301 = ’Heat Transfer RDB Reports | 31’ 305 = ’Heat Transfer Job Specifications | 99’ 311 = ’Heat Transfer Requisitions | 32’ 331 = ’Heat Transfer Drawings | 35’ 399 = ’Other Heat Transfer Documents | 99’ (400-499) Mechanical Equipment Documents 401 = ’Mechanical RDB Reports | 41’ 405 = ’Mechanical Equipment Job Specifications | 99’ 411 = ’Mechanical Equipment Requisitions | 42’ 431 = ’Mechanical Equipment Drawings | 45’ 499 = ’Other Mechanical Equipment Documents | 99’ (500-599) Civil/Structural Documents 501 = ’Civil/Structural RDB Reports | 51’ 505 = ’Civil/Structural Job Specifications | 99’ 511 = ’Civil/Structural Requisitions | 99’ 531 = ’Site Preparation Drawings | 99’ 535 = ’Foundation Location Drawings | 65’ 537 = ’Piling Drawings | 65’ 538 = ’Foundation Drawings | 55’ 540 = ’Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’ 545 = ’Concrete Structural Drawings | 55’ 550 = ’Steel Structural Drawings | 55’ 570 = ’Building Drawings | 99’ 599 = ’Other Civil/Structural Documents | 99’ (600-699) Piping Documents 601 = ’Piping RDB Reports | 61’ 602 = ’Piping Specialty RDB Reports | 46’ 605 = ’Piping Job Specifications | 99’ 611 = ’Piping Commodity Requisitions | 99’

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

537

Appendix: Codelists 612 631 633 641 643 651 661 663 665 667 669 671 673 675 681 682 684 685 687 689 690 692 696 699

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’Piping Specialty Requisitions | 47’ ’P&IDs | 15’ ’Hydrotest P&IDs | 15’ ’Plot Plans | 65’ ’Equipment Arrangement Drawings | 65’ ’Piping Underground Drawings | 65’ ’Equipment Orientations | 65’ ’Piping One Line Drawings | 65’ ’Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’ ’Pipeline Alignment Drawings | 65’ ’Piping Isometric Drawings | 67’ ’Piping Spool Drawings | 67’ ’Spring Hanger Drawings | 99’ ’Pipe Support Details | 99’ ’P&ID Equipment List | 12’ ’Equipment List | 62’ ’P&ID Line List | 12’ ’Piping Line List | 62’ ’Piping Segments Report | 62’ ’Piping Components MTO Report | 62’ ’Pipe Supports Report | 62’ ’Instrument List | 62’ ’Piping Release Report | 62’ ’Other Piping Documents | 99’

(700-799) Instrument Documents 701 = ’Instrument RDB Reports | 71’ 705 = ’Instrument Job Specifications | 99’ 711 = ’Instrument Requisitions | 72’ 721 = ’Instrument Logic Diagrams | 75’ 723 = ’Instrument Loop Diagrams | 75’ 731 = ’Instrument Location Plans | 65’ 733 = ’Instrument Control House/Panel Drawings | 99’ 735 = ’Instrument Hook Up Drawings | 75’ 737 = ’Instrument Heat Tracing Drawings | 75’ 739 = ’Instrument Wiring Drawings | 99’ 771 = ’Instrument Index | 72’ 799 = ’Other Instrument Documents | 99’ (800-899) Electrical Documents 801 = ’Electrical RDB Reports | 81’ 805 = ’Electrical Job Specifications | 99’ 811 = ’Electrical Requisitions | 99’ 831 = ’Electrical One Line Diagrams | 99’ 841 = ’Electrical Area Classification Drawings | 65’ 851 = ’Electrical Underground Drawings | 65’ 861 = ’Electrical Power Drawings | 99’ 863 = ’Electrical Communications Drawings | 99’ 865 = ’Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’ 867 = ’Electrical Heat Tracing Drawings | 99’ 899 = ’Other Electrical Documents | 99’ (900-999) HVAC Documents 901 = ’HVAC RDB Reports | 91’

538

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Appendix: Codelists 905 911 931 971 999

= = = = =

’HVAC Job Specifications | 99’ ’HVAC Requisitions | 99’ ’HVAC Flow Diagrams | 99’ ’HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details | 65’ ’Other HVAC Documents | 99’

CL1900, Isometric Drawing Type NOTE: In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. Some data displays require that only values to the left of the "=" sign be shown; other reports require that only values to the right of the "=" sign be displayed. 1 = ’Fabrication’ 2 = ’Spool’ 3 = ’Stress’

CL2000, PD_Draw Document Type (999) NOTE: Document types defined below must be numerically identical to those defined in CL1720, Document Type; codelist numbers used must not exceed ’999’. In editing this codelist set, do not change the meaning of existing codelist values. 535 537 540 641 643 651 661 663 665 667 731 841 851 865 971

= = = = = = = = = = = = = = =

’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’ ’

Foundation Location Drawings’ Piling Drawings’ Structural Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’ Plot Plans’ Equipment Arrangement Drawings’ Piping Underground Drawings’ Equipment Orientations’ Piping One Line Drawings’ Piping Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’ Pipeline Alignment Drawings’ Instrument Location Plans’ Electrical Area Classification Drawings’ Electrical Underground Drawings’ Lighting Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’ HVAC Perspectives, Plans, Sections and Details’

This form allows you to manipulate various data libraries and database tables. For more information on specific data and libraries, see Graphic Commodity Library Manager (on page 199), Piping Assembly Library Manager (on page 386), and Physical Data Library Manager (on page 208).

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

539

Index A Abbreviations • 227 About Library Merger • 370 Add Entry to Material Description Library • 95 Alphanumeric Labels • 344 Appendix Codelists • 423 Reference Data Manager Error Messages • 421

B Batch Processes • 29 Bend Deflection Table (G04) • 158 Bends and Branches • 198 Bolt Commodity Code Table • 166 Bolts, Gaskets, and Flanges • 198 Branch Insertion Tables • 145 BRANCHID.LN File • 148

C CL1010, Area Units (25) • 526 CL1028, Mass Units (40) • 527 CL1056, Temperature Units (15) • 527 CL1064, Pressure Units (40) • 527 CL1074, Density Units (35) • 528 CL1100, Weld Type (100) • 529 CL1162, Force Units (40) • 529 CL1201, Drawing Scale (540) • 530 CL1202, Drawing Size (199) • 530 CL1203, Interference Manager Approval Status (99) • 530 CL1204, Interference Clash Type (10) • 531 CL1205, Interference Manager Action (10) • 533 CL1207, Interference Manager Approval Method(10) • 533 CL1208, Clash Checking Option • 533 CL1209, Clash Checking Volume Filter Option • 534 CL125, Fluid Code/Connector Type (999) • 428 CL130, Construction Status (15) • 432 CL1310, Report Source (99) • 534 CL1312, Report Type (999) • 534 CL1410, Design Review Type (10) • 534

CL145, Materials Grade (4500) • 433 CL148, Piping Materials Class Description (31999) • 462 CL160, Responsibility (25) • 470 CL1605, Model Status • 535 CL1610, Force Units for FrameWorks Plus (40) • 535 CL1620, Drawing View Directions (7) • 535 CL1630, Drawing View Composition Status (4) • 535 CL1710, Document Source (99) • 535 CL1720, Document Type (999) • 536 CL180, Fabrication Category (99) • 471 CL190, Coating Requirements (99) • 471 CL1900, Isometric Drawing Type • 539 CL200, Heat Tracing Requirements (10) • 472 CL2000, PD_Draw Document Type (999) • 539 CL210, Heat Tracing Media (60) • 472 CL220, Insulation Purpose (40) • 473 CL230, Cleaning Requirements (99) • 473 CL31, Object Types for Orthographic Drawings (40) • 426 CL330, CP Type/Termination/Preparation (999) • 473 CL332, Schedule / Thickness Override • 477 CL340, Safety Classification (99) • 478 CL35, Approval Status (10) • 427 CL36, Structural Approval Status (15) • 427 CL360, Stress Analysis Requirements (15) • 479 CL365, Reporting Requirements (25) • 479 CL366, Requirement to Reconstruct (10) • 479 CL37, HVAC Approval Status (10) • 428 CL380, Piping Component Type (2500) • 479 CL390, Action (40) • 487 CL400, Option (999) • 487 CL420, Piping Component Type/Source (25) • 494 CL425, Piping/Tubing Type (25) • 495 CL430, Instrument Component Type/Source (25) • 495 CL499, Piping Notes (999) • 495 CL50, Hold Status (10) • 428 CL530, Accessory/Item Type (125) • 497 CL550, Operator Actuator Type (200) • 498

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

541

Index CL570, Design Standard (200) • 499 CL572, Wall Thickness Equation • 499 CL575, Geometry Standard (31999) • 499 CL576, Table Suffix/End Standard - Green (999) • 513 CL577, Table Suffix/End Standard - Red (999) • 517 CL578, Weight Code (399) • 522 CL69, Equipment Divisions/Form Code (99) • 428 CL990, Types of Piping Commodity Data Forms • 524 CL999, Standard Note Title (2000) • 525 Clash Management Labels • 345 Clear Error Messages • 370 Commodity Code Attribute Message • 345 Commodity Implied Data Command • 104 Commodity Item Name Table (G02) • 156 Common Tools on the PD_Shell Forms • 24 Component Insulation Exclusion Data (231) • 69 Component Mirror Table • 170 Compress • 200, 210, 324, 335, 388 Compress Destination Library • 369 Compress Library • 174, 348 Connect Point Data • 196 Contents • 370 Copy to Destination • 369 Create Data • 324 Create Label Attribute Data • 353 Create Label Data • 348 Create Label Graphic Data • 351 Create Library • 174, 200, 209, 284, 324, 335, 347, 388 Create Standard Note Type • 336 Create/Batch Assembly Data • 389 Create/Batch Graphic Commodity Data • 201 Create/Batch Physical Commodity Data • 211 Create/Batch Spec Tables • 175 Create/Interactive Graphic Commodity Data • 201 Create/Interactive Physical Commodity Data • 210 Create/Interactive Piping Assembly Data • 388 Create/Interactive Spec Tables • 175 Create/Revise Instrument Specification Data • 100 Create/Revise Piping Commodity Implied Material Data • 105

542

Create/Revise Piping Commodity Specification Data • 89 Create/Revise Piping Materials Class Data • 84 Create/Revise Piping Specialty Specification Data • 97 Create/Revise Tap Properties Data • 102

D Data Retrieval from the Physical Data Library • 195 Data Security • 32 Default End Preparation Table • 172 Default Project Control Data • 35 Delete • 369 Delete Data • 326 Delete Graphic Commodity Data • 204 Delete Label Data • 361 Delete Option • 112 Delete Physical Commodity Data • 213 Delete Piping Assembly Data • 391 Delete Spec Tables • 177 Delete Standard Note Data • 339 Delivered Reference Data • 18 Discrimination Data Creation Form • 120, 299 Discrimination Data Deletion Form • 124, 301 Discrimination Data Form • 298 Discrimination Data Revision Form • 122, 300 Displayable Attribute Labels • 344 Displayable Attribute Message • 344

E Edit Label Description • 369 Edit Label Number • 369 Edit Menu • 368 Example of Physical Data Look-Up • 195 Exit • 368 Extract Assembly Data • 394 Extract Data • 329 Extract Graphic Commodity Data • 206 Extract Physical Commodity Data • 216 Extract Spec Tables • 180 Extract Standard Note Type • 340

F Features • 75 Field Fit Length Table • 170 File Menu • 367

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Index Fire and Safety Piping Components (6P4C and 6Q4C) • 231 Fittings (6P2C, 6P3C, 6Q2C, and 6Q3C) • 230 Flange Insulation Exclusion Data (232) • 71 Fluid Code Table • 151 Format Creation/Revision Form • 117, 296 Format Deletion Form • 118, 297

G Gasket Diameter Table • 169 Gasket Separation Table • 149 Generic Table for Bolted Ends (G10) • 236 Generic Table for Female Ends (G30) • 243 Generic Table for Male Ends (G20) • 241 Generic Table for Studs in Bolted Connections w/ Term Type (G12T) • 239 Generic Table for Studs used in Bolted Connections (G12) • 237 Generic Table for Weight and Thickness Data, Male Ends (G50) • 244 Generic Tables • 232 Graphic Commodity Data • 183 Graphic Commodity Data Introduction • 16 Graphic Commodity Library • 183 Graphic Commodity Library Manager • 199 Graphic Commodity Modules List • 207

H Help • 29 Help Menu • 370

I Implied Data • 94 Information • 368 Instrument Body (I80 and P80) • 264 Instrument Component Specification Data (204) • 58 Instrument Component Tables • 264 Instrument Data Command • 99 Instrument Operator (I81 and P81) • 266 Introduction • 13 Invert Selection • 369 Isometric Drawing Labels • 345

L Label Description Library • 343 Label Description Library Introduction • 17 Label Description Library Manager • 347 Label Library Merge Workflow • 370 Label Library Merger • 366

Label Library Merger Interface • 367 Label Types • 343 Library List • 330 List Assembly Data • 393 List Data • 328 List Graphic Commodity Data • 205 List of Piping Materials Classes Form • 94 List Physical Commodity Data • 216 List Spec Tables • 180 List Standard Note Data • 339 Load Database • 341 Load, Replace, or Replace Commodity Subset Options • 110 Load/Revise Batch • 286 Load/Revise Interactive • 285 Long Material Description Library • 279

M Mass Annotation Options • 358 Material Data in the Material Reference Database • 272 Material Description Data • 269 Material Description Data Introduction • 16 Material Description Library Manager • 282 Material Reference Database Structure • 41 Materials Data Table • 142 MicroStation V7 Checker • 415 MTO Tables and Functions • 172

N Neutral File Input • 42 Nominal Piping Diameter Table • 137 Notes for Graphic Commodity Data • 196

O Open Destination Library • 368 Open Source Label Library 1 • 368 Open Source Label Library 2 • 368 Operator Mirror Table • 171

P Parametric Shape Definitions • 192 PD Shell • 21 PD_Shell Form Conventions • 24 PDS Environment • 21 Physical Data Definitions • 187 Physical Data Library Manager • 208 Physical Data Tables • 194 Pipe Length Threshold Table (G07) • 160 Pipe Support Tutorial Definition Manager • 323

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

543

Index Pipe, Tubing, and Hose • 199 Piping Assembly Language • 373 Piping Assembly Library • 373 Piping Assembly Library Introduction • 17 Piping Assembly Library Manager • 386 Piping Commodity Data Command • 87 Piping Commodity Implied Material Data (212) • 66 Piping Commodity Size-Dependent Material Data (211) • 64 Piping Commodity Specification Data (202) • 49 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP and RCP Data (P61,P62,P63,P64,P65) • 263 Piping Component Table for Empty Weight based on GCP Data (P51,P52,P59) • 258 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves (P60A) • 260 Piping Component Table For Empty Weight of Valves, Overflow Data (P60B) • 261 Piping Component Table for GCP Data (P11A, P15A) • 251 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators (P31A) • 256 Piping Component Table for Operators and Actuators, Overflow Data (P31B) • 257 Piping Component Table GCP Overflow Data (P11B, P15B) • 252 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Data (P21A, P25A, P26A, P27A, P28A, P29A) • 253 Piping Component Table Green and Red CP Overflow Data (P21B,P25B,P26B,P27B,P28B) • 255 Piping Component Tables • 245 Piping Component Tables for Specialty Components • 264 Piping Construction Tolerance Exclusion Data (233) • 73 Piping Job Spec Report Manager • 114 Piping Job Specification • 41 Piping Job Specification Introduction • 15 Piping Job Specification Manager • 107 Piping Job Specification Tables • 135 Piping Job Specification Tables Command • 173 Piping Materials Class Data (201) • 45 Piping Materials Class Data Command • 84 Piping Specialty Data Command • 96 Piping Specialty Specification Data (203) • 56 PJS Tables and Functions • 135

544

Placing Taps in Assemblies • 383 Preface PDS • 11 Preferred Bolt Length Table (G11) • 161 Project Organization • 13 Proposed RDB Changes Report • 410

R RDB Options File • 76 RDB Tables • 155 Reference Data Archival • 34 Reference Data Conflict Report • 397 Reference Data Impact Report • 407 Reference Data Location • 35 Reference Data Manager • 31 Reference Data Overview • 14 Reference Data Setup • 18 Reference Database Introduction • 17 Reference Database Management Data • 36 Reference Database Revision Manager • 395 Replace Batch • 287 Replace Interactive • 286 Report Approval Form • 131, 309 Report Assembly Data • 392 Report Creation Form • 126, 304 Report Data • 327 Report Deletion Form • 130, 308 Report Discrimination Data Form • 119 Report Form • 125, 303 Report Format Form • 116, 295 Report Graphic Commodity Data • 205 Report Label Data • 361 Report Labels • 345 Report Management Defaults Form • 133, 311 Report Multiple Submit Form • 131, 310 Report on Spec Tables • 178 Report Option • 112, 288 Report Physical Commodity Data • 214 Report Standard Note Library Contents • 338 Revise Data • 325 Revise Graphic Commodity Data • 202 Revise Label Data • 358 Revise Physical Commodity Data • 212 Revise Piping Assembly Data • 390 Revise Report Form • 128, 306 Revise Spec Tables • 176 Revise Standard Note Type • 336

S Sample Piping Assembly Files • 384

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

Index Sample Table Checker Output • 312 Search Criteria Form • 121 Segment Pipe Run Length Threshold Table (G06) • 159 Select All • 368 Short Material Description Library • 273 Spec Writer • 74 Specialty Material Description Library • 281 Specialty Piping Components (6P6C and 6Q6C) • 231 Standard Note Library • 331 Standard Note Library Introduction • 17 Standard Note Library Manager • 334 Standard Note Types List • 342 Sub-Symbol Processor • 187 Support Tutorial Definition Manager • 323 Symbol Processors • 186

W Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations • 152 Weld Clearance Table • 167 Weld Graphics Dimensions Table • 168 Weld Type Table • 164 What's New in Reference Data Manager (PD_Data) • 12

T Table Change Report • 401 Table Checker • 107, 291 Table Checker Form • 293 Table Conventions • 219 Table Formats and Naming Conventions • 219 Table Requirements • 228 Tables Required for Instrument Components • 231 Tables Required for Piping Components • 228 Tap Properties Data (205) • 61 Tap Properties Data Command • 102 Temperature and Pressure Service Limits Table • 136 Thickness Data Tables • 140

U Unapproved ==> Approved • 174, 200, 285, 324, 335, 348, 388 Unapproved to Approved • 210 Unselect All • 369 Using the Report Commands • 115, 294

V Validate • 369 Valves (6Q1C) • 229 Variables for Generic Tables • 232 Variables for Specific Tables • 247 Verify RDB Library • 417

Plant Design System (PDS) Reference Data Manager (PD_Data)

545